JP2019069287A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To suppress a player from getting tired of a game in an early stage.SOLUTION: A game machine is configured to display reservation patterns in plural pattern rows, and notify a player of win/loss determination information of a game reserved by the combination. In dynamic display modes of an identification pattern which indicates a win/loss determination result, when a specific dynamic display mode is displayed, one reservation pattern is selected from reservation patterns, and the pattern row which constitutes the reservation pattern is determined again. According to the structure, a player can expect about re-determination of the reservation pattern, when the specific dynamic display mode is displayed, and the player can enjoy the dynamic display mode of the identification pattern and a performance of the reservation pattern, and it is possible to suppress a player from getting tired of a game in an early stage.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, a lottery is performed along with a winning of the game ball to the starting opening, and after a predetermined symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the display device, a lottery game is performed to stop and display the symbol indicating the lottery result Ru. If the game ball is further prized at the starting opening while the predetermined symbol is fluctuating, the right to execute the lottery game is held for a predetermined number of times, and the symbol indicating the number of held pieces is displayed on the display device.

JP 2012-239732 A

  In this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem that the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit, and the game gets bored before the big hit game is started.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from being bored with a game at an early stage by executing various effects. With the goal.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises: main control means for executing control of a game; and slave control means for executing control of a game based on a control signal from the main control means; Acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the start condition, the main control means having:
Pass / fail judgment means for judging the success or failure of the lottery game based on the establishment of the lottery condition based on the establishment of the lottery conditions by the acquisition means, and pass / fail judgment for notifying the sub-control means of the judgment result of the pass / fail judgment means The production condition generation means for generating a signal, generation signal generation means for generating a production signal for determining an effect based on the determination result of the determination based on the determination result of the determination of the determination means, and the lottery condition Storage means for storing the first information until the establishment, and first information signal generation means for generating a first information signal to the slave control means based on the fact that the first information is stored in the storage means And prior success / failure determination signal generation means for generating an advance success / failure determination signal based on said first information before said lottery condition is satisfied, and notifying said sub-control means. Means First display means for displaying identification information indicating the result of the determination on the basis of the determination result from the main control means; display control means for causing the first display means to dynamically display the identification information; Dynamic display mode storage means for storing a plurality of different dynamic display modes for dynamically displaying the identification information, and one of the dynamic display mode storage means based on the effect signal from the main control means from the dynamic display mode storage means Dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode, and the number of pieces of the first information stored in the storage means indicated by the first information signal based on the reception of the first information signal A second display means for displaying second identification information to be shown; and a prior information storage means for storing prior information for each establishment of the start condition based on the prior yes or no determination signal; Information is predetermined The display unit is configured by a symbol row displayed by a plurality of symbols having an order, and the display means is capable of displaying a plurality of symbols in the number display region displaying the second identification information and the number display region A display area, and the slave control means determines a symbol to be displayed as the second identification information based on the prior information from the symbol array, and is configured by the plurality of second identification information Based on the fact that symbol determination means for determining the combination of symbols to notify the player of the content of the prior information in combination of the selected symbols, and the lottery condition of the first information corresponding to the second identification information being established A display position changing unit that changes the display position of the second identification information to a display position corresponding to the number of new first information based on a change in the number of the first information stored in the storage unit; , Said identification information is specified When dynamically displayed in the dynamic display mode, at least one of the number display areas is determined, and the combination of symbols displayed in the number display area is determined again, and the symbol display area is displayed. And re-symbol determination means to be displayed on the display.

  According to the first aspect of the invention, in the main control means for executing control of the game, the first information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the start condition. Based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the first game acquired by the acquiring means is subjected to the lottery judgment of the lottery game. A yes / no decision signal generation means generates a yes / no decision signal for notifying the secondary control means of the yes / no decision result of the yes / no decision means. Based on the determination result of the success or failure determination means, the effect signal generation means generates an effect signal for determining an effect based on the determination result. The first information is stored by the storage means until the lottery condition is established. Based on the fact that the first information is stored in the storage means, the first information signal is generated by the first information signal generation means in the slave control means. Before the lottery condition is established, a priori pass / fail judgment signal based on the first information is generated by the priori pass / fail judgment signal generating means and notified to the sub control means.

  In the secondary control means, based on the yes / no decision signal output from the main control means, identification information indicating the yes / no decision result is displayed by the first display means. The identification information is dynamically displayed by the display control means on the first display means. A plurality of different dynamic display modes for dynamically displaying identification information are stored by the dynamic display mode storage means. One dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the effect signal from the dynamic display mode storage means from the main control means. Based on the reception of the first information signal, second identification information indicating the number of pieces of first information stored in the storage means indicated by the first information signal is displayed by the second display means. Prior information is stored by the prior information storage means each time the starting condition is established, based on the prior success / failure determination signal.

  The second identification information is configured by symbol rows displayed with a plurality of symbols having a predetermined order. In the display means, the respective second identification information is displayed in the number display area, and a symbol display area capable of displaying a plurality of symbols is provided in the number display area.

  In the slave control means, the symbol to be displayed as the second identification information is determined by the symbol determination means based on the prior information from the symbol row, and the content of the prior information is a combination of symbols composed of a plurality of second identification information. A combination of symbols to be notified to the player is determined. The display position of the second identification information is new based on the change in the number of the first information stored in the storage unit based on the satisfaction of the lottery condition of the first information corresponding to the second identification information. It is changed by the display position changing means to the display position corresponding to the number of information. When the identification information is dynamically displayed in a specific dynamic display mode, at least one of the number display areas is determined, and the combination of the symbols displayed in the number display area is again determined by the re-pattern determination means It is determined and displayed in the symbol display area.

  Thus, the player can expect the symbol displayed in the number display area to be re-varied by displaying the specific dynamic display mode. Thus, the player can enjoy the advance information notified by the second identification information as well as the display mode displayed in the specific dynamic display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early in the game.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically area | region division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is a figure which illustrated the display screen of the actual main display area. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display screen of the actual sub display area, (b) is a figure showing a list of normal holding symbols among the holding symbols, (c) is a holding symbol Among them, it is a diagram showing a list of special reserved symbols, (d) is a diagram showing a sub symbol out of the reserved symbol. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display mode of the holding symbol when the number of holdings is one, (b) is a figure which illustrated the display mode of the holding symbol when the number of holdings is two, (C) is a figure which illustrated the display mode of the reservation symbol when the number of reservations is three. (A) And (b) is a figure which illustrated the display mode of an example of a hit reservation symbol. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol, and (b) is the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol It is a schematic diagram which showed the correspondence relationship typically, (c) is a figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main control apparatus, (d) has schematically represented the content of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus. FIG. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing a temporary symbol selection table, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing a holding symbol lottery table. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed the retention symbol selection table typically, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the loss retention symbol selection table typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the model which showed an example of the display data table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed the transfer data table typically, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed an example of a pending | holding display data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding display update process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the suspension transfer processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the temporary holding symbol selection processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation symbol selection processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding number display update process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which shows the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device . (A) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display mode of the display screen when the pending number is 0 in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a display screen when the pending number is 1 in 2nd Embodiment It is the figure which illustrated the display mode of (c) is the figure which illustrated the display mode of the display screen when the number of pending | holding numbers in 2nd Embodiment is two. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display mode of the display screen when the number of pending | holding numbers is 3 in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a display screen when the number of pending | holding number in 2nd Embodiment is four. It is the figure which illustrated the display mode of. (A) And (b) is a figure which illustrated the display mode of the display screen when the number of pending | holding numbers is 3 in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed the coordinate of the display screen of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the coordinate selection table of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the coordinate selection table of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the display area setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display mode of the reservation symbol of the number of pending | holding numbers in 3rd Embodiment per 3rd, and (b) is a display mode of the 2nd chance number display of the pending | holding number in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the various counters of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment, (b) shows typically the content of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the starting winning a prize process 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding display update process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flow chart which showed pending transfer processing 2 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the winning a prize command reception processing which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control control equipment in 3rd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed the list of the reservation symbol row in 4th Embodiment, (b) is the figure shown about the field of the display screen in a 4th embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed the display mode of the retention symbol at the time of 1 number of retention of a prize in 4th Embodiment, and (b) is a display mode of 1 number of suspension symbol stop in 4th Embodiment. FIG. (A) is a figure which showed the display mode of the reservation symbol at the time of a prize number 2 prize-winning in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a display mode of 2 suspension symbol number stop in 4th Embodiment. FIG. (A) is a figure which showed the display mode of the reservation symbol at the time of a prize number 3 prize-winning in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a display mode of 3 suspension symbol stop in the 4th embodiment. FIG. (A) is a figure which showed the display mode of the retention symbol at the time of a prize number of 4 holding in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a display mode of the suspension number stop of 4 pieces in 4th Embodiment. FIG. (A) is a figure showing the display mode of the retention symbol at the time of digestion of the number of reservations 3 pieces in the fourth embodiment, and (b) shows the display mode of the retention symbol per second number in the fourth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a figure showing the display mode of the reservation symbol at the time of holding 3 pieces of holding number in a 4th embodiment, and (b) is the display at the time of reservation number 2 digestion of a holding number in a 4th embodiment It is the figure which showed the aspect. It is a figure showing the display mode of the reservation design at the time of number 2 and 3 pieces of continuous holding prizes in a 4th embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the content of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the reservation reach lottery table of the pachinko machine in a 4th embodiment, and (b) shows typically the reach reserve symbol selection table of a pachinko machine in a 4th embodiment. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the pending | holding fluctuation display data selection table of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the timer interruption processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding display update process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the retention design display processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the holding | maintenance fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reach reserve display processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding 3 display process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding 2 display process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding 1 display process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding number display update process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 3 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flow chart which showed pending change pattern command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 4th embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed the time of the effective lines 1-3 in 5th Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the time of the effective lines 2-4 in 5th Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed the time of the effective lines 1-3 in 5th Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the time of the effective lines 2-4 in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed winning a prize command processing 2 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing pending display update processing 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding number display update process 3 performed by this. (A) is the figure which showed the time of the effective lines 1-3 in another example of 5th Embodiment, (b) shows the time of the effective lines 1-3 change in another example of 5th Embodiment. FIG. (A) is a figure showing the display mode of the reservation symbol at the time of four pieces of reservation number in a 6th embodiment, and (b) is the display of the reservation symbol at the time of three pieces of reservation number in a 6th embodiment It is the figure which showed the aspect. (A) is a figure which showed typically the content of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment, (b) is a figure which showed the loss retention symbol selection table 2 in 6th Embodiment. . It is the flowchart which showed the timer interruption processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control unit in 6th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 6 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flow chart which showed reservation symbol selection processing 2 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 6th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding display update process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display mode of the reservation design before normal reach establishment in a 7th embodiment, and (b) is a display when the selection information effect after normal reach establishment is performed in a 7th embodiment. It is the figure which illustrated the aspect. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display mode by which a reservation symbol is re-varied by the selection alerting effect in a 7th embodiment, and (b) is a hit display after re-variation by a selection alerting effect in a 7th embodiment. It is the figure which illustrated the displayed mode. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display mode after the holding symbol was re-varied by the selection notification production in 7th Embodiment, (b) is after re-variation by a selection notification production in 7th Embodiment. It is the figure which illustrated the display mode when one piece is digested. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 7 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding display update process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the re-variation process which is one process in the pending display update process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flow chart which showed reservation symbol selection processing 3 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding number display update process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 4 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 7th Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The player can change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or change the content of the effect of super reach, for example, by the player. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, 3 of “town stage,” “empty stage,” and “island stage”. There are two stages. Then, various effects such as fluctuation effects and reach effects that are performed along with entering the first ball entry port 64 described later (start winning) are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage It is done. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the variable effects are not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, "town stage" → "empty stage → → "island stage" → "in the city stage" → ... It changes repeatedly in the following order. Further, immediately after the power is turned on, a "town stage" is set as an initial stage.

  On the other hand, when the normal reach effect is started, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach during the normal reach when developing from the normal reach to the super reach. If the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2), and the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor 51a, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance (Not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is set to ON, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of operation, and the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes in accordance with the, and thereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "two-and-a-box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, a windmill and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a first The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a wood screw from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed when the ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (first) when the ball passes the second entrance 67. 2) The lottery will be held. In the drawing of the special symbol performed for entering the first ball entrance 64, the determination of whether or not it is a big hit of the special symbol is performed, and when it is determined that the big symbol is a special symbol, the big hit type The determination of is also made. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is closed until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses) or 10 balls are won ) The opening is repeated five times (five rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, and therefore, a large number of prize balls are paid out from the normal time. As a jackpot type of special symbol, two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided, and after the end of the special game state as a added value after the jackpot end, on the game according to these jackpot types The player's value (game value) is given to the player.

  In addition, when a special symbol (the first symbol) is drawn, variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) Is displayed, the special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of ball entry is held up to four times at maximum, and the number of holding balls is the first symbol display It is shown by the device 37 and also in the third symbol display device 81. When the variation display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the lottery of the next special symbol is performed, and the variation display according to the lottery Is started. The special winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, is provided immediately below the first ball entry port 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player strikes a ball in an attempt to win a special winning opening 65a, so many balls enter the first ball entrance 64 as well. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the second ball entrance 67, a pass / fail determination of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is performed. When the symbol is hit normally, the motorized accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It will be in the state. That is, when it comes to the hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, and as a result, the drawing of the special symbol becomes easy to be performed.

  In addition, when the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83 and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed in the second symbol display device 83, the number of times of passage is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is the first symbol display device 37 , And is also shown in the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variation display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of holding balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed, and the variation display according to the lottery Is started.

  As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, there are provided two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B".

  If it becomes "big hit A", "big hit B", it will become special game state (16 R big hit) of the round number 16 rounds, and if it is "big hit A" as an added value after the big hit after that, it will be the next big hit In the meantime, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state of special symbol (during a special symbol oddity). On the other hand, if it is "big hit B", it will be a time saving state of a normal symbol until the lottery is executed 100 times (until fluctuation of the special symbol is started) after the big hit is finished.

  Here, the "special symbol high probability state" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, a so-called probability state of the special symbol (during the special symbol oddity), in other words, the special gaming state (16R jackpot) It is the state of the game which is easy to shift to). On the other hand, when it is not "high probability state of special symbol" is called "low probability state of special symbol", it is a state where jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of special symbol, that is, jackpot probability of special symbol is normal Indicates the condition (normal condition of special symbol). In addition, "time symbol of the ordinary symbol" (during the short period of the ordinary symbol) means that the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol is increased, and the gaming state in which the ball is easy to enter the first ball entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not "normal symbol time reduction state" is called "ordinary symbol normal state", which indicates that the probability of hitting the symbol is normal, that is, the probability of hitting is lower than during time saving. .

  As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in this embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot, the number of rounds at the jackpot and the probability variation period of the special symbol are made common, depending on the type of the jackpot "time symbol The period of becoming a "state" is changing. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or only a part of the type of jackpot may be changed. Also, for example, instead of changing the period in which the "time symbol of the normal symbol" is changed according to the type of jackpot, the time for opening the motorized part (not shown) attached to the first ball entrance 64, or once The number of times of opening the motorized part may be changed in the hit of the normal symbol. Moreover, in this embodiment, after the big hit end, it becomes "high probability state of special symbol" and "time saving state of normal symbol", but after "high probability state of special symbol" is finished, "time symbol of normal symbol" "" May be configured.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power supply or the like, it is always set to the "special symbol low probability state". After that, when it becomes the jackpot of the special symbol, it shifts to "the high probability state of the special symbol", and shifts to "the time saving state of the normal symbol".

  A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, at the upper right side upper part (right upper part of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform fluctuation display by indicating whether or not the drawing of the special symbol performed in conjunction with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is being executed, or performing fluctuation display or fluctuation As a stop symbol after the end, the special symbol (the first symbol) according to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown in the lighted state or the variation of the ball entering the first entrance 64 has not been executed. The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display of the special symbol (the first symbol) is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of ball entry is held up to four times at maximum The holding ball number is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entry slot 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of times of suspension is not limited to four times, and is three times or less Alternatively, it may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in the jackpot and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the luminescent color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states (high probability state of special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 with few LED by the combination of the luminescent color Or, it can display the time of the normal pattern, etc.). In addition, LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a big hit according to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) The special symbol (the first symbol) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is disposed on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (start winning combination), the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed in the first symbol display device 37 using it as a trigger. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inches in size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right The columns are displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is used to display the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is performed according to the request. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten main symbols attached with the numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, and the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is The front of the wooden box is almost fully filled with large numbers. On the other hand, the main symbol with an even number (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached symbol imitating a character such as a furoshiki or helmet, which is almost full on the front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added are aligned. Moreover, if it is "big hit B", the variable display in which the main symbol to which "0,2,4,6,8" which is an even number is added aligns is performed. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically, and the upper 1/3 of the main display area Dm where the third symbol is variably displayed, the lower side 2/3 has become the sub display area Ds which displays the holding symbol which shows the number of holding balls.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed on the upper, middle, and lower three stages for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 at each game. Is displayed. A large hit moving image is displayed as a big hit if it is aligned with a combination of big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided vertically below the main display area Dm. Among these, the small areas Ds1 to Ds4 are areas for displaying the number of holding balls which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which the variation has not been executed among the balls entered at the first entrance 64.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. The main symbols of each third symbol are composed of symbol rows 1 to 9, and are scrolled in order from top to bottom.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to 4 times The reserved ball number is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small areas Ds1 to Ds4 of the sub display area Ds. The small areas Ds1 to Ds4 are each assigned a number indicating the number of holding balls, the small area Ds1 is “1” indicating the first holding order, and the small area Ds2 is the second holding order. In the small area Ds3 indicating "2" and "3" indicating the third of the holding order, and in the small area Ds4, "4" indicating the fourth of the holding order are displayed in the display area.

  In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entry slot 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of balls reserved is not limited to four times, and is three times The number of times may be set to five or more (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of the display of the number-of-hold ball number symbol in the sub-area Ds1, the number of number-of-hold balls is divided by a number into a part of the third symbol display device 81 or (For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol performed as the ball passes through the second ball entry port 67 is being executed by a lighting state, or As a stop symbol after the end of fluctuation, the normal symbol (the second symbol) according to the lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by the lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "o"), the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 operates for a predetermined time. It becomes a state (it is open | released), and as a result, it is comprised so that it may be in the state which a ball | bowl easily enters into the 1st ball entrance 64. FIG. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to four times, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and also displayed in the second symbol holding lamp 84 as well. Ru. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display device 37 And you may make it carry out using a part of 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. Similarly, lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Moreover, the passage of the ball in the second ball entrance 67 is not limited to four times the maximum number of holding balls, as in the first ball entrance 64, and is three times or less, or five times or more (For example, eight times) may be set. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 through which a ball can enter is disposed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A lottery of special symbols is made by the main control device 110, and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first ball entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls enter.

  Below the first ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65 is disposed, and at a substantially central portion thereof, a horizontally-long rectangular specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after the predetermined time (variation time) has passed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (a jackpot of 16 rounds) in which a large amount of prize balls are paid out from the normal time. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is lit in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning A game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times as a special gaming state is triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided. Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to an unshown ball discharge path through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 8) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 8), for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About display pattern of reserved symbol>
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5 (a), a reserved symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds as a display mode for informing the number of the reserved balls stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. As the type of the holding symbol, it is configured to indicate one holding by displaying the three holding symbols side by side. As a reserved symbol, a normal reserved symbol (refer to FIG. 5 (b)) showing a reserved symbol for notifying either the big hit A or the big hit B for advance notice (refer to FIG. 5 (b)) The figure (refer FIG.5 (d)) of the shellfish which is FIG.5 (c) and the sub-pattern is set, respectively. When the gaming ball enters the ball entry port 64 and the holding ball is generated while the third symbol is variably displayed in the main display area Dm, up to four balls are stored as the holding ball. Based on the establishment of the holding balls, three holding symbols are selected and displayed in the holding symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds4 corresponding to the number of holding balls.

  This reserved symbol is displayed, and when the same reserved symbol is aligned three on any of the valid lines H1 to H5, the player is informed that the result of determination of the success or failure of the third symbol being changed is a hit. In the present embodiment, although a hit is notified, the present invention is not limited to that, and may be configured to notify the type of reach, the type of a character to be displayed, the number of gaming balls that can be acquired in a big hit game, and the like.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it comprised so that one holding could be displayed combining three holding symbols, it may combine not only it but four holding symbols, but the number of holding symbols combined by lottery is It may be configured to be variable.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it was set as the structure which performs the effect which alert | reports the propriety determination result of the 3rd symbol by a reservation symbol, it does not restrict to it and notifies the display mode of the 3rd symbol displayed by the 3rd symbol in advance. It is good also as composition. Specifically, a symbol which is a reach display mode in the third symbol may be configured to be notified by displaying the corresponding reserved symbol in advance in the reach display mode.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 6-7, an example of the display mode of a holding symbol is demonstrated taking an actual number of holdings into an example. FIG. 6A is a diagram showing an example of the suspension display in the case where the number of suspension is one. As shown in FIG. 6A, when one gaming ball is won in the entrance 64 while the third symbol is fluctuating, three reserved symbols are displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds1. After that, when the game ball wins the entrance 64 further, it is informed that the number of holding balls is 2 as shown in FIG. 6 (b) by displaying the holding symbol in the holding symbol display area Ds2 .

  Next, when the gaming ball is further prized in the entrance 64, as shown in FIG. 6C, it is notified that the number of holding balls is 3 by holding symbols being displayed in the holding symbol display area Ds3. Be done. Furthermore, when the gaming ball is won in the entrance 64 and the number of holding balls is four, as shown in FIG. 7A, the symbol of the egg is displayed in the holding symbol display area Ds4.

  When the third symbol in motion is a hit, as shown in FIG. 7 (b), three shark symbols are aligned and displayed on the effective line H1, or as shown in FIG. 7 (c), the effective line H5 Three dolphin patterns are displayed on the screen. In addition, when displaying a hit, it is displayed by stopping and displaying the same symbol in any of the effective lines H1-H5 (refer FIG. 4 (a)).

  In addition, when the hit classification of the 3rd symbol in fluctuation is big hit A, a normal retention symbol or a special retention symbol is displayed. Also, when the special hold symbol is displayed, it is informed that the jackpot type of the third symbol is the jackpot A.

<Electric Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electric Configuration of Main Controller 110>
The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  In main controller 110, lottery of special symbols, lottery of ordinary symbols, setting of display in first symbol display device 37, setting of display in second symbol display device 83, and setting of display in third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. Used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to

  In order to select the jackpot type of the special symbol and the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the special symbol, in the drawing of the special symbol and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first contact type counter C2 used for the first, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the out of special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first contact random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 17), and some counters are updated periodically in the main processing (see FIG. 25). The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas is a first ball entrance The values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64, respectively. The RAM 203 is also provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas), and in each of these areas, a ball is on the left and right The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored according to the timing of passing through any one of the second ball entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 299) It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17) is executed, and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 25).

  The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the storage area 203a. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the special symbol big hit random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is special When it agrees with the value of the random number which becomes the jackpot set by the symbol jackpot random number table, it is determined that the special symbol is the jackpot. In addition, this special symbol big hit random number table is for high probability of special symbol (period during the low probability state of special symbol) and high probability of high probability of becoming special jackpot from the low probability (special symbol) And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot. The special symbol big hit random number table (not shown) for high probability of special symbol and the special symbol big hit random number table (not shown) for low probability of special symbol are in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110. Provided in

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) And return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol hold of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number to be a big hit of a special symbol, that is, if it is a random number to be a special symbol out of order, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is at the time of removal of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that will be the big win of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 The display mode is for the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first random number counter C1, at the low probability of the special symbol, there are three random number values that become the big wins of the special symbol, and the random number "7, 107, 282" is the special symbol for low probability It is stored in the jackpot random number table. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 300, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 3, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1/100".

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 30 random number values that become the jackpot of the special symbol, and the value is "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 "is a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability Is stored in As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 300, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 30, so the probability of being a big symbol of a special symbol is "1/10".

  In the present embodiment, the random number value for the big hit stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for the low probability time, and the random number value for the big hit stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for the high probability time In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers are set to be the respective jackpots. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 as a random number value that will be a jackpot, the random number value may be input from the outside, and it may be easy to illegally attract a jackpot. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state of special symbol or low probability state of special symbol), change the random number value to be a big hit Since it can be made difficult to predict the random number value which becomes the jackpot of a special symbol by this, suppression against fraud can be aimed at.

  Further, the value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 10A, the jackpot type when the random number value is “0 to 59” in the first hit type counter C2 is “jackpot A”. In addition, the jackpot type when the value is “60 to 99” is “jackpot B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. In addition, the random number value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the first type counter C2 is set by the special symbol jackpot type table (not shown), and this table is It is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reach is generated, the final stop design shifts by only one before and after the reach design. "Launch front and back out of reach" (for example, 98, 99) and "Leach other than front and back out of reach" (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop design stops at other than front and back Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected with "complete out" (e.g., a range of 0 to 89) in which a reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol holding ball storage of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the area 203a.

  In addition, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Moreover, in this embodiment, this table is divided into those for high probability of special symbol and low probability for special symbol, and the range of the random number value set for each stop type of out according to the table Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

  For example, in the high probability state, a table for high probability when the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is wide 0 to 89 so that reach effect is not selected more than necessary since jackpots are easily generated Is selected, and "complete removal" is likely to be selected. In this table, "longitudinal outreach" narrows to 98, 99 and "non back and forth out of reach" also narrows to 90 to 97, making "front and back out of reach" and "reach other than back and forth out of reach" difficult to select. In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79. Table is selected and it becomes difficult to select "completely out".

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than back and forth deviation” is wide as 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach display with a long rendering time, so it is possible to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 and the fluctuation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear outreach” is set to 98, 99.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). It is acquired at the timing when the game ball enters the first entrance 64 and is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110. A rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 Ru. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 25) to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table (not shown) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 There is.

  In the fluctuation pattern table 202b, for example, as a fluctuation pattern for detachment, "displacement (for a long time)," "displacement (for a short time)," "displacement normal reach" various, "disparate super reach" various, "disparate special “Leach” various types are defined, and “common normal reach” various types, “shared super reach type” various types, and “shared special reach type” various types are defined as the variation patterns of jackpot A and jackpot B sharing. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type).

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67 which is either left or right. It is acquired at the time of being stored, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the ordinary symbol per random symbol table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the ordinary symbol When it agrees with the value of the random number which is set by the per random number table, it is determined that the symbol is normal. In addition, this normal symbol per random number table is for low probability of normal symbol (during normal condition of normal symbol) and high probability of high probability of being hit of normal symbol from the low probability (of normal symbol) It is divided into two types, one for the time-saving state), and the number of random numbers for making a big hit included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be hit.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (b), at the time of low probability of the normal symbol, there are 24 random values that hit the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in the random number per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

  If the ball passes through the second entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 obtains a normal symbol. Is displayed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as), and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "0.5 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, there are 200 random number values that become the jackpot of the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the random number per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 200, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1 / 1.2."

  If the ball passes through the second entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 selects the normal symbol. Is displayed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as), and the first entrance 64 is opened “one second × twice”. Thus, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds" as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and furthermore, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first ball entry port 64. In addition, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit or not from the value (random number value) of the second random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for “one second × 2 times” when the normal symbol comes into contact, but it is opened. The time and the number may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17). And is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 25).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to various counters shown in FIG. 9, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 25), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 23) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 23) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 has a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a middle time It has a counter 203 e and other memory areas 203 z.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas is a first random number counter C1. The respective values of the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired at the timing when the ball reaches the first entry slot 64 (start winning), and the acquired data includes four reserve areas ( Among the vacant areas of the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of a special symbol is performed, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is an execution area Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area, determination such as drawing of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the ball wins to the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), and as soon as each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is obtained according to the starting winning, the original special symbol Aside from the jackpot lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the values of the acquired counters C1 to C3. As described above, before the drawing of the original special symbol is performed, various kinds of information obtained when the original drawing is performed based on the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to the starting winning combination. The prediction of the information will be described later, when the lottery result of the special symbol is read ahead. In addition, a pass / fail, stop classification, a fluctuation pattern etc. correspond as various information.

  Then, when the pre-reading is finished, a winning information command including various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the pass / fail, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information to save the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. Store in 223a.

  In the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the result of judgment of success / failure (pre-reading judgment) determined in S407 of the start winning process (S106 in FIG. 19) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 described later is also held. It is respectively stored in the first to fourth areas.

  The regular symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes either the left or right second entrance port 67, and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  It should be noted that when data is shifted from the first holding area to the execution area, the first holding area becomes empty, so similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the winning combinations stored in the other holding areas A shift process is performed to pack data into a reserve area with a small area number. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination) It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and the ball enters the first entrance 64 and 1 to the maximum value 4 each time the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. Are added (see S404 in FIG. 16). On the other hand, the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 18).

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 18 and S405 in FIG. 19). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the holding ball of the variation display held on the main control device 110 by the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203 c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. Thereby, the number of holding balls of the variable display managed by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 is the number of holding balls of the actual variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from that, it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the number of balls command received next.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send the ball number command and the display symbol command for display. The display control device 114 holds the holding symbols in the holding symbol display area Ds1 to Ds4 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the holding ball number command for display, the number of holding balls notified by the holding symbol command for display, and the holding symbol. Display

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is the number of holding balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entry hole 67 It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 each time the ball passes through the second entry port 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 22). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 20).

  When the ball passes either the left or right second entrance 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number per hit The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 22). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes either the left or right second entrance 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Not (S703 in FIG. 22: No).

  The time saving counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol Indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol if the value of the time counter 203 e is zero. At this time, the initial value of the counter 203e is set to zero, and a lottery for a special symbol is performed in the main control unit 110, and a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set every time it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot Be done. That is, when it becomes the big hit of the special symbol, the value according to the big hit type is newly set regardless of how many the value of the time-and-time counter 203 e is.

  Specifically, it is set to 100 when it is determined that the "big hit B" (see S214 in FIG. 18). Thereafter, 1 is subtracted each time the variation effect of the special symbol is finished, until the value of the hour / minute counter 203 e becomes 0 (S 217 in FIG. 18).

  When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time-sinking counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, a lottery for a normal symbol based on a random symbol table for high probability time. On the other hand, if the value of the time-span-middle counter 203e is 0, the lottery for the regular symbol is conducted based on the random symbol per symbol table for low probability (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 21).

  The other memory area 203z is an area in which various other flags, data, etc. required for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to control the pachinko machine 10 are stored.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208 Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 23) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

<Electric Configuration of Audio Lamp Controller 113>
The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) Control of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, or at the time of super reach The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores control programs necessary for various controls, various data, and the like. As part of that, as shown in FIG. 10 (d), the temporary holding symbol selection table 222a, the holding symbol lottery table 222b, the holding symbol selection table 222c, the effect content command selection table 222d, the out-of-hold holding symbol selection table 222e Each is set.

  The temporary holding symbol selection table 222a is a data table showing temporary holding symbols to be displayed in the holding symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds4 in the initial state when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. Since the voice lamp control device 113 has a configuration in which data is not backed up when the power is shut off, the data is initialized. Therefore, it can not be determined what holding symbol is displayed before the power is turned off. In such a case, it is possible to notify the player that a temporary holding symbol is displayed by displaying a temporary holding symbol corresponding to each holding number as shown in FIG. 11A. The hold 4 indicates that a star-shaped symbol is displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds 4 instead of the symbol of the egg. In addition, since the command which shows the number of holding balls is output about the number of holdings in the process of S911 of a starting process (refer FIG. 24), it becomes a structure which can be discriminate | determined at the time of power activation.

  The held symbol lottery table 222b is a lottery table for drawing whether or not to display a held symbol with a held symbol, as shown in FIG. 11 (b). If the value of the effect counter 223 f is any one of “0 to 100”, it is determined that the hit display for displaying the held symbol in the held symbol lottery is executed. On the other hand, when the effect counter 223f is any one of "101 to 199", it is determined in the holding symbol lottery that the off indication displaying the deviation holding symbol is executed.

  As a result, even when the third symbol being changed is a hit, the hit symbol is not always displayed, and the third symbol is a big hit even though the off hold symbol is displayed. Can give the player unexpectedness. Therefore, even when the out-of-hold holding symbol is displayed, the player can continue to play the game with the expectation of the jackpot.

  The holding symbol selection table 222c is a lottery table for determining the type of the holding symbol to be displayed when it is determined in the holding symbol lottery to display the hit holding symbol as shown in FIG. 12A. . In the reserved symbol selection table 222d, the symbols to be displayed are respectively allocated by the effect counter 223f depending on whether the jackpot type (symbol type) of the third symbol in fluctuation is jackpot A (positive variation) or jackpot B (normal) It is done. In the case of a definite variation, all the holding symbols (except shell patterns) are set to be selected, and in the normal case, the normal holding symbol is set to be selected.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (b), the off-hold reserved symbol selection table 222e is a selection table for selecting the off-hold pending symbol (three on-hold symbols corresponding to the number of pending balls reporting off). A combination of symbols to be displayed on the display positions X1 to X3 of the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds4 is set, and the effect counter 223f is allocated to each combination. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to easily select a combination of reserved symbols to be displayed in the notification mode of the outing.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the combination was set beforehand, you may comprise it so that it may select not only that but each symbol by lottery. In this case, a dedicated non-synchronous selection counter may be set and selected for each symbol.

  In the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223a, a change start flag 223b, a stop type selection flag 223c, a big hit determination flag 223d, a holding symbol storage area 223e, and a presentation counter 223f At least the SW valid time counter 223g and the other memory area 223z are provided.

  Similar to the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control unit 110, the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter which counts and holds the number of balls (waiting number) of the holding of the fluctuation effect held in the main control unit 110 up to four times.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of holding balls with the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variation display is added by entering the ball into first entrance 64, or the variation display in the special symbol is executed in main controller 110. When the number of holding balls is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the holding ball number command. The symbol holding ball number counter 223a is stored (see S1409 and S1412 in FIG. 28). Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a is used for displaying the number-of-holding-balls symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of {circle over (1)}, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball number for the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled to display the symbols in the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds4 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a is changed while being synchronized with the special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the holding symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds4 of the third symbol display device 81 is also changed while being synchronized with the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 Can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The fluctuation start flag 223b is set to ON when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1402 in FIG. 28), and the fluctuation display setting in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. It is set to off (see S1702 in FIG. 33). When the fluctuation start flag 223b is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223c is set to ON when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1405 in FIG. 28), and the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1706 in FIG. 33).

  The jackpot determination flag 223 d is a flag indicating that a jackpot winning command in which the success or failure determination result is a jackpot is received from the main control device 110. The jackpot determination flag 223d is set to on in the process of S1411 of the command determination process (S1312 in FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and is set to off in the process of S1413. The jackpot determination flag 223d is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial setting when the power is turned on.

  The reserved symbol storage area 223e is a storage area in which data of the reserved symbols of the respective reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds4 selected is stored. In the reserved symbol storage area 223e, each symbol corresponding to the display positions X1 to X3 of the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds4 is stored for each suspension. In addition, when the reserved symbol data is newly stored or the data in the reserved symbol storage area 223e is shifted by the termination of the suspension, the change flag is set to ON. In addition, the change flag is set to off when the display symbol of the holding symbol is updated.

  The effect counter 223 f is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 199. The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selection of a hold symbol, hold symbol lottery, and the like. The effect counter 223 f is repeatedly updated in the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The SW effective time counter 223 g is a counter for measuring the time for which the operation of the frame button 22 is set to be effective. In addition, when a fluctuation pattern command is received from main controller 110, SW fluctuation time counter 223g has its fluctuation time set (executed in the process of S1403 in FIG. 28).

  The RAM 223 further includes another storage area 223z for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 30) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation display (variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81) Control). The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 23) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

<Electric Configuration of Display Control Device 114>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, described later, in the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237 Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. The second program storage area 234a1 for storing and the character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, each holding symbol shown in FIG. 5 (b) to (d) And at least the stored symbol selection table 234a3.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234 a or the like. Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is used as one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234 d, the ROM controller 234 b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234 c from the NOR ROM 234 d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 36) executed after the boot process by the boot program (see S1801 in FIG. 32) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is performed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 13) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 38B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on time variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power on, and the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect when it is done.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 36).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at the time of the power on, and the main image at the time of the power on (in this embodiment, The third symbol display device 81 displays characters (power-on characters).

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power on. On the display screen, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" in the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "X" in the same position as the "○" symbol, fluctuation period The display is repeated alternately. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. The result is judged, and in the case of "big hit of special symbol", the "○" image is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the change production, and in the case of "out of special symbol", the "×" image is after the stop of the change production Display for a fixed period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the power change image area when the power is turned on. The power-on-time change image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on time change image resident on 235b, and the “o” and “x” images are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately it can.

  Returning to FIG. 13, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) having the numerals "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, reside. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64, although the fluctuation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, the fluctuation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unintended condition.

  In the third symbol area 235d, characters such as a main symbol with a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a symbol with a rear symbol, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out image data previously resident. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message pictorial area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the graphic area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is determined in advance.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, variation effects, round effects A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. When the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B If it is either, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally displayed stopped. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  The ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special game state, and informs the player of the game value (short period of time of the normal symbol) to be given to the player after the end of the jackpot, or the special symbol being held. It is an effect for informing the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the lottery.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next change effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one change effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. Note that if the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type indicates which of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage") is displayed, or the back surface A to C Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. Moreover, when specifying to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. Also, the range of the rear view image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear surface image different from the rear surface A to C, the rear surface image to be displayed is specified from the rear surface type.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 14). "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 16) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

<Pending display data table>
The hold display data table will be described with reference to FIG. As in the configuration of the display data table, the reservation display data table is data in which data necessary for display of the holding symbol is set in time series. As shown in FIG. 15 (b), the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds4 are set for the reserved symbols displayed on the display positions X1 to X4. Like the display data table, the hold display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233 d so that the drawing list is generated from the transfer data table. In addition, until a new pending display data table is set, the same pending display data table is repeatedly set in the drawing list so that the display pattern of the pending symbol is maintained.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15A is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of sprites used in effects specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Are described (addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 15A correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined to mean (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 12).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (FIG. In the example, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 16) described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 15A, when the pointer 233 f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 determines transfer data information defined in the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It adds to the created drawing list, and sends the drawing list after the addition to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display on the third symbol display device 81 the character of "initial setting" which is the image at power on (main image at power on and fluctuation image at power on). It is a flag. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main processing (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 231 (see S1805 in FIG. 36). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 44 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 38B). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 38B) and the simplified display setting process (figure in FIG. 38B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 38 (see S2109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 39 to 41) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 42 to 43) are performed.

  Also, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 of FIG. 44A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Since resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 44B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 45) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 16) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction for the image is described is generated. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 16) describing the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 16) described later (see FIG. 16) describing the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process for one frame (FIG. 42)), pointer update processing (see S3005 in FIG. 42) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. The transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer is to be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while creating (see FIG. 16), and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 16, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite, such as a design. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern) Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) , Character (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number symbol 1 (holding symbol 1), holding ball number symbol 2 (holding symbol 2), ..., error symbol (not shown), pre-reading effect Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of the notices 1 to 3).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process (FIG. Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3008 in FIG. 38). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" which indicates that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The update of the stored image data determination flag 233i is performed when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3517 in FIG. 45). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 45). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is zero, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is one. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 46).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 38B) is performed (see S3602 of FIG. 46).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

<Control Process Executed by MPU 201 of Main Control Device 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment) There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When 299, 99, 99, 239) are reached, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 while executing processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104), and thereafter, The start winning process associated with the winning on the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for performing display in the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106), and the through gate passes along with the passage of the ball at the second entrance port 67 A process is performed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 20 and 22. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device It is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81, and the like.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (S201). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: Yes), this processing ends.

  If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation A holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c from the holding ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223 .

  After setting the holding ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If has not passed (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol variation start process is executed, a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, according to the value of the first random number counter C1 it is determined whether or not the big win of the special symbol, and in the case of the big win of the special symbol, according to the value of the first type counter C2 Whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B occurs, the red LED is turned on. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variable display under execution in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether it is a jackpot of a special symbol (S211). If the lottery result this time is a big hit of the special symbol (S211: Yes), of the two types of big hit of the special symbol (big hit A, big hit B), it determines what the big hit type is (S212), big hit type If is the jackpot A, the setting regarding the jackpot A is executed (S213). In the setting relating to the jackpot A, the number of jackpot rounds (16 rounds in the present embodiment) and the probability variation jackpot are set (S213). In the case of the jackpot B, the setting of the jackpot round number (16 rounds in the present embodiment) and the number of time reductions (100 times in the present embodiment) are set (S214). Then, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S215), and the present process is ended.

  In the process of S211, if the current lottery result is the deviation of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S216). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203e is 1 or more (S216: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S217), and the process is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 (S216: No), the process of S221 is skipped and this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). The special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 18) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17), and the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. On the basis of the values of the various counters stored in the table, a lottery of “big hit of special symbol” or “out of special symbol” is made (decision determination), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 It is a process for determining the production pattern (the fluctuation production pattern) of the fluctuation production to be done.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired To do (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a high probability state (during a definite change) (S302). When in the high probability gaming state (S302: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability (S304).

  In the process of S304, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired. Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random value of 30 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability. As mentioned above, as a random value which becomes the big hit of the special symbol, “4, 11, 28, 38, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168 , 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 "are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the number of these rounds Is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol when the random numbers match. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S306.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) in the process of S302 (S302: No), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and for low probability Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol jackpot is acquired (S305). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random value of 3 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability. Three random numbers, "7, 107, 282", are set as the jackpot of the special symbol, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number of those hits. , Determined to be a jackpot of special symbols. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S306.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S304 or S305 is the jackpot of the special symbol (S306), and it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is (S306: Yes), The display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) (S307). Further, in order to cause the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S308). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S308, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, check the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the fluctuation pattern table (not shown), design fluctuation such as normal reach or super reach Determine the variation pattern (variation time). The relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is previously defined by this fluctuation pattern table.

  For example, as the fluctuation patterns for outliers, various types of “outside”, “normal reach out”, “super reach out”, and “special reach out” are defined. As the fluctuation pattern for jackpot A, various “permanent jackpot normal reach” various, “permanent jackpot super reach” various, “various jackpot special reach” various types are defined, as the fluctuation pattern for jackpot B “various normal jackpot normal reach” various , "Normal jackpot super reach" various, "normal jackpot special reach" various are defined.

  In the process of S306, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S306: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S309). In the process of S309, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and the display mode corresponding to the symbol is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of out of step is determined from the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (S310). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation pattern of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach or super reach based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determine the (variation time).

  When the process of S308 or S310 ends, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S308 or S310 is set (S311). A stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type (the stop type at the time of the big hit) is set (S312). The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 25). Ru. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S312 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) to determine whether or not the first ball entrance 64 has a winning (start winning), and there is a start winning. These are processes for executing hold processing of values indicated by various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding times N of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S402) . Then, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  And if there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: No) or if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). And the ball holding number command which shows the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c changed by calculation is set (S405).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 25) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c from the holding ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223 .

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S405, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first of the vacant holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entrance 64. It is a process for controlling the open time of the motorized part and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is in the middle of a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made in the second symbol display device 83. Included. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number M of holding the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, a process of shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b in order toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the time-span-middle counter 203 e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S 608). The hour-time counter 203e is a counter indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the time-shortening counter 203e is 1 or more, the time-saving state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal symbol If the value of the time counter 203 e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  If the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be less likely to hit. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (ie, in the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so the motorized prize associated with the first entrance 64 is opened. This is for the purpose of suppressing the entry of the ball intended to be won by the special winning opening 65a into the first ball entry port 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first ball entrance 64, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the first ball entrance 64 in the big hit of the special symbol, the first Many balls enter the ball entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of holding balls for the first ball inlet 64 is maximum (four times).

  In the process of S609, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number per symbol table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 7 (b)).

  In the process of S608, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607, Based on the symbol random number table for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the symbol is hit normally is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 7 (b)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is the hit of the normal symbol (S612), and if it is determined that the symbol is the normal symbol (S612: Yes) The display mode of the hit time is set (S613). In the process of S 613, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “o” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour and hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S614), and if the value of the hour and hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the current is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this embodiment, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible during the jackpot of the special symbol, even when the normal symbol is hit, it is the same as when the normal symbol is detached. The number of times of opening of the motorized part and the opening time thereof are set.

  In the process of S615, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, the first entry ball opening The opening period of the motorized accessory attached to 64 is set to one second, and the number of times of opening is set to two (S616), and the process proceeds to the processing of S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the motorized accessory accompanying the first ball inlet 64 is 0 The setting is made for 2 seconds, and the number of times of release is set to 1 (S617), and the processing shifts to the processing of S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is normally out (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour and hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the hour and hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S619: Yes), fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 The variation time of the display is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is ended. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short with "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and further Since the release period of the first ball entrance 64 becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first ball entrance 64.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). In addition, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621.

  In the process of S 622, when the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S 622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "o" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit It is set to be displayed. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out and the display mode is set by the processing of S 618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (displayed) in the second symbol display device 83 Are set to When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the second symbol display updating process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 25) is executed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is changed. The process is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

  Then, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing is a hit of the ordinary symbol Is determined (S624). If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol hit (S 624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electrically driven combination attached to the first ball entrance 64 is set (S 625), and this processing is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the motorized part is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the motorized part is performed when the motorized part opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 25) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the motorized part is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or S617 end. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S624 that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). The through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, and if the ball has passed, This is processing for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second ball entrance 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entry hole 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number M of holdings of variable display in the normal symbol) is obtained (S702) . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed the second entrance ball opening 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed the second entrance ball opening 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S703: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67 (S701: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is the first of the vacant hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 This process is ended by storing in the area of (S705). In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 24, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is set to ON (S904). If it is set to ON (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. Transition to On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not set to ON (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not generation information of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No), since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the processing shifts to S912 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S912. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the process of S1014 of FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S913, S914), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not set to ON (S904: No), occurrence information of the power-off is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal. For example (S907: Yes), while holding the backed up data in the RAM 203, the power-off occurrence information is cleared (S908). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery is transmitted to restore the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of the drive power supply cutoff (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S910, the rendering permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Then, the interruption is permitted (S911), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic processing of 4 m second cycle, and the counter updating processing of S1010 and S1011 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 17) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the acquired ball number. Send an award ball command. Further, the ball number command for holding balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 18) and the start winning process (see FIG. 20) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, if the special symbol is in the jackpot state, execution of the jackpot effect or variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified winning opening 65a has a specified number of balls. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, a motorized product opening and closing process is performed to control the opening and closing of the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 (S1005). In the electric part opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric part is set by the process of S625 in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 21), the opening / closing control of the electric part is started. In addition, the opening / closing control of the motorized prize is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 in the normal symbol variation process end.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19), the first symbol display is a variation display according to the variation pattern Start at device 37. In this embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from when the fluctuation is started. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Also, in the first symbol display update process, the first symbol display device when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19) ends. The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (the first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19). The stop display (lighting display) is performed on the device 37.

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update processing, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 21), the variation display is performed in the second symbol display device 83 Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Also, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set in the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20), the second symbol display device 83 is executed Ends the fluctuation display, and stops the stop symbol (the second symbol) in the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S613 or the processing of S618 of the normal symbol fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 20) Display (light on).

  After that, it is judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described S1001 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing of this time (S1009: No), the first main processing is performed until it reaches the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing (1) Update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1010, S1011).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 23 has been executed, so that the process at the time of the power-off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1001. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can start from the process of S1001. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

<Control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113>
Next, each control process performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 26, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1318 (see FIG. 27) is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called "temporary power failure"). It is determined whether or not it has been started during the execution of step S1202). As described later with reference to FIG. 27, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 27), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off processing of S1318. Before the power-off process is performed, the power-off process flag is set to on, and after the power-off process is completed, the power-off process flag is set to off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1318 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1202: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1318 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. From the above, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1318 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When it is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1202: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after the instantaneous power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1318, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1206). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1208, it is determined whether the power-off flag is set to ON (S1208). The power-off flag is set to ON when the power-off process of S1318 is performed (see S1317 in FIG. 27). That is, since the power-off flag is set to ON before the power-off processing of S1318 is performed, the process of S1208 is performed in the state where the power-off flag is set to ON is the current start-up process. This is a case where the power failure process of S1318 is started after completion of the power failure process after the occurrence of a momentary power failure. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1209), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210). The permission is set (S1211), and the processing shifts to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1208 in the state where the power-off flag is set to off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, via the processing of S1204 to S1206. This is the case when the processing of S1208 is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209 which is a clear process of the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, and an initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and interrupt permission is set. Then (S1211), the process proceeds to the main processing.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1209 is that when the process of S1208 is reached via the processes of S1204 to S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1204. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current processing of S1301 has been executed (S1301), and 1 ms or more has elapsed If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the process of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, the process of determining whether or not 1 ms has elapsed is mainly a process relating to display (effect) in S1302 to S1310, and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms) This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1312, the command determination process of S1311, and the process of updating the counter values of S1313 and S1314 in a short cycle. Since the process of S1311 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent reception omission of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1311 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1311 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1302) ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to become the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1304). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1305 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1306). About the detail of this pending | holding number display update process (S1306), a detail is demonstrated with reference to FIG.

  In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to the device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of lighting a hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223a.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S1307), the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set so as to perform an effect corresponding to. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set. The frame button input monitoring and rendering process (S1307) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the variable effect is not executed or during a high speed change period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and a rear surface image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during reach production produces a sense of expectation for the jackpot. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be set as a decision button for selecting one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects. When the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1307 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process shifts to the process of S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1311, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 (S1311). The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In this variation display setting process (S1312), in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute variation presentation, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 . As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1312 is finished, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1313). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1315 (S1313: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1315), and the power-off process is executed (S1316). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1317), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1313: No), it is judged based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1314) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1314: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1314: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the command determination processing (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S1311), first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern is detected from the main control apparatus 110. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1401). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1402). Next, a variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1403). Thereafter, the pending display update process is executed (S1404). After that, it returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 33) described later is executed. And it is used in order to set the fluctuation pattern command for indication which notifies the start of fluctuation production and the fluctuation pattern classification to display control 114.

  Further, with regard to the on-hold display update process (S1404), the details will be described with reference to FIG. 29, but as the new lottery game is started to change, a process associated with the transition of each on-hold data is executed.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is next determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1405). When the stop type command is received (S1405: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223c of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1406), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1407). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 33) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, when the stop type command has not been received (S1405: No), it is next determined whether the number-of-holding balls backup command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1408). And when the holding ball number backup command is received (S1408: Yes), the value contained in the received holding ball number backup command, that is, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 ( The number N of holdings of the variable display in the special symbol is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1409). Further, in the process of S1409, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223a is set. Thereafter, temporary storage symbol selection processing is executed (S1410). The temporary holding symbol selection process (S1410) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 31. However, when the number of holding balls is backed up at the time of power on, the temporary holding symbol is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. Execute processing to display on. After the process of S1410 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1408, when the holding ball number backup command is not received (S1408: No), next, it is determined whether the holding ball number command is received from the main control device 110 (S1411). And when the holding ball number command is received (S1411: Yes), the value included in the received holding ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol The number of holdings N) of the variable display in is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1412). Thereafter, a reserved symbol selection process is executed (S1413). The holding symbol selection process (S1413) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 32, but executes processing for determining a holding symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, since the number of holding balls command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball wins at the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) or when the drawing of the special symbol is performed, the starting winning combination is performed. Every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 by the process of S1409 is taken as the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc. At the time of lottery of symbols, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1409 is executed, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223a is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1411, when the holding ball number command is not received (S1411: No), it is determined whether or not other commands are received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S1419) ), Return to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed control The command is set to be sent to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the pending display update process (S1404) which is one process of the command determination process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this pending display update process (S1404).

  In the pending display update process (FIG. 29, S1404), first, a process of shifting (moving) the data of each pending symbol stored in the pending symbol storage area 223e to the previous area one by one is executed (S1421) . After that, it is determined whether data has been transferred from the storage area (pending 4) of the pending symbol storage area 223e corresponding to the pending quantity "4" to the storage area (pending 3) corresponding to the pending quantity "3" ( S1422).

  If it is determined that the data has been transferred from the hold 4 to the hold 3 (S1422: Yes), the hold transfer process is executed (S1423). The pending transfer process (S1423) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no transition from the hold 4 to the hold 3 (S1422: No), this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the suspension shift processing (S1423) which is one of the suspension display update processing (S1404 in FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 231 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this suspension transfer process (S1423).

  In the on-hold transfer process (FIG. 30, S1423), first, the value of the effect counter 223f is obtained (S1431). Currently, a display mode for notifying a hit with a reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (in the present embodiment, a display mode in which the same reserved symbol is displayed on the effective lines H1 to H5) It is determined whether or not there is (S1423). In the processing of S1423, if it is determined that the hit is unreported in the reserved symbol (S1432: No), whether the success or failure determination result of the lottery game currently displayed by fluctuation in the third symbol display device 81 is a hit It discriminates (S1433).

  If it is determined in the process of S1433 that the change determination result during the change is a win (S1433: Yes), the process of S1434 is executed. In the process of S1434, based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired, the display lottery (hold symbol lottery) of the hold symbol is executed from the hold symbol lottery table 222b (S1434). This reserved symbol lottery is a lottery process for determining whether or not to notify the player that the success or failure determination result of the third symbol being changed is to be a hit by the reserved symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81. is there. Here, if the value of the effect counter 223f acquired in the process of S1431 is any of "0 to 100", it is determined to report a hit, and if any of "101 to 199", it is determined to report a release. judge.

  It is determined whether or not it is determined that the lottery result in S1434 is displayed to notify a hit (S1435). When it is determined to notify the hit (S1435: Yes), the third symbol display device 81 in any of the effective symbol lines H4 and H5 of the reserved symbol displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. It is determined whether notification can be made with notification content corresponding to the symbol of the result of the determination of the third symbol during variation display (S1436).

  Here, when the notification content corresponding to the symbol of the result of the determination of the third symbol during the variation display is a definite variation when the result of the determination of the third symbol during the variation display is the big hit A, the reserved symbol Shows that one of the reserved symbols is displayed side by side in the effective line. On the other hand, when the success or failure judgment result of the third symbol in the variable display is the big hit B which is the big hit B, among the holding symbols, to display any of the holding symbols of the normal holding symbols aligned in the effective line It shows.

  When three same symbols are displayed among the special holding symbols on the activated line, the player is stopped and displayed that the lottery result of the third symbol in fluctuation is a probability change big hit (big hit A). Can be determined before the In addition, when the same normal holding symbol is displayed three times on the activated line, the player can determine that at least the result of the success or failure judgment is the normal jackpot (jackpot B). It should be noted that even if three normal holding symbols are displayed on the effective line, the result may be a probability change jackpot, so the player expects the stop of the third symbol in expectation of becoming a probability change jackpot. can do. As a result, even with the holding symbol, it is possible to identify the success or failure judgment result, and to enjoy the game more.

  In the process of S1436, when it is determined that the hit with hold symbol corresponding to the symbol of the judgment of acceptability can be displayed on the valid line H4 or H5 (S1436: Yes), the valid line capable of displaying the hit hold symbol. A holding transition symbol including a symbol corresponding to H4 or H5 is selected, and is set in the holding symbol storage area 223e (S1437). Here, when two same reserved symbols corresponding to the result of the pass / fail determination are displayed on the activated line H4 or H5 of the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 and Ds2, the process of S1437 is executed. Therefore, by displaying the same symbol as the holding symbol on which the same holding symbol is displayed, on the effective line H4 or H3 of the holding symbol display area Ds3, three identical holding symbols are displayed on the effective line H4 or H5. Be done. For other symbols displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds3, based on the value of the effect counter 223f selected in S1431, the display position corresponding to any of the outlier reserved symbol selection table 222e (any two of X1 to X3) The symbol of is selected.

  In addition, although the explanation was omitted here, if a symbol other than the hit holding symbol displayed in the holding symbol display area Ds 3 is selected, is it not notified of a hit by an effective line other than the winning effective line? If it is a win, it is replaced so that it becomes a different pattern from the win. Here, the symbols to be selected preferentially are determined in advance by setting the priority order, and replacement of the symbols is executed in the priority order.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1436, when it is determined that it is impossible to form the effective line of the hit retention symbol corresponding to the symbol of the hit / fail determination (S1436: No), the result of the hit / fail determination result and the effect counter 223f Based on the hold symbol selection table 222d, the hit hold symbol to be displayed on the valid line H3 is selected and set in the corresponding hold symbol storage area 223e (S1438). Here, three reserved symbols selected from the reserved symbol selection table 222d are displayed in the effective line H3 in the reserved symbol display area Ds3.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1432 that the hit symbol has been notified by the holding symbol (S1432), if it is determined in the process of S1433 that the success or failure determination result of the third symbol during variation is out (S1433: No In the process of S1435, when it is determined that the lottery result executed in the process of S1434 has been drawn out as a display (S1435: No), the process of S1439 is executed.

  In the processing of S1439, based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired in the processing of S1431, the holding symbols to be displayed at each display position of the holding symbol display area Ds3 are selected from the out-of-hold holding symbol selection table 222e, respectively, It is set to 223e (S1439). It is determined whether or not there is an effective line (hit line) to be a hit holding symbol in the hit line H4 or H5 according to the hold symbol set (S1440). If it is determined that there is a hit line (S1440: Yes), the hold symbol displayed in the hold symbol display area Ds3 corresponding to the hit line is changed to a hold symbol to be removed and set in the hold symbol storage area 223e (S1441). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no hit line (S1440: No), this process ends.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, the holding symbol for notifying the player of the fourth holding is that a symbol imitating a fish egg is displayed in the holding symbol display area Ds4. Therefore, the player can not determine whether the third symbol in the process of change is acceptable or not from the held fourth symbol. However, when the reserve is digested and the new third symbol fluctuation starts, the reserve symbol displayed in the reserve symbol display area Ds3 is triggered by the shift of the fourth reserve to the third reserve. It is selected based on the determination result of the 3rd design during change.

  Therefore, when four reservations are stored, the notification notification mode based on the determination result of the third symbol is displayed by the holding symbol at the same timing as the change start timing of the third symbol. Therefore, the player can know the information related to the result of the pass / fail judgment of the third symbol before the change time elapses at the start of the change. As a result, the player can have an interest in the game not only at the time of the stop of the change of the third symbol but also at the start of the change, and can enjoy the game more. Further, in this embodiment, even if the success or failure judgment result of the third symbol is a hit, it is not displayed in the hit holding symbol unless it is won in the lottery whether to display with a hit holding symbol, so in the hit holding symbol Even if not displayed, the player can play the game with the expectation of winning.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the temporary holding symbol selection process (S1410) which is one process in the command determination process (S1311 in FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the temporary storage symbol selection process (S1410).

  In the temporary storage symbol selection process (FIG. 31, S1410), first, it is determined whether the value of the special storage ball number counter 223a is a value larger than 0 (that is, the storage ball is stored) (S1501). If it is determined that the special holding ball number counter 223a is a value larger than 0 (S1501: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a is set to the variable [H] (S1502). A reserved symbol corresponding to the value of the variable [H] is selected from the temporary symbol selection table 222a (S1503). The value obtained by computing the variable [H] -1 is set as the value of the variable [H] (S1504). Next, it is determined whether the value of the variable [H] is a value larger than 0 (S1505). If the value is larger than 0 (S1505: Yes), the process returns to S1503 to select a temporary holding symbol. The process is repeated until it is determined in the process of S1505 that the value of the variable [H] is 0, and then this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1501 that the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a is 0 (S1501: No), this process is ended.

  Thus, when power is turned on, a temporary holding symbol is displayed until a command indicating the holding symbol is output from the main control device 110. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11 (a), by displaying a holding symbol different from the normal time in the holding symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds4, the temporary holding symbol is displayed on the player. It is configured to notify. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a temporary state at the time of power activation, and it is possible to prevent the player from having anxiety in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a reserved symbol selection process (S1413) which is one process in the command determination process (S1311 in FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the reserved symbol selection process (S1413).

  In the reserved symbol selection process (FIG. 32, S1413), first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1601). Whether the result of the determination of the third symbol during the variation by the third symbol display device 81 is a hit or not is determined (S1602). If it is determined that the success or failure determination result during the change is a hit (S1602: Yes), based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired in the process of S1601, the holding symbol lottery table 222b (see FIG. 11 (b)) The holding symbol lottery is executed (S1603). It is determined whether the lottery result of S1603 is a hit (S1604).

  In the process of S1604, when it is determined that the lottery result of S1603 is a hit (S1604: Yes), the effective line H4 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the third symbol being changed by the third symbol display device 81. Alternatively, it is determined whether the hit retention symbol of H5 can be displayed (whether the hit line can be formed) (S1605).

  In the process of S1605, when it is determined that it is not possible to form a hit line (S1605: No), a line is displayed (displayed on any of effective lines H1 to H3) corresponding to the symbol of the judgment of acceptance or not A symbol is selected from the held symbol selection table 222d based on the value of the effect counter 223f, and set in the corresponding held symbol storage area 223e. In this reserved symbol storage area 223e, it is stored in an area corresponding to the number of reserved gaming balls that have entered this time.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1605, when it is determined that the hit line can be formed (S1605: Yes), the same symbol as the held symbol displayed on the effective line H4 or H5 which can display the hit reserved symbol Is selected and displayed on the effective line H4 or H5 displayed by the reserved symbol display area Ds3. Based on the value of the effect counter 223f, a symbol other than the symbol to be a hit symbol set in the symbol symbol display area Ds3 is selected from the outright symbol symbol selection table 222e (see FIG. 12 (b)) and the corresponding display region is selected. A reserved symbol is selected (S1607).

  In addition, although the explanation was omitted here, if a symbol other than the hit holding symbol displayed in the holding symbol display area Ds 3 is selected, is it not notified of a hit by an effective line other than the winning effective line? If it is a win, it is replaced so that it becomes a different pattern from the win. Here, the symbols to be selected preferentially are determined in advance by setting the priority order, and replacement of the symbols is executed in the priority order.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1602 that the success or failure judgment result of the third symbol in fluctuation is out (S1602: No), based on the acquired effect counter 223f, the out-of-stock pending symbol selection table 222e (figure 12 (b)) to select an off-hold symbol from 12) and set (store) it in the corresponding on-hold symbol storage area 223e.

  Next, in the valid line H4 or H5, it is determined whether there is a valid line (hit line) to be a hit retention symbol (S1609). If it is determined that there is a hit line (S1609: Yes), the hold symbol displayed in the hit line of the hold symbol display area Ds3 corresponding to the hit line is changed to be a hold symbol, and the hold symbol is changed. The symbol storage area 223e is set (S1610). Here, the reserved symbols to be selected with priority are set in advance by determining the priority order, and replacement of the symbols is executed in the priority order. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1609 that there is no hit line (S1609: No), this process ends. Moreover, although description was abbreviate | omitted, when the number of pending | holding numbers received the 4th pending | holding ball number command, an egg pattern is set as a pending | holding pattern.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, each time a holding ball number command is received, processing for selecting a holding symbol corresponding to the holding ball number is executed. Therefore, the player can play the game looking forward to what kind of symbol is displayed in the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds3 when the game ball enters the entrance 64 and becomes the holding ball. . Therefore, the player's interest in the holding ball can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the variation display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S1312). This variation display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation effects, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223b is not on (that is, off) (S1701: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S1706. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223b is on (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223b is turned off (S1702), and then the fluctuation pattern in the process of S1404 in the command determination process (see FIG. 28). The fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1703).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  In the process of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223c provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1706). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223c is not on (that is, off) (S1706: No), since the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, this fluctuation display End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223c is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223c is turned off (S1707), and then in the process of S1407 of the command determination process (see FIG. 28) The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1708).

  In the process of S1709, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1709).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the pending number display update process (S1306) which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing this pending number display updating process (S1306).

  In the number-of-helds display update process (FIG. 34, S1306), first, it is determined whether there is a change in the held design (S1711). Although the description is omitted here, the change flag is set, the update of the held symbol is newly executed, and the data in the held symbol storage area 223e is changed, the change flag is set to ON. . In the process of S1711, it is determined whether the change flag is set to on. Then, after it is determined, it is set to off.

  If it is determined in the process of S1711 that there is a change in the held symbol (S1711: Yes), it is determined whether the held transition symbol is set in the held symbol storage area 223e (S1712). In addition, this suspension shift design is set by processing of S1439, S1437, and S1438 of suspension transition processing (FIG. 30, S1423), respectively. In order to be able to determine that it is a pending transition symbol, pending symbol data to which identification data different from other pending symbols is given is stored in the pending symbol storage area 223e.

  In the process of S1712, when it is determined that the pending transition symbol is stored in the pending symbol storage area 223e (S1712: Yes), the pending transition symbol set in the pending symbol storage area 223e, data of the pending symbol The indicated hold command for display is set. The hold command for display is output to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1712 that no pending transfer symbol is set in the pending symbol storage area 223e (S1712: No), a display corresponding to each pending symbol set in the pending symbol storage area 223e A hold command for setting is set (S1714). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S171 that there is no change in the held symbol, this process is ended. In addition, as for the suspension command for display set in the process of S1713 and S1714, a command capable of determining the number of balls for suspension can be set for the suspension symbol stored in the suspension symbol storage area 223e.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the holding command for display was set corresponding to the number of holding balls with respect to the holding symbol, it is not limited to that, so that the holding symbol of each holding ball can be determined in one command. It may be configured. Specifically, the command is configured into upper and lower 2 bytes, each bit (plurality of bits) is made to correspond to a holding ball, and data indicating a holding symbol is set.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, if there is no change in a holding symbol, it was set as the structure which does not output the holding symbol command for a display, but not only that but also when there is no change in a holding symbol, it memorizes in holding symbol storage area 223e The display hold command may be set based on the data. By configuring in this manner, the display control device 114 stably and correctly displays the third reserved symbol even when a defect such as deletion of the stored symbol data stored due to noise or the like occurs. It can be displayed on the device 81.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a frame button input monitoring and rendering process (S1307) which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring and effect process (S1307).

  In the frame button input monitoring / rendering process (S1307 in FIG. 35), first, it is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223g is 0 (S1721). In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted in this embodiment, the fluctuation time is set to this SW effective time counter 223g based on the fluctuation | variation start of a 3rd symbol. If it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223g is 0 (S1721: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223g is larger than 0 (S1721: No), the value of the SW effective time counter 223g is subtracted and updated (S1722). The value corresponding to the passage of time is subtracted from the value of the SW effective time counter 223g (in the present embodiment, the count value corresponding to the cycle of executing the frame button input monitoring and effect process is subtracted).

  It is determined whether the player has pressed the frame button 22 (S1723). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S1723: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed by the player (S1723: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1724). The held symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is hit on any of the valid lines H1 to H5 to determine whether the held symbol is displayed (hit notification completed) (S1725). If it is determined that the hit notification has been made (S1725: Yes), it is determined whether the hit holding symbol being displayed is displayed as a special hold symbol (S1726).

  If it is determined that the displayed hit holding symbol is a special holding symbol (S1726: Yes), the holding symbol corresponding to the displayed holding symbol is set again in the holding symbol storage area 223e (S1727) .

  In the present embodiment, the same holding symbol is set again. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the processing may be ended without updating the data of the holding symbol storage area 223e without setting it again. With this configuration, the control load of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1726, when it is determined that the hit holding symbol being displayed is the normal holding symbol (S1726: No), the holding symbol selection table 222d (FIG. 12) is displayed based on the value of the effect counter 223f. (A) See) Select a holding symbol from the line, overwrite it as a hit holding symbol on the hit line, and set it in the holding symbol storage area 223e (S1728). Thereafter, the processing of S1729 is executed.

  As described above, even when the hit holding symbol is displayed, if the hit holding symbol being displayed is the normal hold symbol, the hit holding symbol is changed by the player pressing the frame button 22. Therefore, the player can enjoy the change of the hit and hold symbol by pressing the frame button 22. In addition, when the determination result of the third symbol in fluctuation is a probability variation big hit (big hit A), it may be changed to a special hold symbol by lottery and displayed, and the player is expected to have a probability variation jackpot Holding, the frame button 22 can be pressed to change the hit design. Therefore, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of pressing the frame button 22 and to improve the player's interest in the game.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1725, when it is determined that the displayed holding symbol is not displayed in the hit holding symbol (S1725: No), the processing of S1729 is executed. In the process of S1729, it is determined whether the determination result of the third symbol during variation is a win (S1729). If it is determined that the lottery result during the change is a hit (S1729; Yes), the holding symbol lottery is performed from the holding symbol lottery table 222b (see FIG. 11B) based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired. It executes (S1730). Here, the holding symbol lottery is a lottery process for determining whether or not to display the holding symbol in the hit holding symbol.

  If the lottery result of S1730 is hit (displayed on a hit symbol), it is determined whether or not a lottery is made (S1731). If it is determined that the lottery result is displayed as a hit (S1731: Yes), it is determined whether it is possible to form a hit line corresponding to the symbol of the pass / fail judgment (S1732). If it is determined that the hit line can not be formed (S1732: No), the hit holding symbol is displayed in a row on the effective lines H1 to H3 corresponding to the symbol of the judgment of the hit or not based on the value of the effect counter 223f. It selects from reservation symbol selection table 222d, and sets to the corresponding reservation symbol storage area 223e (S1733). On the other hand, in the process of S1732, when it is determined that the hit line corresponding to the symbol of the pass / fail judgment can be formed (S1732: Yes), the hold symbol corresponding to the hit line is selected, and the hold symbol storage area 223e is selected. It sets to (S1734).

  Here, if it is possible to form a hit line by changing one of the holding symbols displayed on the effective line H4 or H5, the process of replacing the one with the holding symbol to be the holding symbol is executed. Be done.

  Thus, when the player presses the frame button 22, the displayed holding symbol is changed, and the hit holding symbol is displayed. Therefore, even when the hit holding symbol is not displayed, the player can change the holding symbol by pressing the frame button 22 and can display the hit holding symbol by his / her operation. Therefore, it is possible to play a game without bored time until the third symbol is stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1729, when it is determined that the determination result of the third symbol in fluctuation is out (S1729), in the process of S1731, when it is determined that the lottery result in S1730 is out (S1731: No), the processing of S1735 is executed. In the process of S1735, based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, the holding symbol is selected from the out-of-hold holding symbol selection table 222e and is set in the holding symbol storage area 223e (S1735).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is an effective line (hit line) to be a hit symbol in the displayed hold symbol (S1736), and if there is an active line to be a hit retention symbol (S1736: Yes), it corresponds to the hit line. One of the holding symbols to be played (in the present embodiment, the holding symbol displayed in the holding symbol display area Ds3) is changed to the holding symbol and is set in the holding symbol storage area 223e (S1737). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1736 that there is no hit line (S1736: No), this process is ended.

<Control Process Executed by MPU 231 of Display Control Device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 36 to FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, it is necessary to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S1801), and the display control device 114 is enabled to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S1801) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S1801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S1901). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1902). Thus, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1901.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S1902, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S1902, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs and fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1903). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after the other processing necessary for the boot processing is executed (S1904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after this boot processing (see S1801 in FIG. 36) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 36) (S1905), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process is finished.

  As described above, when the boot process (S1801) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 37, a predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S1902. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S1901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S1901. After repeating the process including the process of S1902 a plurality of times, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process starts, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1903 to S1905 without performing the processes of S1901 and S1902. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. When the boot process is finished, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1803). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1803, next, the fluctuation image at power on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1804). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller 237, according to the transfer instruction, transmits the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S1804, the simplified image display flag 233c is then performed. Is turned on (S1805). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 44A) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed so as to transfer (see S3302 of FIG. 44A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Thus, during the V interrupt process (see FIG. 38B), the simplified command determination process is performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is drawn. The simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 38B) is executed (see S2108 in FIG. 38B).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) to the first ball entrance 64, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110 When it is through the device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image can be displayed immediately during the variation presentation period, and a simple variation presentation can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, so it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S1805, the interrupt permission is set (S1806), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the processing of S1806, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38A, the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 38 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 38 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 16) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 38B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect image Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S2102) is executed, and then the display setting process (S2103) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2102), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41.

  In the display setting process (S2103), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like, an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 42 to 43.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S2104). In this task processing, based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 set in the display setting processing (S2103) or the simple display setting processing (S2109), the image is configured In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object), various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process (S2105), while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the transfer instruction to transfer. The details of the transfer setting process (S2105) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2106). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S2104), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2105) The drawing list shown in FIG. 16 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by processing of S2107, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S2108) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S2109) is executed to shift to the process of S2104.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2102) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 34, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S2203).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2204), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed. Then (S2205), the process returns to the process of S2201.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2205) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing (S2205) is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing (S2205), first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation rendering pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, The display data table buffer 233d is set (S2301).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2301, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each of the fluctuation display data tables corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2301 is turned on, and other fluctuation The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2303). In the display setting process, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d easily corresponds to which fluctuation pattern by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2303. It can be judged.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2304), 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 2305). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2306).

  Thereafter, the variation pattern command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing. By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized in the process of S2305, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2301. , And at the same time the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81 while extracting the contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing of S2302. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the image data of the sprite required in the variable display data table set in advance from the character ROM 234 for the normal video R To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2304, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2204 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2204: No), it is then determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2206), If there is a display type-of-stop command (S2206: Yes), the type-of-stop command processing is executed (S2207), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (large jack A, big jack B, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, reach out completely) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S2401), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time V interrupt processing (see FIG. 38B) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect is set (S2402).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is It is set to off (S2403).

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2402 is described. In the above-described task processing (S2105), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2403 and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, but before drawing is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the normal video from the character ROM 234 is used. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, high drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained.

  It should be noted that, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2401, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the process of S2402.

  Temporarily, if the stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit of the special symbol" is set, in fact, even if it is "the removal of the special symbol", the "special symbol" in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, causing the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "big hit of the special symbol", which may lower the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set as in the present embodiment, in fact, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", stop of complete removal on the third symbol display device 81 Even if the symbol is displayed, the player can be pleased because the pachinko machine 10 is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. When it is determined in the process of S2206 that there is no display type command for suspension (S2206: No), it is determined whether there is a display design symbol command (S2208). If it is determined that the display design symbol command has been received (S2208: Yes), the suspension display data table (see FIG. 15 (b)) indicated by the received command is set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S2209).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2208 that the display design symbol command has not been received (S2208: No), it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2217) If there is an error command (S2217: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2218), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2218) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing error command processing. The error command process (S2218) is to execute a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In error command processing (FIG. 41, S2218), first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S2901). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S 2902), and the error command is The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2901, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S2902, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S2902, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2210 that there is no error command (S2217: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2219), and the process returns to S2201.

  In the process of S2201 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes ), Each processing of S2202 to S2209 and S2217 to S2219 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2201 to S2209 and S2217 to S2219 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and the process of S2201 determines that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. , This command determination process is ended.

  In the simplified command determination process (S2109) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 38B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image, ie, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command The variation pattern command process (see FIG. 40A) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 40B), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are extracted and the other commands are Perform processing to discard without executing the processing corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (refer to FIG. 40A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2301. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image necessary for the setting are stored in the power-on main motion image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233b, and a process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 43, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2103) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 42, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S3001: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the process of S3002 to S3004 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the new command flag is set to off (S3002). The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3004).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 (a) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3101).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3004), or when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off in the process of S3003 (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, pointer update processing is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 (b) is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process (FIG. 43 (b), S3005), first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233 f is updated by the process of S 3201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233 f after the update is End information (S2802). As a result, if it is the End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3203). If it is a demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S3205), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2803 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3206), the present process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S3202: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S3006 together with the warning image etc. expanded earlier, and the display coordinates for each sprite Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variable display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not. (S3009).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S3009: Yes), the finalized display is not yet performed, and it is the timing to perform the finalized display, so first, the finalized display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3010), and then the contents are cleared by writing the null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S3015) Return to the V interrupt processing.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. Further, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In the task processing (S2104), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S3015, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the finalized display flag is not on but off in the process of S3009 (S3009: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S3016). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S3016: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so the demonstration display data table is displayed data table The contents are set in the buffer 233 d (S 3017), and then the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233 e to clear the contents (S 3018). Then, time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration effect is being performed in the on state is set on (S3021), this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the finalized display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can set the drawing contents.

  In the process of S3016, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3017: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is And return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simplified display setting process (S2109) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interruption process (see FIG. 38B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, an image of the power-on-time fluctuation image according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect based on the power-on time fluctuation image is finished. Is set to the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2105) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 44A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3302) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simplified image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the process of S3301, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44B, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 44B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer process of the image data performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (S3402). In this processing of S3402, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing is completed when the transfer completion signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S3402 (S3402: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Also, as a result of the process of S3301, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to S3403.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3403), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3403: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. In the transfer data information, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the process of S3403, if all resident target image data have been transferred (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 38B), not the simple command determination process and the simple display setting process, but the command determination process (see FIGS. 39 to 41) and the display setting process (FIGS. 42 to 43). Since reference is performed, drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the image at the normal time is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 45) (see S3301: No in FIG. 44A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

  In the normal image transfer setting process (S3303 in FIG. 42), first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2103) executed earlier is performed. The information described in the address indicated by the updated pointer 233 f is acquired (S 3501). Here, the information indicated by the transfer data table of the display data table and the pointer of the notice transfer data table of the notice data table is acquired respectively. Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502), and if it is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3503, the transfer start flag is set in the work RAM 233 to indicate that there is image data to be transferred in the on state, and the process proceeds to step S3505.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S3502 (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not an image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the last transfer of image data is completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

  In the process of S3406, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, if it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3506 (S3506: No), since the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Also, as a result of the process of S3505, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3505: No), the process proceeds to S3507.

  In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag Is turned off (S3508), and in the process of S3517, it is determined whether transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517). The determination in the process of S3517 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3517 (S3517: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3517 (S3517: No), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3418). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3518, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3519), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233i sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  Next, it is determined whether the rear image change flag is on (S3513). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S3513: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3513: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S3514), the back image provided for each back image type Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3515). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3516), and the process proceeds to S3517.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the back image determination flag in the on state is of the back A, the normal image transfer process is ended as it is.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2106) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2105) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) The drawing list shown in FIG. 16 is generated from the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105) (S3601). That is, in the process of S3601, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2105), the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored is specified for each sprite. Then, with respect to the specified storage RAM type and address, the necessary parameters for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing object buffer information specified by the drawing object buffer flag 233 j are transmitted to the image controller 237 (S 3502). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 1 including the information for expanding the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236 b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. Can.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing object buffer flag 233j is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is performed by inverting the value, that is, setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 38B) is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  In addition, in this embodiment, before the success or failure determination result is alert | reported by 3rd symbol, the success / failure decision result of the 3rd symbol in fluctuation | variation is alert | reported by pending | holding symbol. Therefore, the player tries to know the result of the judgment more quickly during the change of the third symbol, and shoots the game ball to make the game ball win in the ball entry port 64 and generate the holding ball. I do. Therefore, it is possible to make the player continue to shoot the game ball even while the third symbol is fluctuating, and it is possible to increase the sales of the game arcade.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when it counts as a holding ball, it was set as the structure which displays a holding symbol and alert | reports the pass / fail determination of the 3rd symbol, but it is not restricted to it, The game ball is exceeded the upper limit number of holding balls. Even when the player wins, the displayed holding symbol may be changed and displayed. By configuring in this way, when the hit symbol is not displayed and the hit symbol is not displayed, the player updates the hold symbol even if the hold ball is stored up to the upper limit, and the hit is successful. In order to display the holding symbol, the game ball can be continued to be fired to play a game. Therefore, it is possible to extend the time for playing the game by firing the game ball, and to increase the sales of the game arcade.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the holding symbol which shows 4 pieces of holding numbers was made into the symbol which does not alert | report the yes or no determination result of the 3rd symbol in fluctuation as a symbol of an egg, it is not restricted to it but the success or failure of the 3rd symbol The color of the egg may be selected based on the determination result. Specifically, gold, red, and blue are set, gold is selected only when the result of the determination is a hit, and red is selected rather than when the result of the determination is a drop. It may be configured to be easy to be selected, and blue may be configured to be more easily selected if the result of the pass / fail judgment is out. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to continue the game and allow the player to play to establish hold until the number of the hold is four. Thus, the sales of the game arcade can be increased.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it was set as the structure which alert | reports the propriety determination result of the 3rd symbol in fluctuation | variation with a reservation symbol, if the 3rd symbol in fluctuation | variation is a display mode of reach not only that, the reach display The holding symbol may be displayed in the same reach display mode as in the mode.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 to 56, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the case has been described in which the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds4 are set in advance in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 and displayed constantly.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the size of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is variably set, displayed, and displayed according to the number of held pieces. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

<Regarding Display of Suspended Design in Second Embodiment>
An example of the display mode of the reserved symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 49. FIG. 47 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the third symbol is in a fluctuating display in a state where the number of balls held is 0, that is, there is no ball held. In the second embodiment, when the number of holding balls is zero, the sub display area Ds is not displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. Only the area Dm is displayed on the entire display area of the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, FIG. 47 (b) shows a state in which the game ball has won the ball entry port 64 while the third symbol is being changed from the state where the holding ball is zero, and the holding ball has become one. FIG. As shown in FIG. 47 (b), when the number of holding balls is one, the second symbol display device 81 displays a holding symbol display area Ds1 necessary for the sub display area Ds to display one holding ball. . In this case, the display area of the main display area Dm is reduced and displayed.

  Next, FIG. 47 (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the number of reservations is changed from two (see FIG. 47 (b)). As shown in FIG. 47 (c), when the number of held items is two, the display area of the sub display area Ds displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is enlarged and displayed by the held display area Ds2. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the number of held pieces becomes 2, the held symbols are displayed respectively, and when the same held symbol is reached on the effective line H4 or H5, the comment window becomes more It is displayed in the sub display area Ds. Accordingly, the size of the display area of the main display area Dm is reduced and displayed. In the comment window, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the characters “reach !! if sharks are aligned チ ャ ン ス chance !!” are displayed, and the player symbol becomes a reach symbol, and which symbol is an effective line If it is aligned with, it will be in the structure to inform whether the jackpot can be expected more.

  Note that after the comment window is displayed for a predetermined time, the display area is reduced and is not displayed. In that case, the size of the main display area Dm is enlarged and displayed. Further, FIG. 47 (c) shows the case where the comment is displayed when the number of held pieces is two, but even if the number of balls held becomes two, the comments may not be displayed, and in that case, The comment window is not displayed, and the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds2 are displayed.

  Next, FIG. 48 (a) is a diagram showing a case where the number of pending items is displayed as three. As shown in FIG. 48A, the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds3 are displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the size of each of the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds3 is configured to be the same, and the same size is also applied to the case where the number of reservations is one or two. Therefore, the size of the main display area Dm is reduced and displayed.

  FIG. 48 (b) is a diagram showing a case where the number of pending is displayed as four. As shown in FIG. 48 (b), the number-of-helds display area Ds4 is displayed at a part of the right end of the held symbol display area Ds3 displayed when the number of held is three (see FIG. 48 (a)) . In this case, the sizes of the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds are set without change.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the display mode of the holding symbol when the variable display of the third symbol is newly started from the state of the holding number 4 will be described. As shown in FIG. 49 (a), when the display of the third symbol is newly started from the state where the number of reservations is 4 (see FIG. 48 (b)), the reservation is made one by one in the previous storage area Be shifted. Although the symbol of the egg is displayed as shown in FIG. 48 (b), the number of the held unit is four, but the suspension is shifted so that the suspension display area Ds4 is erased as shown in FIG. 49 (a). And a picture in which the holding symbol of the egg is broken is displayed, and the holding symbol is scrolled from among them. Then, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), the combination of the selected holding symbols is scrolled from the left to the right of the holding symbol display area Ds3 and displayed at a predetermined display position. In addition, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), when the same hold symbol is displayed on the valid line H4 or H5 and the hit hold symbol is displayed, a comment window is formed below the hold symbol display area Ds3. The word "chance !!" is displayed to indicate that the hit holding symbol has been displayed.

  The size of the comment window is configured to be the same size as the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds3, and the size of the main display area Dm is reduced and displayed as the comment window is displayed. In addition, display is appropriately set for the comment window, and various contents of the comment are displayed as well as the contents shown in FIG. 49 (b).

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Main Controller 110 in Second Embodiment
The electrical configuration of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment is the same as the electrical configuration of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Controller 113 in Second Embodiment
The electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment is such that a status storage area 223 h is added to the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment.

  The status storage area 223 h is a storage area for storing status information for setting the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Although details will be described later, coordinates indicating each of the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds are allocated in advance to the status information stored in the status storage area 223h. As status information, statuses 1 to 7 are set according to the size of each display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device 114 in Second Embodiment
In the display control device 114 in the second embodiment, a coordinate selection table 234a4 is added to the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, as compared with the display control device 114 in the first embodiment.

  The coordinate selection table 234a4 is a coordinate selection table (Dm) 234a4 for selecting a front face for setting the display area Dm based on the status information received from the audio lamp control device 113 shown in FIG. 52 (b). 53 is composed of a coordinate selection table (Ds) 234a4 for selecting a spreadsheet for setting the display area Ds shown in FIG. 53 based on the status information received from the audio lamp control device 113 shown in FIG. 53. .

  In the coordinate selection table (Ds) 234a4, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the coordinates of the third symbol display device 81 are set corresponding to each status. As for the face of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 52A, A (X0, Y0) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is set as the origin. B (X0, Y1) is a position set as the display position of the main display area Dm when the number of reservations is 4 and the comment window is also displayed. This B (X0, Y1) is set as the coordinates of the main display area Dm when the status information of the main display area Dm is 1. Note that the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 displays the main display area Dm by B (X0, Y1) based on the reception of the display area setting command indicating the status information “1” of the main display area Dm. Set to The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 sets the display area in the horizontal direction from the coordinates set by the coordinates B (X0, Y1).

  Similarly, referring to FIG. 52A, coordinates C (X0, Y2) correspond to status information "2" of the main display area Dm, and coordinates D (X0, Y3) indicate status information of the main display area Dm. The coordinate E (X0, Y4) corresponds to "3", the status information "4" of the main display area Dm, and the coordinate F (X0, Y5) corresponds to the status information "5" of the main display area Dm. It is set.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 53, the status information “1” of the sub display area Ds is selected when the coordinates are not set and the number of pending items is 0, and the sub display area Ds displays the third symbol It is selected when it is not formed in the device 81. In the status information "2" of the sub display area Ds, coordinates E (X0, Y4) are set as a display area of the reserved symbol display area Ds1 (pending 1). When E (X0, Y4) is set as the coordinate for setting the display area of the hold display area Ds1 as the sub display area Ds, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 sets horizontal and vertical directions with the coordinate E as a start point. Form a reserved symbol display area Ds1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 53, in the status information “3” of the sub display area Ds, coordinates D (X0, Y3) are set as coordinates for setting the held symbol display area Ds1 (hold 1), and the held symbol display Coordinates E (X0, Y4) are set as the coordinates for setting the area Ds2 (pending 2). When the status information “3” of the sub display area Ds is set, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 horizontally sets the coordinate display area D from the coordinate D to the coordinate E in the horizontal direction as the display area of the holding symbol display area Ds1. Up to the right end of the display area of the symbol display device 81 is formed as the hold display area Ds1. Furthermore, the display area of the reserved display area Ds2 is formed in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction from the coordinate E, respectively.

  Similarly, each display area and its coordinates set in the coordinate selection table 234a4 corresponding to each status information are selected, and each display area in the sub display area Ds is formed. Note that how to form each of the reserved display areas Ds1 to Ds4 from the selected coordinates is set in advance. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

<About Control Processing Executed by Main Controller 110 in Second Embodiment>
The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the second embodiment is executed in the same manner as the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the first embodiment, so the illustration and description thereof are omitted. Do.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Controller 113 in Second Embodiment>
Control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 55.

  With reference to FIG. 54, the command determination process 2 (S1320) which is one process in the main process (FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 2 (S1320). In command determination processing 2 (FIG. 54, S1320) in the second embodiment, display area setting processing (FIG. 55, S1414) is added to the command determination processing (FIG. 28, S1311) in the first embodiment. . As the other processes, the same processes as the command determination process (FIG. 28, S1311) in the first embodiment are executed, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  After the holding symbol selection process (FIG. 32, S1413) of the command determination process 2 (FIG. 54, S1320) is executed, the display area setting process is executed (S1414). The display area setting process (S1414) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. After the display area setting process (FIG. 55, S1414) is executed, this process ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 55, about the display area setting process (S1414) which is one process in the command determination process 2 (FIG. 54, S1320) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. explain. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the display area setting process (S1414).

  In the display area setting process (FIG. 55, S1413), first, it is judged from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a whether the number of holdings is 0 or not (S1621). If it is determined that the number of held pieces is 0 (S1621: Yes), the status information of the main display area Dm is set to "5" and the status information of the sub display area Ds is set to "1" in the third symbol display device 81. Are set (stored) in the status storage area 223h. After that, a display area setting command for notifying the display control device 114 of the set status information is set (S1623).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the pending number is greater than 0 (S1621: No), it is determined whether the pending number is 1 (S1624). If it is determined that the number of pending items is one (S1624: Yes), the status information of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is "4", and the status information of the sub display area Ds is "2". Are set in the status storage area 223h (S1625). Thereafter, the process of S1623 is executed, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1624 that the number of reservations is not one (S1624: No), it is determined whether the number of reservations is two (S1626). If it is determined that the number of reservations is 2 (S1626: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a comment display mode. In the present embodiment, the determination of the presence or absence of a comment is made based on whether or not a held symbol to be reached is displayed on the activated line H4 or H5 in the held symbol selection process (FIG. 32, S1413).

  In the present embodiment, the presence or absence of a comment is determined based on whether or not the holding symbol is displayed in the reach display mode. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a predetermined lottery is determined based on the value of the effect counter 223f. If there is a symbol of a predetermined symbol (for example, a shark etc.) in the reserved symbol, it may be set to have a comment, or displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The presence or absence of a comment may be determined based on the result of determination as to whether the third symbol has been selected or the selected variation pattern.

  If it is determined in the process of S1627 that there is a comment (S1627: Yes), the status information "2" of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 and the status information "4" of the sub display area Ds are statuses. It is set in the storage area 223h (S1628). Thereafter, the process of S1623 is executed, and the process ends. As described above, when two comments are displayed on hold, the size of the main display area Dm becomes the coordinate C (see FIG. 52A), and in the sub display area Ds, the hold display areas Ds1 to Ds2 are displayed. The comment display areas are set to have uniform widths from the coordinates C, the coordinates D, and the coordinates E, respectively.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1627 that there is no comment, the status information "3" of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 and the status information "3" of the sub display area Ds are status storage areas respectively. The value is stored in 223h (S1629). Thereafter, the process of S1623 is executed, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1626, when it is determined that the number of pending is not two (S1626: No), it is determined whether the number of pending is three (S1630). If it is determined that the number of pending items is 3 (S1630: Yes), it is determined whether the comment window is displayed (S1631), and if it is determined that there is a comment (S1631: Yes), the main display Status information "1" of the area Dm and status information "6" of the sub display area Ds are set in the status storage area 223h (S1632). Thereafter, the process of S1623 is executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no comment in the process of S1631 (S1632: No), the status information "2" of the main display area Dm and the status information "5" of the sub display area Ds are set in the status storage area 223h. (S1632). Thereafter, the process of S1623 is executed, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1630 that the number of pending is not three, that is, if it is determined that the number of pending is four (S1630: No), it is determined whether there is a comment (S1634) . If it is determined that there is a comment (S1634: Yes), status information "1" of the main display area Dm and status information "8" of the sub display area Ds are set in the status storage area 223h (S1632). Thereafter, after the process of S1623 is performed, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1634 that there is no comment (S1634: No), status information "1" of the main display area Dm and status information "6" of the sub display area Ds are set in the status storage area 223h. (S1632). Thereafter, after the processing of S1623 is executed, this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the sizes of the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds are respectively variably set depending on the increase or decrease of the number of holdings and the presence or absence of the comment. Therefore, when the number of balls held is small, the display area of the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is displayed is enlarged and set, so that the player can play the game easily seeing the third symbol. .

  In addition, when the number of holding balls is stored, the display area is formed and set each time, so that the necessary display area is allocated and the display area can be used effectively. In addition, since the display area is newly set and displayed when the holding symbol is displayed, it is possible to draw more attention of the player to the holding symbol.

Regarding Control Processing Executed by Display Control Device 114 in Second Embodiment
Control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment is V interrupt processing for the control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment (FIG. 38B). The command determination process (FIG. 39, S2102) in the above is changed to the command determination process 2 (FIG. 56, S2110). The other processes are the same as in the first embodiment.

  The command determination process 2 (S2110) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 2 (S2110). In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 56, S2110) in the second embodiment, each process of S2110 to S2111 is added to the command determination process (FIG. 39, S2102) in the first embodiment. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In S2208 of command determination processing 2 (FIG. 56, S2110), when it is determined that the display reserved symbol command is not received (S2208: No), it is determined whether the display area setting command is received ((S2208) S2210). If it is determined that the display area setting command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 (S2210: Yes), each coordinate is selected from the coordinate selection table 234a4 based on the status information indicated by the received command. , And display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Thereafter, this process ends.

  In this embodiment, the coordinates selected from the coordinate selection table 234a4 are set and updated in the display data table and the hold display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, respectively, and then the third symbol display device is displayed. The display mode displayed on 81 can be changed.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the determination result of the third symbol which is variably displayed so as to be distinguishable by the holding symbol.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when displaying the holding symbol, the judgment result of the success or failure in the case where the third symbol corresponding to the holding symbol starts to change is determined first. It is different from the first embodiment in that the display pattern of the holding symbol is set on the basis of the result of the judgment on the acceptability. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

<About the display mode of the retention symbol in the third embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 57, the display mode of the reserved symbol in the third embodiment will be described. Although the details will be described later, in the third embodiment, when the gaming ball is won in the entrance 64 and stored as a holding ball, it is before the variation judgment result of the holding ball becomes the fluctuation start. Execute the process of determining (prefetching). And based on the determination result, it is comprised so that the determination result may be alert | reported by the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 by a reservation symbol.

  FIG. 57 (a) is a diagram showing a hit holding symbol which informs the player that the number of holdings is 3 and the result of judgment of the third holding ball (hold 3) becomes a hit. . In FIG. 57A, three symbols of dolphins are aligned and displayed on the effective line H3, and the player is notified that the hold 3 is to be a hit.

  Next, FIG. 57 (b) is a diagram showing a case where the number of holding balls is two and the second holding ball (holding 2) is displayed with a chance eye that is a combination of special holding symbols. . This chance is set to be effective when it is displayed in advance in any of the effective lines H1 to H3 in the order of "shellfish, shark, shellfish". The player is configured such that this chance is likely to be displayed when the hit / fail judgment of the holding ball whose hold is displayed is hit or the variation pattern of the third symbol corresponding to the holding ball becomes super reach. ing. Therefore, when the chance eye is displayed, it is possible to make the player more expecting a hit in the lottery game corresponding to the holding ball.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 According to Third Embodiment
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Main Controller 110 in Third Embodiment
The electrical configuration of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is the same as the electrical configuration of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment shown in FIG. Among the counter values shown in a), the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is acquired when the gaming ball is in the ball entry port 64 and the number of holding balls is less than four, and stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a Differs from the first embodiment in that The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Controller 113 in Third Embodiment
In the ROM 222 (see FIG. 59B) of the audio lamp control device 113 MPU 221 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, a sub variation pattern table 222 f is added to the first embodiment. The sub variation pattern table 222f is the same data table as the variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 10C) set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Thus, by setting the same data table as the main control unit 110 in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113, the main control unit 110 does not have to output a change pattern command indicating a change pattern selected. The MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 of various counter values acquired based on the game ball winning at the entrance 64, whereby the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 selects Variation patterns can be determined.

  In the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, a winning information storage area 223i is added to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment. The other points are the same as in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning combination when the start winning combination is achieved in the main control device 110. The main control unit 110 predicts (estimates) various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when the drawing of the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning combination is performed, and the predicted various information is The main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, the various information (pass, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area), the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). Be done. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to an earlier winning is stored, and data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored in the first area.

<About Control Processing Executed by Main Control Device 110 in Third Embodiment>
The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the third embodiment is the start winning process (FIG. 20, S105) as compared to the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the first embodiment. Is changed to start winning process 2 (FIG. 60, S115). The other processing is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the start winning process 2 (S115) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 2 (S115). The start winning process 2 (FIG. 60, S115) in the third embodiment is different from the start winning process (FIG. 20, S105) in the first embodiment in the process of S406 in which the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is reserved for special symbol It is changed to the structure stored in the ball | bowl storage area 203a, and each process to S407-S411 is added. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the process of S406 is executed, it is determined based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S406 whether or not it becomes a big hit than the gaming state at the start of the change (S407). If it is determined that it is a jackpot (S407: Yes), a jackpot winning command is set (S408). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S407 that the variation is out (S407: No), the variation pattern of the super reach variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in S406. (S409). If it is determined that the change is to be a super reach (S409: Yes), an out-of-reach reach winning command is set (S410).

  On the other hand, in the process of S409, when it is determined that the variation pattern of the super reach is not selected (S409: No), a losing prize command is set (S411). Thereafter, this process ends.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Controller 113 in Third Embodiment>
Control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The command determination process 3 (S1350) which is one process in the main process (FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The command determination process 3 (FIG. 61, S1350) in the third embodiment differs from the command determination process (FIG. 28, S1311) in the first embodiment in the pending display update process (FIG. 29, S1404). In the process 2 (FIG. 62, S1420), the reserved symbol selection process (FIG. 31, S1413) is deleted, and each process from S1415 to S1416 is added. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  After the process of S1403 is executed, the pending display update process 2 is executed (S1420). The pending display update process 2 (S1420) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the pending display update process 2 (S1420). The pending display update process 2 (FIG. 62, S1420) in the third embodiment is a pending transfer process (FIG. 30, S1423) is a pending transfer with respect to the pending display update process (FIG. 29, S1404) in the first embodiment. It is changed to processing 2 (FIG. 63, S1450). The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, pending transfer process 2 (S1450) which is one process of pending display update process 2 (FIG. 62, S1420) in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the suspension transfer process 2 (S1450).

  In the pending transfer process 2 (FIG. 63, S1450), first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1451). It is determined from the data stored in the prize information storage area 223i whether the winning information is shifted from the fourth holding ball number (holding 4) to the third holding ball number (holding 3) S1452). If it is determined that the winning information transferred to the hold 3 is a hit (S1452: Yes), the hold symbol lottery table 222b (see FIG. 11B) is held based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired. A display lottery of symbols (pending symbol lottery) is executed (S1453). The reserved symbol lottery is a lottery process for determining whether to notify that the result of determination of acceptance for the suspension shifted to the suspension 3 is a win.

  It is determined whether or not it is determined that the lottery result in S1453 indicates the notification of a hit (S1454). When it is determined to notify a hit (S1454: Yes), in any of the effective lines H4 or H5 of the reserved symbol displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, the symbol of the result of the determination result It is determined whether notification is possible with the corresponding notification content (S1455).

  Here, the notification content corresponding to the symbol of the result of the pass / fail judgment is that if the symbol type corresponding to the hold 3 is a probability variation that the jackpot A is big hit, any hold symbol among the hold symbols is the effective line It shows that it displays side by side. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot which is a jackpot B, it is shown that among the holding symbols, any holding symbol of the normal holding symbols is arranged and displayed on the effective line.

  If three of the same symbols are displayed among the special holding symbols on the activated line, the player is stopped and displayed that the lottery result stored in the holding 3 is a probability change big hit (big hit A). Can be determined before the In addition, when the same normal holding symbol is displayed three times on the activated line, the player can determine that at least the result of the success or failure judgment is the normal jackpot (jackpot B). It should be noted that even if three normal holding symbols are displayed on the activated line, the result of the success or failure judgment may be a probability change jackpot, so the player can continue playing the game in anticipation of becoming a probability change jackpot. As a result, by the combination of the holding symbols, it is possible to identify the result of the judgment of the acceptance or rejection before the lottery game for holding is started, and it is possible to enjoy the game more.

  In the process of S1455, when it is determined that the hit and hold symbol corresponding to the symbol of the pass / fail judgment can be displayed on the valid line H4 or H5 (S1455: Yes), the valid line capable of displaying the hit and hold symbol. A holding transition symbol including a symbol corresponding to H4 or H5 is selected, and is set in the holding symbol storage area 223e (S1456). Here, when two same reserved symbols corresponding to the result of the pass / fail determination are displayed on the activated line H4 or H5 of the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 and Ds2, the process of S1456 is executed. Therefore, by displaying the same symbol as the holding symbol on which the same holding symbol is displayed, on the effective line H4 or H5 of the holding symbol display area Ds3, three identical holding symbols are displayed on the effective line H4 or H5. Be done. The other symbols displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds3 are displayed on the basis of the value of the effect counter 223f selected in S1451 and the corresponding display position (X1) from the out-of-hold reserved symbol selection table 222e (see FIG. 12B). Any two symbols of ~ X3) are selected.

  In addition, although the explanation was omitted here, if a symbol other than the hit holding symbol displayed in the holding symbol display area Ds 3 is selected, is it not notified of a hit by an effective line other than the winning effective line? If it is a win, it is replaced so that it becomes a different pattern from the win. Here, the symbols to be selected preferentially are determined in advance by setting the priority order, and replacement of the symbols is executed in the priority order.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1455, when it is determined that it is impossible to form the effective line of the hit retention symbol corresponding to the symbol of the hit / fail determination (S1455: No), the result of the hit / fail determination result and the effect counter 223f On the basis of the hold symbol selection table 222d (see FIG. 12A), the hit hold symbol to be displayed on the valid line H3 is selected and set in the corresponding hold symbol storage area 223e (S1457). Here, three reserved symbols selected from the reserved symbol selection table 222d (FIG. 12A) are displayed in the effective line H3 in the reserved symbol display area Ds3.

  As a result, the player can identify that the hold data stored in the hold 3 is a hit determination result. Thus, the player can know that he will win more quickly, and can enjoy the game until the jackpot game is started. Furthermore, since it is possible to know that the jackpot will occur faster, it is possible to prepare for the jackpot game and prepare necessary lending of the game balls, etc. The jackpot game is started with few game balls remaining, and the game is It is possible to prevent problems that would be disadvantageous to the

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1452 that the winning combination information shifted to holding 3 is out (S1452: No), the winning information shifted to holding 3 is the information stored based on the reach winning combination command. It is determined whether there is any, that is, if the variation pattern of outliers is selected (S1458). If it is determined that the change pattern to be put on hold 3 that has been transferred to hold 3 is out and super reach is selected (S1458: Yes), the process of S1459 is executed. Even when it is determined in the process of S1454 that the lottery result in S1453 is out (S1454: No), the process of S1459 is executed.

  In the process of S1459, based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the chance symbol (see FIG. 57 (b)) is to be displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds3. In addition, if the value of the effect counter 223f is any one of "150 to 199", it is determined that the chance eye is to be displayed, and it is determined whether it is "0 to 149" or not. For example, it is determined that the chance eye is not displayed.

  If it is determined in the process of S1460 that a chance eye is to be displayed, each holding symbol corresponding to the chance eye is set as a holding transition symbol in the corresponding holding symbol storage area 223e (S1461). Here, with the corresponding holding symbol storage area 223e, a storage area capable of storing the holding symbol data corresponding to holding 1 to holding 4 is set in the holding symbol storage area 223e, and the storage corresponding to the number of holdings It indicates that the holding symbol is stored in the area.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1458, when the change pattern in which the suspension which has been shifted to the suspension 3 becomes the super reach is not selected (S1458: No), it is determined that the chance eye is not displayed in the process of S1460 (S1460: The processing of S1462 is executed. In the processing of S1462, a holding symbol to be displayed in each display position of the holding symbol display area Ds3 from the out-of-hold holding symbol selection table 222e (refer to FIG. 12B) based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired in the processing of S1451. Each is selected and set in the reserved symbol storage area 223e (S1462). It is determined whether or not there is an effective line (hit line) that is to be hit and held in the hit line H4 or H5 according to the set hold symbol (S1463). If it is determined that there is a hit line (S1463: Yes), the held symbol displayed in the held symbol display area Ds3 corresponding to the hit line is changed to a held symbol which is removed and set in the held symbol storage area 223e (S1464). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no hit line (S1463: No), this process ends.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, the holding symbol for notifying the player of the fourth holding is that a symbol imitating a fish egg is displayed in the holding symbol display area Ds4. Therefore, the player can not determine whether the third symbol in the process of change is acceptable or not from the held fourth symbol. However, when the reserve is digested and the new third symbol fluctuation starts, the reserve symbol displayed in the reserve symbol display area Ds3 is triggered by the shift of the fourth reserve to the third reserve. , It is selected based on the result of the pass / fail determination corresponding to the holding symbol.

  Therefore, in the case where four reservations are stored, the notification notification form based on the result of the determination of acceptance is displayed at the same timing as the change start timing of the third symbol. Therefore, the player is displayed a new holding symbol at the start of the change, and can increase the enjoyment when storing four holdings.

  Referring back to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1411 that the holding ball command has not been received (S1411: No), it is determined from the voice lamp control device 113 whether the winning command is received (S1415). When it is determined that the winning command is received (S1415: Yes), a winning command reception process is executed (S1416). Thereafter, this process ends. The winning command reception process (S1416) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing this winning command reception process (S1416). In the winning command reception process (FIG. 64, S1416), first, it is judged whether the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a is 4, that is, the number of holding balls is 4 (S1641). If it is determined that the number of holding balls is 4 (S1641: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of holding balls is less than 4 (S1641: No), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1642). It is determined whether the received winning command is a winning command (S1644).

  If it is determined that the received winning command is a winning command (S1644: Yes), the holding symbol is drawn from the holding symbol lottery table 222b (FIG. 11B) based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired. A lottery is executed (S1645). It is determined whether the lottery result executed in S1645 is a hit (S1646). When it is determined that the lottery result is a hit (S1646: Yes), the hold symbol corresponding to the symbol type (whether it is jackpot A or jackpot B) indicated by the received prize command is the effective line H4 or H5 It is determined whether it is possible to display (form) a hit symbol (hit line) (S1647). If it is determined that a hit line can not be formed (S1647: No), a jackpot type (symbol type) than the holding symbol selection table 222d (see FIG. 12A) based on the value of the effect counter 223f. In response to, the holding symbol is selected and set as a holding symbol to be displayed in a row in the corresponding holding symbol storage area 223e (set the same holding symbol to X1 to X3) (S1648).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit line can be formed in the process of S1647 (S1647: Yes), the reserved symbol corresponding to the hit line is set for the corresponding display position, and is set to the other display position. Based on the value of the effect counter 223f, the holding symbol to be displayed is selected from the out-of-hold holding symbol selection table 222e and set (S1649).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1644, when the received winning command is the off winning command (S1644: No), it is determined whether the received winning command is the out-of-reach reach winning command (S1650). If it is determined that the command is an out-of-reach reach winning command (S1650: Yes), the processing of S1651 is executed. In the process of S1646, when it is determined that the result of the determination in step S1645 is the display of cancellation (S1646: No), the process of S1651 is performed.

  In the process of S1651, based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, a lottery (chance lottery) of whether or not to display the chance eye is executed (S1651). About this chance eye lottery, since it is processing similar to S1459 of suspension transfer processing 2 (Drawing 63, S1450), detailed explanation is omitted. When the lottery result in the process of S1651 indicates the chance eye, it is determined whether or not the lottery is performed (S1652). If it is determined that the chance eye is to be displayed (S1652: Yes), the chance eye is set as the hold symbol and the corresponding hold symbol storage area 223e is set (S1653). Thereafter, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the chance eye is not displayed (S1652), the process of S1650 is executed if it is determined that it is not the out-of-reach reach winning command (S1650). In the process of S1654, each holding symbol is selected based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, and is set in the corresponding holding symbol storage area 223e (S1654). It is determined whether or not there is a hit line on which the held symbol is displayed while the hit symbol is displayed on the effective line H4 or H5 of the held symbol (S1655). If it is determined that there is a hit line (S1655: Yes), the held symbol corresponding to the hit line is changed to the left hold symbol and is set in the held symbol storage area 223e (S1656). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1655 that there is no hit line (S1655: No), this process is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the winning command is received, the holding symbol is selected based on the result of the determination of the winning command or the variation pattern indicated by the winning command, and the information is notified to the player. Therefore, the player can determine whether or not a hit ball is included in the hold balls by the combination of the hold symbols. In addition, since the same holding symbol is displayed on the effective line H4 or H5, the hit is notified, so that the holding symbol is also displayed for the holding symbol displayed for the holding whose judgment result is out of order. A game can be played in anticipation of being aligned on the activated line H4 or H5. Therefore, the player becomes more interested in the display mode of the holding symbol, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (S1330) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (S1330).

  In frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S1330 in FIG. 65), first, it is determined whether the value of the SW effective time counter 223g is 0 (S1331). In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted in this embodiment, the fluctuation time is set to this SW effective time counter 223g based on the fluctuation | variation start of a 3rd symbol. If it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223g is 0 (S1331: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223g is a value larger than 0 (S1331: No), the value of the SW effective time counter 223g is subtracted and updated (S1332). The value corresponding to the passage of time is subtracted from the value of the SW effective time counter 223g (in the present embodiment, the count value corresponding to the cycle of executing the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (S1330) is subtracted) .

  It is determined whether the player has pressed the frame button 22 (S1333). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1333: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed by the player (S1333: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1334). The held symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is hit on any of the valid lines H1 to H5 to determine whether the held symbol is displayed (hit notification completed) (S1335). If it is determined that the hit notification has been made (S1335: Yes), it is determined whether the displayed hit holding symbol is displayed as a special hold symbol (S1336).

  If it is determined that the displayed hit holding symbol is a special holding symbol (S1336: Yes), the holding symbol corresponding to the displayed holding symbol is set again in the holding symbol storage area 223e (S1337) .

  In the present embodiment, the same holding symbol is set again. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the processing may be ended without updating the data of the holding symbol storage area 223e without setting it again. With this configuration, the control load of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1336, when it is determined that the hit symbol being displayed is the normal symbol (S1336: No), the symbol selection table 222d (FIG. 12) is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223f. (A) See) Select a holding symbol from the line, overwrite it as a hit holding symbol on the hit line, and set it in the holding symbol storage area 223e (S1338). Thereafter, the process of S1339 is executed.

  As described above, even when the hit holding symbol is displayed, if the hit holding symbol being displayed is the normal hold symbol, the hit holding symbol is changed by the player pressing the frame button 22. Therefore, the player can enjoy the change of the hit and hold symbol by pressing the frame button 22. In addition, when the determination result of the third symbol in fluctuation is a probability variation big hit (big hit A), it may be changed to a special hold symbol by lottery and displayed, and the player is expected to have a probability variation jackpot Holding, the frame button 22 can be pressed to change the hit design. Therefore, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of pressing the frame button 22 and to improve the player's interest in the game.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1335, when it is determined that the displayed holding symbol is not displayed in the hit holding symbol (S1335: No), the processing of S1339 is executed. In the process of S1339, it is determined whether a chance (see FIG. 57B) is displayed on any of the valid lines H1 to H5 (S1339). If it is determined that the chance is displayed (S1339: Yes), the processing of S1337 is executed, and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the chance is not displayed (S1339: No), it is determined whether or not winning data is stored in the winning information storage area 223i based on the winning command (S1340).

  If it is determined that there is no hit in the winning information storage area 223i (S1340: No), based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired, of the valid lines H1 to H3, the number of reservations from the loss reservation symbol selection table 222e It selects as a holding symbol corresponding to a large number of holdings, and sets to the corresponding holding symbol holding storage area 223e (S1341).

  By configuring in this way, the holding symbol of one valid line is updated among the holding symbols, so the player can hit the frame button 22 every time the holding symbol is not aligned and hit the effective line of the holding symbol. Can be given to In addition, even when the holding ball is not stored, the player can quickly generate the holding ball and give the player a feeling of wanting to enjoy the effect by the holding symbol, and the motivation to play the game can be amplified.

  Here, in the present embodiment, only the holding symbols corresponding to the holding with the largest holding number among the valid lines H1 to H3, that is, 1 to 3 holding numbers, are newly selected. Not only that, it may be configured to reselect all the reserved symbols. In that case, a plurality of effect counters 223f which are not updated in synchronization are set, and each holding symbol is selected according to the value, or an effect counter 223f which differs according to a predetermined calculation according to the value of one effect counter 223f. It may be configured to generate the value of. By configuring in this manner, when the player presses the frame button 22, more hold symbols can be updated, and the sense of expectation displayed in the hit hold symbol can be amplified.

  In the process of S1342, it is determined whether or not there is an effective line (hit line) to be a hit symbol in the held symbol being displayed (S1342), and if there is an active line to be a hit symbol (S1342: Yes), a hit One of the holding symbols corresponding to the line (in the present embodiment, the holding symbol displayed in the holding symbol display area Ds3) is changed to the holding symbol and set in the holding symbol storage area 223e (S1343). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1342 that there is no hit line (S1342: No), this process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning information storage area 223i is hit in the process of S1340 (S1340: Yes), the holding symbol lottery table 222b (see FIG. 11 (b) is referred to based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. ) The hold symbol lottery is executed (S1344). It is determined whether the lottery result executed in the process of S1344 is a hit display (S1345). If it is determined that the lottery result is out of display (S1345: No), the processing of S1341 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1345, when it is determined that the lottery result is a hit display (S1345: Yes), the hit line symbol is held by updating the line symbol on the line H3 to the line H4 or H5. It is determined whether the displayed hit line can be formed (S1346). If it is determined that the hit line can be formed (S1346: Yes), the reserved symbol corresponding to the hit line is set to the display position of the corresponding effective line, and the symbols of the other display positions are displayed in the effect counter 223f. Based on the value, it is set in the reserved symbol storage area 223e (S1348). Thereafter, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1346 that a hit line can not be formed (S1346: No), the hit type of the hit information stored in the win information storage area 223i and the effect counter 223f. Corresponding to the value and the winning symbol selection table 222d from the winning number corresponding to the winning information as a pending symbol of the hit pending symbol (set the same pending symbol in any of the effective line H1 ~ H3 set three) corresponding It sets to the reservation symbol storage area 223e which it does. Thereafter, this process ends.

  As described above, since the player can operate the frame button 22 to change the displayed holding symbol, the player can receive the holding symbol even when the hit holding symbol is not displayed. And the frame button 22 can be operated. In addition, when the hit holding symbol is already displayed, the hit holding symbol is configured not to be updated to the holding symbol indicating the detachment, so that the player is worried about the notification information. Problems can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the third symbol is shortened and the efficiency of the game is improved, the time for displaying the notice effects etc. using the third symbol is shortened, resulting in a monotonous game. There is. However, with the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the advance notice effect of notifying the result of the determination of the success or failure of the third symbol to be displayed in a variable manner, using the time when the reserved symbol is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the trouble that the player is bored.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Fourth Embodiment>
The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, as the holding symbols, the holding symbols indicating the number of holding balls are displayed as random symbols, and the combination is used to notify the determination of the success or failure of the third symbol being changed.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, the holding symbol is configured by a symbol row configured with a plurality of symbols, and the symbol row is for a predetermined time when triggered by the generation of the holding ball. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that it is configured to be displayed in a stopped state after being scrolled, and to be notified of a yes / no determination by a combination with a holding symbol indicating another holding ball. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

<Configuration of Hold Symbol in Fourth Embodiment>
Fig.66 (a) shows the symbol row of the retention symbol displayed on the sub display area Ds of the 3rd symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 4th embodiment. As in the first embodiment, the holding symbol and the special holding symbol are respectively configured, and each holding symbol is assigned a number indicating the order in which it is arranged in the symbol row. The reserved symbol array is scrolled and displayed in ascending order of symbol array in the corresponding reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds3 triggered by the generation of the reserved spheres of 1 to 3 of the reserved spheres.

  FIG. 66 (b) is a view showing a display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth embodiment. Since the configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, the detailed description will be omitted.

<About the display mode of the retention symbol in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 67-73, the display mode of the holding symbol in this 4th Embodiment is demonstrated. 67 to 73 are views showing only the sub display area Ds in the display area of the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

  FIG. 67 (a) shows the case where the third game symbol is fluctuating in the main display area Dm and there is no holding ball, the gaming ball is won in the entrance 64 and one holding ball is generated. FIG. When the game ball is won in the entrance 64 and the first holding ball (Hold 1) is generated, variable display (dynamic display) of the holding symbol row is started as shown in FIG. 67 (a). The symbol columns are displayed in ascending order by scrolling from right to left. In this embodiment, based on the remaining time of the third symbol in the variable display, the scroll display is performed with a fluctuation time of either 5 seconds or 3 seconds. After the scroll display is started, when the fluctuation time passes, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), stop display is made with a predetermined holding symbol (the holding symbol determined by lottery stops at a predetermined position) Ru.

  FIG. 68 (a) shows the display mode of the holding symbol when the game ball is further prized at the entrance 64 and the holding ball is generated after the state of FIG. 67 (b) and the holding becomes two pieces. FIG. As shown in FIG. 67 (b), when the game ball is won in the entrance 64 and the second holding ball (holding 2) is generated (established), it is stopped in the holding symbol display area Ds1 The fluctuation display is started in which the holding symbol of holding 1 being displayed scrolls from right to left. At the same time, the holding symbol indicating the second holding ball is displayed in the holding symbol display area Ds2, and scroll display is started from the right direction to the left direction of the holding symbol display area Ds2.

  After that, the holding symbols corresponding to the holding 1 and the holding 2 are scrolled for a predetermined time, and then the holding symbols of the holding 1 and the holding 2 are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 68 (b). In the example shown in FIG. 68 (b), two octopus symbols are aligned on the effective line H4, and a line display notifying the effective line H4 that has reached the reach is displayed on the effective line H4, and the reserved symbol display area Ds4. The word "reach" is displayed indicating that the holding symbol is in the reach state. In addition, when the symbols of Hold 1 and Hold 2 are stopped and displayed, neither line display nor characters are displayed if reach is not reached. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the notification display of characters and the like is not performed when the reach is not achieved. However, the present invention is not limited to this.

  In the case of FIG. 69 (a), when the gaming ball is further won in the entrance 64 from the state of the reach of FIG. 67 (b), the third holding ball (pending 3) is generated (established) It is a figure showing the display mode of the reservation symbol of. In the state in which the holding symbol shown in FIG. 67 (b) is reached, if the holding ball is further generated, the holding symbols of the holding 1 and holding 2 that are reaching are not displayed in a variable manner, and only the holding symbol of holding 3 Varying display. Thereafter, the reserved symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 69 (b) after passing from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. At this time, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), when the tach symbol is stopped even on the hold symbol of hold 3 on the effective line H4, the character of “chance !!” is displayed on the hold symbol display area Ds3 and the hold ball is displayed. Informing the player that the hit is included. Furthermore, since the octopus symbol is one of the special hold symbols, the player is informed that there is a probability change result that is a probability change jackpot (big hit A) while being held.

  On the other hand, when the Tako symbol does not stop on the effective line H4 as a suspension symbol on the suspension 3, it becomes a suspension symbol indicating a detachment. At that time, the characters “Sorry !!” are displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds3.

  FIG. 70 (a) is a diagram showing a suspension display mode in a state in which the suspension number is displayed with the suspension symbol in the state of the number of suspension being four. From this state, the third symbol is stopped and displayed, and then, when the variable display of the third symbol is newly started, the variable display of the third symbol for the hold 1 is started, and the hold 2 to hold 4 is hold 1 to hold Shifted to 3 At that time, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the display pattern of “Egg”, which is the holding symbol of holding 4 is changed to a broken display mode, and the holding symbol display area Ds3 is shifted from holding 4 to holding 3 The symbols are scrolled from right to left and displayed variably.

  By displaying in this way, it is possible to show the player as if each holding symbol was born from the egg. At that time, the holding symbol which has been shifted to holding 1 to holding 2 is also variably displayed. After that, after being variably displayed for a predetermined time, the stop display is performed with a combination of predetermined holding symbols (see FIG. 71A).

  FIG. 71 (b) is a diagram showing a notification symbol displayed when informing the player that the result of determination of the first holding ball is a hit or not. In this case, when the hold 1 is generated and the held symbol is variably displayed in the same manner as normal and displayed at high speed, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), the symbols of all the held symbol rows are the same symbol (for example, , Ankou symbol) is changed, and it is stopped and displayed in the state where three same symbols are displayed as it is. As described above, by displaying in a special display manner, it is possible to accurately inform the player of which holding ball will be a big hit.

  FIG. 72 (a) shows that the number of pending symbols displayed in pending 2 and pending 3 changes next, with the pending symbols being displayed with the pending symbols 1 to 3 being displayed in a stopped state, with the pending number being three. It is a figure showing a player that it is a fixed state which forbids change start, even if conditions which become a start are satisfied. As shown in FIG. 72 (a), with regard to the holding symbols displayed on paper holdings 2 and 3 with holding, the holding 2 and the holding 3 will start to be changed and then the third symbol will start to be changed and displayed. In the case of the reach display mode when shifting to 1 and hold 2, the change is prohibited and the display mode as it is is maintained.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the variation of the third symbol corresponding to hold 1 is started, and the symbols of hold 2 and hold 3 are shifted to hold 1 and hold 2. After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the characters “reach !!” are displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds3.

  FIG. 73 (a) is a view showing a display mode of the holding symbol displayed when the gaming ball newly wins the ball entry port 64 while the holding symbol is variably displayed. FIG. 73 (a) shows a case where hold 3 is established while the hold 1 and the hold 2 are fluctuatingly displayed. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 73 (a), the reserved symbol of the egg is displayed as the reserved symbol of the reserved 3 in the reserved symbol display area Ds3. As described above, when the holding ball is established during the fluctuation display of the holding symbol, the fluctuation display of the holding symbol to the new holding ball is not performed, and the egg indicating that the fluctuation display of the holding symbol is on standby The hold symbol is displayed. Thereafter, after the fluctuation display of the holding symbols of the holding 1 and the holding 2 is stopped and displayed, the egg is broken, and the holding symbols are displayed by being changed from among them. At that time, if the holding symbols of holding 1 and holding 2 are not reach-displayed either, they are displayed in a variable manner.

  Thus, in this embodiment, it was comprised so that it would alert | report about the success / failure determination result in pending | holding by pending | holding symbol. Therefore, the player can enjoy not only the variation display mode of the third symbol but also the display mode of the hold symbol. Further, since the holding symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, the more the number of holding balls is increased, the more the effect of the holding symbol is, and the player may feel that he wants to hold more holding balls. it can. Therefore, more game balls can be consumed by the player.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 According to Fourth Embodiment
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 79. In addition, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted about the structure same as 1st Embodiment.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Audio Lamp Controller 113 in Fourth Embodiment
The electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77. FIG. The RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment has a winning information storage area 223i, a hold information storage area 223 j, and a hold status with respect to the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. A flag 223k, a pending reach flag 223m, a pending hold flag 223n, and a fluctuation time counter 223p are respectively added. The winning information storage area 223i has the same configuration as that described above in the third embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the holding ball is established, the holding information storage area 223 j is a storage area where information on the holding symbol is selected and information on the holding symbol is stored. In the holding information storage area 223j, storage areas are set for the holding balls (holding 1 to holding 4). Then, when the holding ball is digested (the variation of the third symbol corresponding to the holding ball is started), each data stored in the holding information storage area 223 j is also shifted to the storage area corresponding to the number of holdings one before Ru.

  The suspension hit flag 223m is a flag indicating that the suspension symbol is displayed on any of the valid lines H1 to H5 and the suspension symbol (the same suspension symbol is displayed side by side) is displayed. The per-hold flag 223 m is set to on based on the display being set with the per-hold symbol, and is then set to off when the hold is digested and is not displayed with the per-hold symbol.

  The holding reach flag 223 m is a flag indicating that the displayed holding symbol is displayed in the reach display mode. The holding reach flag is set to on based on the fact that the stop display in the reach display mode is determined when the holding symbols of holding 1 and holding 2 are to be variably displayed. After that, the reserve is digested or the reserve symbol of the reserve 3 is displayed in a variable manner, and it is set to be off when it becomes an outright reserve symbol (the same reserve symbol is not aligned on the activated line).

  The hold hold flag 223 n is a flag indicating that the variable display of the held symbol being displayed is in a maintenance state in which the fluctuation display is prohibited. The hold hold flag 223n is a flag that can be individually set for each of the hold 1 to hold 3, and is configured to be capable of determining which hold symbol fluctuation display is prohibited. The hold flag 223n is set to ON when it is determined that the hold state for inhibiting the fluctuation display of the held symbol being displayed is determined, and the hold for which the hold flag is targeted is digested, or reach It will be set to off when it comes to the state.

  The fluctuation time counter 223p is a counter for measuring the fluctuation display time of the third symbol. The variation pattern of the third symbol is determined, and the variation time indicated by the variation pattern is set in the variation time counter 223p. The fluctuation time counter 223p is updated based on the passage of fluctuation time. The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the remaining fluctuation time of the third symbol during fluctuation from the fluctuation time counter 223p. In the present embodiment, when the hold is established, the fluctuation time of the held symbol is also determined based on the remaining time of the third symbol, so in this case, the remaining fluctuation from the fluctuation time counter 223p The time is determined.

  With reference to FIG. 76, the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. The ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment compares the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the first embodiment with a sub variation pattern table 222f, a hold reach lottery table 222g, and reach hold selection. Each table 222h is added. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted. The sub variation pattern table 222f has the same configuration as that described in the third embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The on-hold reach lottery table 222g is a data table shown in FIG. 77 (a). The hold reach lottery table 222g (see FIG. 77 (a)) displays the stop display mode of the hold symbol based on the value of the effect counter 223f, in any one of the reach display mode, the hold display mode, and the out-of-display mode. It is a data table for deciding whether to When the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223i, the reach display mode and the hold display mode are more easily selected (the probability of being selected is higher) than when the winning information is not stored. It is set to

  By configuring in this way, the player can be made to expect that there will be a hold that will be hit in the hold by the display mode of the holding symbol being displayed in the reach display mode or the hold display mode. . Therefore, the player can give an interest in the display mode of the holding symbol, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early in the game.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (b), the reach-hold selection table 222h is a selection for determining the type of the hold symbol to be displayed in the reach state on the effective line H4 or H5 when the hold symbol is displayed in the reach display mode. It is a table.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device 114 in Fourth Embodiment
The electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 79. In the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 in the fourth embodiment, a hold variation display data selection table 234a5 is added to the NAND flash memory 234a of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment. It is done. Further, in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in the fourth embodiment, a selection counter 233 m is added to the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as the configuration of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the holding variation display data selection table 234a4 is a selection table for selecting the variation pattern of the holding symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the selection counter 233m. In addition, each change pattern is a hit notification, a release notification, a change hold symbol (hold symbol of hold 1 to hold 3) indicated by the display hold fluctuation pattern received from the audio lamp control device 113, a change content (reach display mode, According to the information on the hold display mode) and the fluctuation time (3 seconds fluctuation, 5 seconds fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern can be selected. The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 selects the hold display data table based on the fluctuation pattern selected from the hold fluctuation display data selection table 234a4, and sets it in the display data table buffer. The pending display data table is set (stored) in the pending change display data selection table 234a4.

  The selection counter 233m is counted in the range of 0 to 199, and is used when selecting the hold fluctuation pattern from the hold fluctuation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 10C). In an initial state such as power-on, the initial value is counted from 0, and when it is counted up to 199, the initial value is updated to 0. In the present embodiment, although illustration is omitted, each selection processing of the selection counter 233m is performed after the processing of S1806 of the main processing (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is performed. During the waiting time until execution, it is repeatedly updated one by one.

Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller 110 in Fourth Embodiment
Control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The control process executed by the main control unit 110 in the fourth embodiment is the start winning process (see FIG. 17) in the timer interrupt process (as opposed to the control process executed by the main control process 110 in the first embodiment). FIG. 20, S105) is changed to the start winning process 2 (FIG. 60, S115). Since the start winning process 2 (FIG. 60, S115) is the same process as that already described in the third embodiment, the detailed description will be omitted. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

<About control processing of voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 to 90, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described.

  The main processing (see FIG. 81) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The main process (see FIG. 81) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment is different from the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. The pending number display update process (FIG. 34, S1306) is for the pending number display update process 2 (FIG. 90, S1360), and the command determination process (FIG. 28, S1311) is for the command determination process 4 (FIG. 82, S170). has been changed. In addition, a reserved symbol display process (FIG. 84, S1380) is added. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted. The command determination process 4 (FIG. 82, S1370) and the holding symbol display process (FIG. 84, S1380) will be described first, and then the number-of-holds display updating process 2 (FIG. 90, S1360) will be described.

  The command determination processing 4 (S1370) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 4 (S1370). The command determination process 4 (FIG. 82, S1370) in the fourth embodiment differs from the command determination process (FIG. 28, S1311) in the first embodiment in the pending display update process (FIG. 29, S1404). It is changed to the process 3 (FIG. 83, S1470), and each process to S1417-S1418 is added. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, pending display update process 3 (S1470) which is one process in the command determination process 4 (FIG. 82, S1370) will be described. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing the pending number display updating process 3 (S1470).

  In the pending display update process 3 (FIG. 83, S1470), first, each data of the pending symbol storage area 223e is shifted to a storage area corresponding to the number of pending balls immediately before (S1420). Each data in the pending information storage area 223 j is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the number of pending balls immediately before (S 1472). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received is set in the fluctuation time counter 223p (S1473).

  Referring back to FIG. 82, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1408 of the command determination process 4 (FIG. 82, S1370) that the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S1408: No), the process of S1417 is executed. In the process of S1417, it is judged whether or not the winning command is received from the main control device 110 (S1417). If it is determined in the process of S1417 that a winning command has been received (S1417: Yes), the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223i and the hold information storage area 223j based on the received command. It is stored in the area corresponding to the number of holding balls (S1418).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, a reserved symbol display process (S1380) which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 81) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. . FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the held symbol display process (S1380).

  In the reserved symbol display process (FIG. 84, S1380), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is in progress (S1381). Although illustration is omitted about determination of whether or not the jackpot game is in progress, the jackpot start command (opening command) is received from the main control device 110, and then the ending command indicating the end of the jackpot is received. It is determined by By setting the flag on based on the reception of the opening command and setting the jackpot determination flag on which the flag is set off based on the reception of the ending command, the determination can be easily made.

  If it is determined in the process of S1381 that a jackpot game is being played (S1381: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S1381: No), it is determined whether or not the holding symbol is variably displayed (S1382). If it is determined that the holding symbol is changing (S1382: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reserved symbol is being stopped (S1382: No), it is determined whether the remaining variation time of the third symbol being varied is 5 seconds or less (S1383). The determination of the remaining fluctuation time is executed by determining the value of the fluctuation time counter 223p.

  If it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 5 seconds or less (S1383: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is longer than 5 seconds (S1383: No), it is judged whether or not there is a held symbol data before fluctuation in the holding information storage area 223j (S1384). Although it is not shown in the figure, it is not shown that the pending fluctuation data set in the area corresponding to the number of pending balls in the pending information storage area 223j is on. It is determined by whether it is set. This pending change completion flag is set to ON when the process of S1385 is executed. Then, as for the pending change flag, when the stored data is shifted, the pending change flag of the area is set to OFF, and the shifted previous pending change flag is set to ON. Thus, after all the holds have been digested, the hold variation flag for all areas is set to off.

  If it is determined in the process of S1384 that there is no pre-variation data in the hold information storage area 223j (S1384: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is data before fluctuation (S1384: Yes), a display hold fluctuation start command corresponding to the corresponding hold before fluctuation is set (S1385).

  Each data of the pending information storage area 223j is shifted (S1386), and a pending change start process is executed (S1387).

  This suspension change start processing (S1387) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this suspension change start process (S1387).

  In the suspension change start process (FIG. 85, S1387), first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired. It is determined whether the on-hold reach flag 223m is set (S1512). If it is determined that the on-hold reach flag 223m is on (S1512: Yes), reach on-hold display processing is executed (S1513).

  The reach hold display process (S1513) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the reach hold display process (S1513). In the reach hold display process (S1513 in FIG. 86), first, it is determined whether or not the winning information indicating a hit in the winning information storage area 223j is stored (set) (S1531). That is, it is determined whether there is a hold to be hit. When it is determined that there is a hit to be held (S1531: Yes), a held symbol lottery is executed from the held symbol lottery table 222b (see FIG. 11 (b)) based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. (S1532).

  It is determined whether the lottery result in S1532 is a hit display (S1534). If it is determined that the lottery result is a hit display that causes the hit symbol to be displayed and displayed on the activated line with the hit symbol (S1534), the hit symbol corresponding to the reach hold symbol is held symbol corresponding to the activated 3 line Are set in the reserved symbol storage area 223e (S1535). Thereafter, the process of S1537 is performed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1534, even if it is determined that the lottery result is out of display or hit display, if the hit symbol type of hit does not correspond to the reach hold symbol type (S1534: No), the process of S1536 Is executed. In the process of S1536, the holding symbol set to -1 from the holding symbol of the reach holding symbol is set in the holding symbol storage area 223e as the holding symbol on the activated line of the holding 3 that is the reach (S1536) . Thereafter, the process of S1537 is performed.

  In the present embodiment, since the reserved symbol is displayed in a symbol row, by setting the stop position (one of X1 to X3) of one reserved symbol, the reserved symbol displayed in another display position is also automatically Setting (decision). In the process of S1537, it is determined based on the value of the fluctuation time counter 223p whether the remaining fluctuation time of the third symbol during fluctuation is 7 seconds or more (S1537).

  In the process of S1537, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 7 seconds or more (S1537: Yes), the reach length holding fluctuation pattern based on the holding symbol of holding 3 set in the holding symbol storage area 223e Is set (S1538). On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is less than 7 seconds (S1538: No), the reach short holding fluctuation pattern is set based on the holding symbol of holding 3 set in the holding symbol storage area 223e. (S1539). After the processes of S1538 and S1539 are performed, this process ends.

  In addition, the reach length suspension change pattern and reach short suspension change pattern set in the process of S1538 and S1539 are out of being displayed as a suspension suspension pattern or whether a suspension symbol is a hit suspension variation pattern displayed by a hit suspension symbol. It can be determined whether it is a hold change pattern. In addition, a holding symbol (in the present embodiment, a holding symbol of holding 3) corresponding to the number of holding balls to be variably displayed is configured to be distinguishable.

  As described above, when the holding symbol is displayed in the reach state (the holding symbol of the holding symbol of holding 1 and holding 2 is the same holding symbol being displayed on the effective line H4 or H5, the holding symbol of the holding 3 changes) When started, only the hold 3 is set to be displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, while maintaining the reach state, the player can play a game expecting whether or not the hit holding symbol will be established (displayed). In addition, when it is displayed in the off-hold symbol, it is configured to stop display in the-1-frame hold symbol from the combination to be a hit-hold symbol, even when the player is stopped in the off-hold symbol, It is possible to play a game expecting to be just before the stop if it becomes a hit holding symbol.

  Returning to FIG. 85, the description will be continued. After the reach hold display process (FIG. 86, S1513) is performed, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1512, when it is determined that the holding reach flag 223m is off, that is, the holding symbols of holding 1 and holding 2 are not displayed as reach holding symbols (S1512: No), change start It is determined whether or not the holding symbol that triggered the event is a holding symbol of the holding 3 (S1514). In the process of S1514, when it is determined that the holding symbol that triggered the start of the change is the holding symbol of holding 3 (S1514: Yes), whether the holding per capita flag 223k is on, ie, already holding It is determined whether the symbol is displayed as a hit symbol on any of the activated lines (S1515). If it is determined that the suspension hit flag 223m is off (S1515: Yes), based on the value of the effect counter 223f, select the symbol to be stopped and displayed at the display position X1 of suspension 3 from the loss suspension symbol selection table 222e Are set in the corresponding hold symbol storage area 223e, and the hold 1 to 3 offset length hold fluctuation pattern and the hold 1 to 3 offset short hold fluctuation pattern are set based on the remaining fluctuation time (S1516). After the process of S1516 is performed, the process of S1517 is performed.

  In addition, although illustration is omitted, the outlier reserve symbol selection table 222e in the fourth embodiment is the reserve 1 to 3 corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223f with respect to the reserve symbol selection table 222e in the first embodiment. The difference is that a symbol to be stopped and displayed is set at the display position X1 of. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily select a holding symbol of an outset to be displayed randomly.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, if the remaining fluctuation time of the third symbol is 7 seconds or more, the long holding fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation time 5 seconds) is selected, and if the remaining fluctuation time is less than 7 seconds, the short holding fluctuation pattern (Variation time 3 seconds) is selected.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1515 that the hit-to-hold flag 223k is off (S1515: No), the hold 3 display process is executed (S1517). The hold 3 display process (S1517) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the hold 3 display process. In the pending 3 display process (FIG. 87, S1517), a process regarding determination of a pending change pattern of a pending symbol that is started when the pending of the pending 3 is established is executed.

  In the hold 3 display process (FIG. 87, S1517), first, it is determined whether or not winning winning information (holding of win) is set in the winning information storage area 223i (S1541). If it is determined that the winning information is set in the winning information storage area 223i (S1541: Yes), based on the obtained design counter 223f, based on the holding symbol lottery table 222b (see FIG. 11 (b)) A reserved symbol lottery is executed (S1542). It is determined whether the lottery result executed in S1542 is a hit display for displaying a hit holding symbol (S1543).

  If it is determined that the lottery result is a hit display (S1543: Yes), the hit-to-hold flag 223k is set to ON (S1544). Thereafter, based on the obtained effect counter 223f, a hit symbol is selected from the held symbol selection table 222d (see FIG. 12A), and the hit symbol storage area 223e is hit and set as a held symbol (S1545). Based on the remaining fluctuation time, a hit reach short hold fluctuation pattern or a hit reach length hold fluctuation pattern indicating the hit holding symbol set in the process of S1545 is set (S1546).

  In the present embodiment, since the determination of the effective line H4 or H5 on which the reach display of the holding symbol is displayed is performed by the display control device 114, the holding fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 is The type of display mode (per reach reach change), the per hold pattern, the change time, etc. can be determined from the command. The reserved symbol displayed on the actual third symbol display device 81 is determined by the effective line for displaying the hit reserved symbol determined by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1541 that the winning information to be hit is not set in the winning information storage area 223i (S1541: No), or in the process of S1543, it is determined that the lottery result of S1542 is out of display If it has been (S1543: No), the processing of S1547 is executed. In the process of S1547, based on the acquired effect counter 223f, a hold reach lottery is performed to determine the type (reach, hold, or drop) of the off hold fluctuation pattern from the hold reach lottery table 222g.

  Here, three types of reach, hold, and release are set as the type of the out-of-hold fluctuation pattern. The display mode of reach is a hold symbol of hold 1 and hold 2, and after the same hold symbol is displayed on the activated line H4 or H5 in a stopped state to be in the reach display state, the hold symbol of hold 3 has become reach This is a display mode in which a reserved symbol different from the symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

  The display mode of the hold is a display mode in which the hold 1 is stopped and displayed, the hold symbol of the hold 2 and the hold 3 is stopped and the same hold symbol is displayed on the activated line H4 or H5, and the stop is displayed in the lost hold symbol. The display mode of out of alignment is a display mode in which stop display is performed in a combination in which the same reserved symbol is not displayed side by side continuously in the activated line H4 or H5.

  It is determined whether the lottery result executed in S1547 is reach (S1548). If it is determined that the lottery result is a reach (S1548: Yes), the reach holding symbol is selected from the reach holding symbol selection table 222h based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired, and the corresponding holding symbol is selected. The storage area 223e is set out as the reach symbol (S1550). Based on the remaining fluctuation time, an outreach length holding fluctuation pattern and an outlier short holding fluctuation pattern indicating the set out-of-hold symbols are selected (S1551).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1548 that the lottery result of S1547 is not reach (S1548: No), it is determined whether the lottery result of S1547 is hold (S1552). If it is determined that the lottery result is hold (S1552: Yes), the hold flag 223n is set to ON (S1553). Based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired, the normal retention symbol is selected from the retention symbol selection table 222d (see FIG. 12A) (S1554).

  Based on the remaining fluctuation time, the out-of-hold length holding fluctuation pattern or out-of-hold short holding fluctuation pattern indicating the symbol selected in the process of S1554 is set. When it is determined that the lottery result is not the hold (S1552: No), the process of S1556 is executed. In the process of S1556, the out-of-order holding symbol to be displayed on the display position X1 of the first to third holding is determined from the out-of-hold holding symbol selection table 222e based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f (S1557). Thereafter, this process ends.

  In addition, although illustration is omitted, the outlier reserve symbol selection table 222e in the fourth embodiment is the reserve 1 to 3 corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223f with respect to the reserve symbol selection table 222e in the first embodiment. The difference is that a symbol to be stopped and displayed is set at the display position X1 of. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily select a holding symbol of an outset to be displayed randomly.

  Returning to FIG. 85, the description will be continued. After the hold 3 display process (FIG. 87, S1517) is executed, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1514, when it is determined that the trigger for becoming the fluctuation start of the holding symbol is not the establishment of the holding 3 (S1514: No), the trigger for the fluctuation start of the holding symbol is It is determined whether the hold 2 is established (S1518). If it is determined that the start of fluctuation of the holding symbol is the fact that holding 2 is established (S1518: Yes), the holding 2 display process is executed (S1519). The hold 2 display process (S1519) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the hold 2 display process (S1519). In the holding 2 display process (FIG. 88, S1519), processing relating to the fluctuation of the holding symbol whose fluctuation is started is executed based on the holding 2 being established.

  In the hold 2 display process (FIG. 88, S1519), first, it is determined whether the hold per cap flag 223k is off, that is, whether the hit design is not displayed in the hold 1 effective line H1 (S1561). If it is determined that the hit winning flag 223k is off (S1561: Yes), it is determined whether or not hit winning information is set in the win information storage area 223i (whether there is a hit hold) (S1562). If it is determined that the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223i (S1562: Yes), based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired, refer to the reservation symbol lottery table 222b (see FIG. 11 (b) ) The hold symbol lottery is executed (S1563).

  If it is determined that the lottery result executed in the process of S1563 is a hit display (S1564: Yes), the with-hold flag 223k is set to ON (S1565). With respect to the suspension of winning, based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired, select the winning reservation symbol from the holding symbol selection table 222d (see FIG. 12 (a)), and set it in the corresponding storage area 223e ( S1566). In this case, the held symbol selected at the display positions X1 to X3 is set. In the present embodiment, in the case where the winning combination information in which both the hold 1 and the hold 2 are successful is stored, the hold symbol is set and the hold symbol is set. In this way, priority is given to holding with an earlier hold order.

  With respect to the other hold (in the present embodiment, hold 1 or hold 2), it is stopped at the display position X1 of hold 1 or hold 2 from the out-of-hold hold symbol selection table 222e based on the acquired value of effect counter 223f. The off holding symbol is selected and set in the holding symbol storage area 223e (S1567). Based on the set holding pattern, a long fluctuation pattern per holding 1-2 or a short fluctuation pattern per holding 1-2 corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time is set (S1568). In addition, as for this command, the holding symbol of each holding, the variable holding symbol (in this embodiment, holding 1-2), etc. are comprised so that identification is possible.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1561 that the hit-to-hold flag 223k is on (S1561: No), the hold symbol to be displayed on the display position X1 of the hold 2 is stopped based on the value of the effect counter 223f. , And is selected from the reserve symbol selection table 222e and set in the corresponding reserve symbol storage area 223e (S1569). A long hold fluctuation pattern or a short hold fluctuation pattern per hold 1-2 corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time is set based on the hold symbol of each hold set (S1570).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1562, if a hold is not stored in the winning information storage area 223i (S1562: No), or if it is determined in the process of S1564 that the lottery result in S1563 is out of display ( The process of S1564: No) and S1571 is performed. In the process of S1571, a pending symbol is displayed on the display position X1 of each pending (pending 1 to 2) from the outright pending symbol selection table 222e based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f for the pending 1 to 2 Is selected and set in the corresponding reserved symbol storage area 223e (S1571). On the basis of the holding symbols set for each hold, a hold 1-2 out-of-length hold fluctuation pattern or a hold 1-2 short-out short hold fluctuation pattern is selected corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time (S 1572). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 85, the description will be continued. After the hold 2 display process (FIG. 88, S1519) is executed, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1518, when it is determined that the trigger for becoming the fluctuation start of the suspension symbol is that the suspension 1 is established (S1518: No), the suspension 1 display process is executed (S1520) . The hold 1 display process (S1520) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the suspension 1 display process (S1520). In the hold 1 display process (FIG. 89, S 1520), a process regarding fluctuation of the hold symbol executed upon the hold 1 being established is executed.

  In the hold 1 display process (FIG. 89, S 1520), first, it is determined whether or not winning information to be a hit is set in the winning information storage area 223i, that is, hold 1 is a hold to be a hit (S 1520). If it is determined that the winning information storage area 223i is on hold (S1581: Yes), the holding symbol lottery is executed from the holding symbol lottery table 222b based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f (S1582 ). It is determined whether the lottery result executed in S1582 is a hit display (S1583). If it is determined that the lottery result is a hit display (S 1583: Yes), the per-hold flag 223 k is set to ON (S 1584). With respect to holding 1, a holding symbol is selected from holding symbol selection table 222d (see FIG. 12A) based on the acquired value of effect counter 223f, and is set in corresponding holding symbol storage area 223e (S1585). ). A long hold change pattern per hold or a short hold change pattern per hold is set corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time based on the set hold symbol (S1586).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1581, when it is determined that the winning information to be hit is not set in the winning information storage area 223i, that is, it is determined that the hold 1 is removed (S1581: No), or in the process of S1583, S1582. If it is determined that the result of the lottery is out of display (S1583: No), the process of S1587 is executed. In the process of S1587, the holding symbol to be displayed on the display position X1 of the holding 1 in a stopped state is selected from the out-of-hold holding symbol selection table 222e based on the value of the effect counter 223f and is set in the holding symbol storage area 223e (S1587). Thereafter, based on the set holding pattern of hold 1, the hold 1 off length hold fluctuation pattern or the hold 1 off short hold fluctuation pattern corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time is set (S 1588).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 90, pending number display update processing 2 (S1360) which is one of main processing (see FIG. 81) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. explain. FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing the pending number display updating process 2 (S1360).

  In the number-of-holds display update process 2 (FIG. 90, S1360), first, it is determined whether there is information before the change of the hold symbol in the hold information storage area 223j (S1741). If it is determined that there is information before the change (S1741: Yes), the notification pattern before the change is set for the suspension before the change, and the notification pattern before the change is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 A display pre-variation notification symbol command for display is set (S1742). Thereafter, the process of S1733 is performed. Here, as the notification symbol before change, the symbol of the egg is displayed as shown in the reserved symbol display area Ds3 of FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the information before change is not set in the hold information storage area 223j (S1741: No), the processing of S1743 is executed. In the process of S1743, it is determined whether the hold change pattern is set (S1743). If it is determined that the hold fluctuation pattern is set (S1743: Yes), a display hold fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the set hold fluctuation pattern is set (S1744). On the other hand, when it is determined that the suspension fluctuation pattern is not set (S1743: No), this process ends.

Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device 114 in Fourth Embodiment
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fourth embodiment is a command determination process (FIG. 39, S2102) with respect to the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment. Is changed to command determination processing 3. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The command determination processing 3 (S2120) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 3 (S2120). The command determination process 3 (FIG. 91, S2120) in the fourth embodiment is the same as the command determination process (FIG. 39, S2102) in the first embodiment except that each process from S2208 to S2209 is deleted. Each process has been added. The other processes are the same as the processes of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  If it is determined in the process of S2206 that the display stop type command has not been received (S2206: No), it is determined whether the display hold variation pattern command has been received (S2212). If it is determined that the display holding variation pattern command is received (S2212: Yes), the holding variation pattern command process is executed (S2213). The holding variation pattern command process (S2213) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing this suspension change pattern command processing (S2213). In the hold variation pattern command process (S2213), first, the value of the selection counter 233m is acquired (S2311). Thereafter, based on the received hold variation pattern command, it is determined whether it is necessary to select a valid line (S2312). Here, when the received holding fluctuation pattern command is outreach or falling holding, the holding fluctuation pattern command in which the hit holding design is shown, the display of the hit holding design is shown in any of the valid lines H1 to H3 If not, it is determined that the selection of the valid line H4 or H5 is necessary. Further, in the present embodiment, although the determination is made as described above, the invention is not limited thereto, but in the case where the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 generates the hold variation pattern command, the one requiring the selection of the valid line H4 or H5 May be configured to set an identification code (for example, setting a specific bit of a command to “1”). With this configuration, it is possible to easily determine whether it is necessary to select the effective line H4 or H5. Further, in the present embodiment, the effective line H4 or H5 is selected by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. However, the effective line H4 or H5 is determined by the process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. , And may be configured to generate a pending change pattern command based thereon.

  In the process of S2312, when it is determined that the selection of the effective line H4 or H5 is necessary (S2312: Yes), the symbol shown by the hold fluctuation pattern command is displayed from the hold fluctuation display data selection table 234a5 (see FIG. 79) The hold fluctuation pattern is selected based on the line (hold 1 to hold 3) and the value of the selection counter 233m, and the hold fluctuation display data table is selected (S2313). Thereafter, the process of S2315 is performed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2312, when it is determined that the selection of the valid line H4 or H5 is not necessary (S2312: No), the received change pattern command is a hold symbol corresponding to the received change pattern command. The set holding fluctuation pattern is selected, and the holding fluctuation display data table is selected (S2314). Thereafter, the process of S2315 is performed.

  In the process of S2315, the pending change display data table selected in the process of S2313 and S2314 is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2315). A rolling data table corresponding to the set pending change display data table is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Based on the data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h. The pointer 233 f is initialized and set (S 2318).

  As described above, in the hold variation pattern command processing (S2213), it is determined whether the selection of the valid line H4 or H5 is necessary based on the hold variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113, if necessary. The selection is performed. Thereby, the holding symbol to be displayed on the display position X1 of each holding is determined. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the impediment to control of the process of determining the holding symbol of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the third symbol is shortened and the efficiency of the game is improved, the time for displaying the notice effects etc. using the third symbol is shortened, resulting in a monotonous game. There is. However, with the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the advance notice effect of notifying the result of the determination of the success or failure of the third symbol to be displayed in a variable manner, using the time when the reserved symbol is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the trouble that the player is bored.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a configuration is described in which the combination judgment of the holding symbols displayed on the valid lines H1 to H5 set in the holding 1 to 3 gives notification about the pass / fail judgment of the third symbol during fluctuation. . On the other hand, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the valid lines H1 to H5 are set for holding 1 to 3 and the valid lines H1 to H5 are set for holding 2 to 4 The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the process of switching the setting of the valid line is executed. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

<About the display mode of the retention symbol in the fifth embodiment>
The display aspect of the holding symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 94. Drawing 93 (a) is a mimetic diagram showing the case where effective lines H1-H5 were set to a reservation design of reservations 1-3. A valid line notification display YL indicating a valid line is displayed across the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds3 of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81.

  Drawing 93 (b) is a mimetic diagram showing the case where effective lines H1-H5 were set to a reservation design of reservations 2-4. An effective line notification display YL indicating an effective line is displayed across the reserved symbol display areas Ds2 to Ds4 of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81.

  Thus, the player can be notified of the effective line in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, since the pay line is changed, the player can watch the holding symbol outside the pay line with caution, and can further increase the interest in the game. Also, when the hit symbols are aligned and displayed outside the effective line, the player can play a game expecting that the effective line is not changed.

  FIG. 94 (a) shows the display mode in the case where the number of pending is 2 and the valid line is set across the pending 1 to the pending 3. Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), the display mode is shown in the case where the number of holding balls is three and the valid line is changed to holdings 2 to 4. Here, when the holding symbol of holding 3 is displayed, two holding symbols of the turtle are displayed in an aligned reach state on the effective line H4 changed to holding 2 to 4. As described above, in the case of the valid lines in the case of the hold 1 to the hold 3, even when the reach display mode is not obtained, the reach line can be set by changing the valid line. In addition, the change of an effective line is performed by lottery regardless of the previous timing, after a holding symbol is displayed. Therefore, if the pay line is changed after the hold symbol is displayed in the reach display mode or the hit hold pattern display mode outside the pay line, the player strongly expects that the pay line is not changed. You can enjoy the game more by being changed as it is. In addition, if the change of the effective line is executed before the reserved symbol is displayed, the game is expected in anticipation that the held symbol and the reach display mode will be established on the effective line. It can be carried out.

Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller 110 in Fifth Embodiment
The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the fifth embodiment is the same as that described in the third embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

Regarding Control Processing of Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in Fifth Embodiment
The control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing (see FIG. 95) in the fifth embodiment is the same as the main processing (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment, but the pending number display updating process (FIG. 34, S1306) is the pending number display updating process 3 (see FIG. In FIG. 98 (b) and S1750, the command determination process (FIG. 28, S1311) is changed to the command determination process 5 (FIG. 96, S1490). The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the command determination processing 5 (S1490) which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 95) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 5 (S1490). In the command determination process 5 (FIG. 96, S1490) in the fifth embodiment, with respect to the command determination process (FIG. 28, S1311) in the first embodiment, the pending display update process (FIG. 29, S1404) is pending display update The process is changed to process 4 (FIG. 98A, S1480), the process of S1413 is deleted, and the processes of S1415 and S1580 are added. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, winning command reception processing 2 (S1660) executed when it is determined that a winning command has been received in the process of S1415 (S1415: Yes) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing this winning command reception process 2 (S1660).

  In the winning command reception process 2 (FIG. 97, S1660), first, the value of the effect counter 223f is obtained (S1661). It is determined whether the received winning command is a winning command (S1662). If it is determined that the received prize command is a hit prize command (S1662: Yes), the reserved symbol is drawn from the held symbol lottery table 222b (see FIG. 11 (b)) based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired. A lottery is executed (S1663).

  It is determined whether the lottery result in the process of S1663 is a hit display (S1664). If it is determined that the lottery result is a hit display (S1664: Yes), is it possible to display a hit holding symbol corresponding to the symbol type (big hit A, big hit B) of the pass / fail judgment on the valid line H4 or H5? It is determined (S1665). If it is determined that the display can not be made on the activated line H4 or H5 (S1665: No), the reserved symbol corresponding to the symbol (jackpot A or jackpot B) of the pass / fail judgment based on the value of the effect counter 223f A symbol is selected from the reserved symbol selection table 222d (see FIG. 12A), and is set in the corresponding reserved symbol storage area 223e (S1666).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1665 that the hit line H4 or H5 can hit the formation of the hold symbol (S1665: Yes), the same symbol as the hold symbol displayed on the check line H4 or H5 is displayed. Set as a holding symbol of the display position corresponding to the effective line H4 or H5, and set the holding symbol of the other display position based on the value of the effect counter 223f, selected from the out-of-hold holding symbol selection table 222e and corresponding holding symbol storage area It is set to 223e.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1664, when it is determined that the lottery result in S1663 is the disappointing display (S1664: No), the holding symbol can be set to the reach display mode by changing the valid line It is determined whether there is any (S1668). If it is determined that the reach display mode can be set (S1668: Yes), the hold symbol to be the reach display mode is selected, and the hold symbol displayed at the other display position is the effect counter 223 f Based on the value, the holding symbol is selected from the out-of-hold holding symbol selection table 222e and set in the corresponding holding symbol storage area 223e (S1669). The change of the effective line is set, and the display effective line setting command is set (S1670).

  As described above, even if the winning command is received, if the out-of-order indication is determined by lottery, the valid line is changed to either one as shown in FIG. 93 (a) or 93 (b). When the reach display mode of the holding symbol can be set, the setting is executed. Therefore, by changing the effective line, the player can determine early whether there is a hit or not judgment result in the holding ball, and has a sense of expectation for a larger jackpot. Can play a game.

  In addition, when the variation time of the third symbol is shortened (for example, 1 second) and the game time can be shortened, there is no advance notice to the jackpot, time to produce effects, and a monotonous game. Although it becomes a sex, by adopting the configuration as in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute an advance notice effect that makes a big hit expect with the reserved symbol, using the reserved time. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game until the jackpot.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the winning prize command is received, the change of the valid line is set, but not limited thereto, the valid line is changed by lottery also when the losing prize command is received. May be This makes it possible to change the effective line in various ways, and to change the effective line, thereby preventing the player from getting bored with the game.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1662, when the off winning symbol command is received (S1662: No), in the process of S1668, when it is determined that the reach display mode can not be obtained even if the effective line is changed. (S1668: No), based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired, the holding symbol is selected from the out-of-hold holding symbol selection table 222e (see FIG. 12 (b)) and is set in the corresponding holding symbol storage area 223e S1671).

  Returning to FIG. 96, the description will be continued. After the process of S1403 is executed, the pending display update process 4 is executed (S1480). The pending display update process 4 (S1480) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 98 (a). FIG. 98 (a) is a flowchart showing the pending display update process 4 (S1480). In the pending display update process 4 (FIG. 98 (a), S1480), the data of each pending symbol storage area is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the number of pending balls one by one (S1421). Thereafter, this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98 (b), pending number display update process 3 (one process in the main process (see FIG. 95) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment. S1750) will be described. FIG. 98 (b) is a flowchart showing the pending number display update process 3 (S1750).

  In the number-of-helds display update process 3 (FIG. 98 (b), S1750), first, it is determined whether there is a change in the held design (S1750). Although the illustration has been omitted, it is executed by determining the change flag set in the holding symbol storage area 223e whether or not the holding symbol has been changed. In addition, a change flag is set to ON, when a holding symbol is newly memorize | stored in holding symbol storage area 223e, or when it is shifted from another area (at the time of holding arrangement | positioning). On the other hand, after the change flag is determined in the process of S1751, it is set to OFF.

  In the process of S175, when it is determined that there is a change to the holding symbol (S1751: Yes), the holding symbol command for display is set based on the holding symbol data set in the holding symbol storage area 223e ( S1752).

  Next, a modified example of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the modification of the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99 (a), five holding symbols are displayed for one holding symbol. Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (a), the valid line range YL is set across the hold symbols of hold 1 to hold 3, and furthermore, the second to fourth hold symbols fall within the valid line range YL. It is set. In this case, among the valid lines H1 to H5 set in the valid line range YL, there is no combination as a hit design, a combination as a reach display mode, or the like. However, the octopus symbol displayed at the right end of the reserve display area Ds1, the octopus symbol displayed fourth from the left of the reserve display area Ds2, and the octopus symbol displayed third from the left of the reserve display area Ds3 And, the same octopus pattern is displayed side by side three diagonally. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), the effective line range YL is moved to the right by one reserved symbol and set, whereby the taco symbol hits on the effective line H4 and is a reserved symbol. It will be displayed. Therefore, the player can expect that the effective line range YL is not set to the right by one. Therefore, the player can have an interest other than the display mode of the third symbol, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored more with the game.

  In addition, when the effective line range YL is changed, as a precursor operation thereof, a display mode indicating the effective line range YL slightly displays a display mode moving and moving. In addition, there is also a case where only the precursor operation is performed and the change of the effective line range YL is not performed. With this configuration, the player can be entertained by the operation of the effective line range YL. In addition, by moving the effective line range YL, the player's attention can be directed not only to the reserved symbol on the effective line but also to the reserved symbol displayed on the other display position.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the third symbol is shortened and the efficiency of the game is improved, the time for displaying the notice effects etc. using the third symbol is shortened, resulting in a monotonous game. There is. However, with the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the advance notice effect of notifying the result of the determination of the success or failure of the third symbol to be displayed in a variable manner, using the time when the reserved symbol is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the trouble that the player is bored.

  In addition, although it was comprised so that effective line range YL might be changed in this embodiment, it determines not only it but some pending from the pending number, and the combination of the held design displayed with respect to the pending By means of this, it may be configured to notify the judgment of whether the change is in progress or the pending one. Further, before holding is established, some of the holdings that become valid may be selected and notified to the player. By configuring in this manner, the player can play the game looking forward to which hold is effectively selected. In addition, in the configuration in which effective suspension is determined after the suspension symbol is displayed, it is possible to play a game expecting that the suspension corresponding to the suspension symbol or reach display mode is not set as effective suspension.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Sixth Embodiment>
A pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 106. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the reserved symbol is displayed in a predetermined combination, and the player is notified of the advance notice by the combination of the symbols displayed on the predetermined effective lines H1 to H5. did. On the other hand, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment, the holding symbol is configured by a predetermined symbol row, and when the holding is established, the symbol row is displayed in a state of being stopped and displayed at the predetermined position. . Then, it is different from the first embodiment in that the symbol sequence of the retention symbol is moved in ascending order one frame at a time each time the retention is digested. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

<About the display mode of the reservation symbol in the sixth embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 100, the display mode of the holding symbol displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display control device 81 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 100 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a holding symbol displayed when four holdings are established. From this state, a new change of the third symbol is started, and when the number of reserved pieces is digested, as shown in FIG. 100 (b), displayed in reserved symbol display areas Ds2 to Ds4 of FIG. 100 (a) In a state where the symbol array of the reserved symbol being displayed has been moved to the left one frame at a time, it is displayed being shifted to the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds3.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the reserved symbol is regularly displayed (scrolled) one frame at a time, triggered by the digestion of the reserved symbol. Therefore, the player can predict in advance whether the holding symbol will hit the effective line and align with the holding symbol. Therefore, even if the fluctuation time of the third symbol is set short, the player can predict the result of the pass / fail judgment in advance in the display pattern of the holding symbol, and the game can be produced with the holding symbol. As a result, the player can be entertained without being bored even if the rendering time in the third symbol is shortened.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Sixth Embodiment
The electrical configuration according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. The RAM 231 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment compares the RAM 231 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the first embodiment with a winning information storage area 223i, a hold information storage area 223j, and a hold line flag. Each 223r has been added. The winning information storage area 223i and the hold information storage area 223j have the same configurations as those described in the fourth embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The holding line flag 223r is a flag indicating that it is determined that the holding symbol is set to be a hit holding symbol on the valid line H4 or H5. The hold line flag 223r is set to ON in the process of S1786 of the hold symbol selection process 2 (FIG. 105, S1780) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Note that the hold line flag 223r is automatically set to OFF when the hold (hold determined to be a hit in the process of S1782) serving as a trigger for setting the hold line flag to ON is digested.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 101 (b), the lost holding symbol selection table 222e set in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 101 (b) is a view schematically showing the contents of the lost holding symbol selection table 222e. The detachment retention symbol selection table 222e (see FIG. 101 (b)) in the sixth embodiment is displayed in the display area X1 with respect to the detachment retention symbol selection table 222e (see FIG. 12 (b)) in the first embodiment. The difference is that the holding symbol to be selected is changed to be selected based on the value of the effect counter 223f. As described above, the reserved symbol of the sixth embodiment has a predetermined order set as shown in FIG. 66 (a), so that the symbol row is displayed on the display position X1 of the sub display area Ds. By determining the symbols, the reserved symbols to be displayed at other display positions are also automatically determined.

Regarding Control Process in Sixth Embodiment
Control processing in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 106. FIG.

Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller 110 in Sixth Embodiment
The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. In the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 102) in the sixth embodiment, the start winning process (FIG. 20, S105) is different from the timer win process (see FIG. 17) in the first embodiment. (FIG. 60, S115) has been changed. The other processes are the same as those of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted. The start winning process 2 (FIG. 60, S115) is also the same as that described in the third embodiment, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<About Control Processing of Voice Lamp Controller 113 in Sixth Embodiment>
Control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. The main process (see FIG. 103) in the sixth embodiment is the same as the main process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment in the pending number display updating process (FIG. 34, S1306). In FIG. 98 (b) and S1750, the command determination process (FIG. 28, S1311) is changed to the command determination process 6 (FIG. 104, S1760). The other processes are the same as the processes in the first embodiment.

  The command determination processing 6 (S1760) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 6 (S1760). The command determination process 6 (FIG. 104, S1760) in the sixth embodiment is different from the command determination process (FIG. 28, S1311) in the first embodiment in the pending display update process (FIG. 29, S1404). In the update process 4 (FIG. 106, S1770), the reserved symbol selection process (FIG. 32, S1413) is changed to the reserved symbol selection process 2 (FIG. 105, S1780), and each process up to S1417 to S1418 is added It is done. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the reserved symbol selection process 2 (S1780) executed after the process of S1412 is executed will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the reserved symbol selection process 2 (S1780).

  In the reserved symbol selection process 2 (FIG. 105, S1780), first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1781). It is determined whether or not the winning data stored in the winning information storage area 223i is stored based on the winning information command. If it is determined that the winning information to be hit is stored in the winning information storage area 223i (S1782: Yes), it is determined whether the hold line flag 223r is set to OFF (S1783).

  If it is determined that the hold line flag 223r is set to off (S1783: Yes), the hold symbol lottery table 222b (see FIG. 11B) is held based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. A symbol lottery is executed (S1784). It is determined that the lottery result of S1784 is a hit display (S1785). If it is determined that the lottery result is a hit display (S1785: Yes), the hold line flag 223r is set to ON (S1786).

  Thereafter, based on the value of the effect counter 223f, the holding symbol is selected from the holding symbol selection table 222d (see FIG. 12A), and is set in the holding symbol storage area 223e as a hit holding symbol (S1787). Thereafter, the process of S1787 is performed. In addition, being set to the retention symbol storage area 223e as the hit retention symbol indicates that the retention symbol to be displayed on the effective line H4 is stored as the hit retention symbol. In addition, the set hit holding symbol is initialized based on the hold line flag 223r being set to off.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1783 that the hold line flag 223r is on (S1783: No), the process of S1788 is executed. In the process of S1788, the holding symbol to be displayed at the position corresponding to the holding number is determined, the holding symbol to be displayed at the other display position is determined, and is set in the corresponding holding symbol storage area 223e (S1788). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Here, the position corresponding to the pending number will be described. As shown in FIG. 100 (a), if it is the selection of the hold symbol corresponding to the hold 4 (hold display area Ds4), the symbol in front of the symbol set to the hit hold symbol (specifically, the turtle symbol is In the case of the hit and hold symbol, the hold symbol is set such that the symbol in front of the symbol is the third symbol (display position X3) from the left. In this case, a crab symbol is set at the display position X1.

  Moreover, if it is selection of the holding symbol corresponding to holding 3 (holding symbol display area Ds3), selection of a holding symbol will be performed so that a hit holding symbol may be located in the display position X3. In the case of selection of a hold symbol corresponding to hold 2 (hold symbol display area Ds2), the hold symbol is selected such that the hit hold symbol is at the display position X2.

  Thus, the holding symbol is displayed by each holding display area so that the hit holding symbol is at the predetermined position. In addition, about selection of the holding symbol with respect to holding 1, it is set so that a holding symbol may be displayed in display position X1. Therefore, the player can expect to be hit by the type indicated by the symbol displayed at the display position X1 when only the hold 1 is displayed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1782 that the hit storage for the winning information storage area 223i is not set (S1782: No), it is determined in the process of S1785 that the lottery result in S1784 is out of display. In the case (S1785: No), the process of S1789 is executed. In the process of S1789, based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, the outlying symbol is selected from the outright suspension symbol selection table 222e (see FIG. 101 (b)) and set in the suspension symbol storage area 223e (S1789).

  It is determined whether there is a valid symbol H1 to H4 to be displayed with a hit symbol (S1790). When it is determined that there is a valid line displayed in the hit holding symbol (S1790: Yes), among the symbols of the valid line displayed in the hit holding symbol, the number of holding balls (holding order) is largest. In contrast, it is set by moving the +1 frame symbol (S1791). Thereafter, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no valid line displayed with the hit and held symbol (S1790: No), this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the pending display update process 4 (S1770), which is one process in the command determination process 6 (FIG. 104, S1760), will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the pending display update process 4 (S1770). In the pending display updating process 4 (FIG. 106, S1770), the data of the pending symbol obtained by moving the data of each pending symbol storage area 223e in ascending order by +1 frame is set as the pending symbol data of the display position X1. The storage area corresponding to the hold is shifted and set (S1771). In this case, a change flag (not shown) is set to on. Here, specifically, when a turtle symbol is stored as the holding symbol of the display position X1, a shark symbol is set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the holding symbol regularly moves in response to the holding of the holding. Therefore, at the time when the holding symbol is displayed, even if it is not a hit holding symbol, the subsequent change in the holding symbol can be determined early, so that the player can be made to look at the holding symbol it can. Therefore, in addition to the third symbol, the player's attention can be drawn, and the interest of the game can be increased.

In addition, even if the variation time of the third symbol is shortened to improve the efficiency of the game, the time for which the reserved symbol is displayed can be used to give a notice regarding the judgment of success or failure, and the player can You can configure without getting bored until you get a jackpot.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Seventh Embodiment>
A pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 116. In the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment, the holding symbol is configured of a predetermined symbol row, and when the holding is established, the symbol row is displayed in the state of being stopped and displayed at the predetermined position, each time the holding is digested The description has been made of the configuration in which the symbol sequence of the reserved symbol is moved in ascending order by one frame and displayed. On the other hand, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the sixth embodiment, one of the holding symbols displayed is triggered by the fact that a specific variation pattern is displayed. The sixth embodiment differs from the sixth embodiment in that effects are displayed to display symbols in a variable manner. The same elements as those of the sixth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<About the display mode of the reserved symbol in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to Drawing 107-Drawing 109, a display mode of a reservation design in the 7th embodiment of the present is explained. In the display mode shown in FIG. 107 (a), in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, three pieces of suspension occur before the variation pattern of the third symbol is deviated and the normal reach is established. Is shown. In the sub display area Dm, selection notification display areas En (En1 to En4) are formed in each of the small display areas Ds1 to Ds4 for displaying the reserved symbols. As shown in FIG. 107 (a), the selection notification display area En is formed in a rectangular shape at the left end of each of the small display areas Ds1 to Ds4 and the holding symbol is not displayed in that area. There is.

  FIG. 107 (b) shows the variation pattern of the normal reach of the third symbol displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and when the re-variation effect is started when the reach display is established It shows a display mode. In the re-variation display mode, an arrow-shaped symbol is displayed in the selection notification display area En, and the arrow symbol is moved and displayed at high speed in the order of the selection notification display area En2 and the selection notification display area En3 from the selection notification display area En1. . Then, the character "re-variation when the cursor is stopped" is displayed in the small area Ds1, and the player is informed that the reserved symbol corresponding to the small area where the arrow symbol is stopped is re-varied.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern of out-of-normal reach is set at a fluctuation time of 15 seconds, and is set to be displayed in a reach display mode five seconds after the start of fluctuation. Then, the display mode of re-variation is executed up to 10 seconds after the reach display mode is displayed. First, an effect of moving and displaying an arrow symbol as shown in FIG. 107 (b) is displayed for 5 seconds. After that, when the arrow symbol is stopped and displayed in any of the selection notification display areas En, an effect of fluctuating and displaying a holding symbol to be described later is executed. If the effect of moving and displaying the arrow symbol is executed and the arrow symbol is not displayed in any selection notification display area En without the arrow being stopped and displayed, the re-variation of the holding symbol is not executed. It is shown that.

  As shown in FIG. 108 (a), after the arrow symbol is moved and displayed, when the arrow symbol is stopped and displayed in the selection notification display area En2, the hold 2 displayed in the small area Ds2 indicated by the arrow symbol The variable display of the first reserved symbol is started. In this variable symbol display, the displayed symbol row is scrolled in order from right to left, and after being scrolled at high speed for 2 seconds, it is scrolled at low speed for 3 seconds. Thus, the display is stopped as shown in FIG. 108 (b).

  In the display mode shown in FIG. 108 (b), the case is shown in which the second held holding symbol that is variably displayed is stopped and displayed, and three camera symbols are displayed side by side along the effective line H5. As described above, when the same types of reserved symbols are aligned in any of the valid lines H1 to H5, it indicates that among the retained items, there is included a retained item to be hit. Then, the character "chance !!" is displayed in the small area Ds4, and the player is informed that the holding symbol is aligned.

  In the display mode shown in FIG. 109 (a), after the arrow symbol shown in FIG. 107 (b) is moved and displayed, it is stopped and displayed in the selection notification display area Ds3, and the third reserved symbol is variably displayed. It shows the state where it was stopped and displayed. Hold The third hold symbol was stopped from being displayed with a octopus symbol, a blow symbol, or a turtle symbol from the left before it was variably displayed (refer to FIG. 107 (b)), but after the variation display, it is shown in FIG. As shown in (a), from the left, the stop symbols are displayed in the order of the angelfish symbol, the crab symbol, and the octopus symbol.

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the holding symbol is set according to the rule displayed by moving to the left one frame at a time, every time the holding is digested, from the stop display mode, the player can It is possible to predict the display pattern of the holding symbol when the holding is digested. Therefore, when one hold is digested when the display mode shown in FIG. 109 (a) is displayed, the player can display the reach on the effective line H4, as shown in FIG. 109 (b). Can be recognized in advance. As described above, when displayed in the reach display mode, when the third hold of the hold occurs, the game is performed in anticipation that the tach symbol in the reach display mode is not displayed at the left end of the small area Ds 3 b be able to.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the display mode of the normal reach is difficult to be selected when the lottery result of the third symbol is a big hit, it is configured to execute the re-variation effect of the reserved symbol, so the third Even when there is no expectation of winning in the effect of the symbol, the player can enjoy the re-change effect of the holding symbol, and can suppress being bored with the game. Therefore, the opportunity to enjoy the effect of the game increases more, and the effect that the jackpot of the third symbol can not be expected can also be expected as an opportunity of the re-variation of the holding symbol.

Control Process of Audio Lamp Controller 113 in Seventh Embodiment
Control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process (FIG. 110) in the seventh embodiment is the same as the main process (FIG. 103) in the sixth embodiment, the pending number display updating process 3 (FIG. 98, S1750) is the pending number display updating process 4 (FIG. The command determination process 6 (FIG. 104, S1760) is changed to the command determination process 7 (FIG. 111, S1820) at 115, S1810). The other processing is the same as that of the sixth embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the command determination process 7 (S1820) will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 7 (S1820). In the command determination process 7 (S1820) in the seventh embodiment, the pending display update process 4 (FIG. 106, S1770) is the pending display update process as compared with the command determination process 6 (FIG. 104, S1760) in the sixth embodiment. In 5 (FIG. 112, S1830), the reserved symbol selection processing 2 (FIG. 105, S1780) is changed to the reserved symbol selection processing 3 (FIG. 114, S1840). The other processing is the same as that of the sixth embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112, pending display update processing 5 (S1830) in command determination processing 7 (FIG. 111, S1820) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the pending display update process 5 (S1830).

  In the pending display update process 5 (FIG. 112, S1830), first, the pending symbol data stored in each pending chart storage area 223 is updated to a pending symbol moved to the left by one in the symbol row, and one is displayed. The next storage area is shifted (S1831).

  Is the reserved symbol being displayed in the display mode indicating a hit in any of the effective lines H1 to H5 of the reserved symbol displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 (during displaying of a pending reservation) It is determined (S1832). If it is determined that the hit-on-hold is being displayed (S 1832: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit is not displayed (S1832: No), it is determined whether the received fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of the out-of-normal reach (S1833).

  If it is determined that the received fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern other than the normal reach (S1833: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received fluctuation pattern is out of the normal reach fluctuation pattern (S1833: Yes), re-variation processing is executed (S1834).

  Next, referring to FIG. 113, re-variation processing (S1834) which is one of the pending display update processing 5 (FIG. 112, S1830) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment Will be explained. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing this re-variation process (S1834).

  In the re-variation process (FIG. 113, S1834), first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1861). The re-variation lottery is executed based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f (S1862). Here, if the information stored in the winning information storage area 223i stores the winning information, if the value of the effect counter 223f is any one of “0 to 100”, the re-variation Is determined to be performed. On the other hand, if the winning information storage area 223i does not store the winning information, if the value of the effect counter 223f is any of "0 to 49", it is determined that re-variation is to be performed.

  In the process of S1862, it is determined whether or not it has been determined that the re-variation lottery has been won (to execute re-variation) (S1863). If it is determined that the re-variation lottery has been won (S1863: Yes), it is determined whether the hold line flag 223r is set to ON. The holding line flag 223r is a flag indicating that it is determined that the holding symbol is to be hit and displayed on any of the valid lines H1 to H5.

  If it is determined in the process of S1864 that the hold line flag 223r is off (S1864: No), it is determined whether hold information to be a hit is stored in the winning information storage area 223i (S1865). If it is determined that the hit information storage area 223i stores the hit holding information (S1865: Yes), the hold symbol lottery table 222b (FIG. 11 (d)) based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Refer to) to execute a holding symbol lottery (S1866). In this holding symbol lottery, it is determined whether the holding symbol is to be hit and displayed on any of the valid lines H1 to H5.

  If it is determined that the lottery result of S1866 is drawn to display the holding symbol (S1867: Yes), the holding line flag 223r is set to ON (S1868). It is determined whether or not the hold symbol corresponding to the hit type can be changed to the hit display or the reach display (S1869). If it is determined that the held symbol corresponding to the hit type can be changed to the hit display or the reach display (S1869: Yes), re-variation of the corresponding held symbol is set (S1870). Here, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), the re-variation set is as shown in FIG. 109 (a), in the case where the reserved symbols are displayed side by side on the effective line by re-variation In this case, it is set in the case where it is possible to display the holding symbol on the activated line or in the display mode of the reach by digesting the holding. In the present embodiment, if it is possible to directly display the win, the display is prioritized, then the direct reach display, and the next, if it is a hit display when it is put on hold, then it is put on hold. It is set in the order of priority of becoming reach display when it is digested.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1869, when it is determined that the held symbol corresponding to the hit type can not be changed to the hit display or the reach display, the held symbol selection table 222d (FIG. 12 (a (a)). The re-variation is set so that the holding symbol is selected from the reference symbol) and the symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line H1 (S1871).

  Further, in the process of S1867, when it is determined not to display in the hit display (S1867: No), the value of the effect counter 223f acquired is divided by the value of the number of holding balls, corresponding to the value of the remainder The re-variation of the holding symbol is set (S1872). In this case, the same stop symbol as that before the change is set as the stop symbol. In addition, although it was set as the same stop symbol as change before in this embodiment, you may comprise not only it but selecting the symbol which a holding symbol does not become display and setting as a stop symbol.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1863 that the lottery for re-variation is out (S1863: No), and if it is determined that the holding line flag 223r is on (S1864: Yes), the display is removed. The re-variation command is set. Note that this display removal re-variation command instructs the display control device 114 to display an effect to be displayed without causing the selection notification display area En to be stopped and displayed after moving and displaying the arrow symbol. It is.

  In this way, when the normal reach out of position is displayed and the reach display is performed, since the re-change effect of the held symbol being displayed is executed, the player performs the effect that can not have much expectation for a hit with the third symbol. Even if you are, you can play the game without getting bored. In addition, if any one of the displayed holding symbols is re-varied, and if it is stopped and displayed in a combination that becomes a hit display or a reach display, it may be determined that the re-variation effect is not executed, the game The player can play the game with expectation. Therefore, even if it takes a long time until the hit is displayed with the special symbol, it is possible to enjoy the game more with the combination displayed with the holding symbol, and it is possible to suppress being bored.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the reserved symbol selection processing 3 (S1840) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the reserved symbol selection process 3 (S1840).

  In the reserved symbol selection process 3 (FIG. 114, S1840), first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1841). It is determined whether the hold line flag 223r is set to on (S1842). If it is determined that the hold line flag 223r is set to ON (S1842: Yes), it is determined whether or not the winning hold information is stored in the winning information storage area 223i (S1843).

  If it is determined that the winning information storage area 223i stores the winning hold information (S1843: Yes), based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired, refer to the holding symbol lottery table 222b (see FIG. 11 (b) ) A lottery is executed to determine whether or not the holding symbol is to be displayed in the display mode of the hit display (S1844). If it is determined that the lottery result of S1844 is a hit display and the holding symbol is displayed (S1845: Yes), the holding line flag 223r is set to ON (S1846). On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit symbol is not hit and displayed (S1845: No), the processing of S1850 is executed.

  Based on the value of the effect counter 223f, the holding symbol is selected from the holding symbol selection table 222d (see FIG. 12A), and is set (stored) in the holding symbol storage area 223e as a hit holding symbol (S1847). Based on the selected hit holding symbol, the holding symbol corresponding to the holding area is determined and set in the corresponding holding symbol storage area 223e (S1848).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1842 that the holding line flag 223r is on (S1842: No), it is determined whether the holding symbol has already been displayed (S1849). If it is determined that the held symbol has already been displayed (S1849: Yes), the process of S1850 is executed.

  In the process of S1850, based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired, the outlier retention symbol is selected from the outlier retention symbol selection table 2 (222e, see FIG. 101 (b)) and set in the corresponding suspension symbol storage area 223e Ru.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1849, when it is determined that the held symbol is not notified by the combination of hits (S1849: No), the held symbol corresponding to the held area is set based on the held held symbol. It decides and is set to reservation design storage area 223e (S1851).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 115, pending number display update processing 4 (S1810) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 115 is a flow chart showing the pending number display updating process 4 (S1810).

  In the number-of-helds display update processing 4 (FIG. 115, S1810), first, it is determined whether or not a change is set for the held symbol (S1811). If it is determined that no change is set for the held symbol (S1811: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1811 that the change of the holding symbol is set (S1811: Yes), the display holding command is set for each setting of the holding symbol (S1812) ). It is determined whether re-variation of the holding symbol is set (S 1813).

  If it is determined that the re-variation of the reserved symbol is not set (S1813: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the re-variation of the reserved symbol is set (S 1813: Yes), the display symbol re-variation command for display indicating the content of the set re-variation is set (S 1814).

Control Processing of Display Control Device 114 in Seventh Embodiment
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the seventh embodiment is a command determination process (FIG. 39, S2102) with respect to the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the sixth embodiment. Is changed to command determination processing 4 (FIG. 116, S2130). The other processing is the same as that of the sixth embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the command determination process 4 (FIG. 116, S2130) in the seventh embodiment, each process up to S2220 to S2221 is added to the command determination process (FIG. 39, S2102) in the sixth embodiment. The other processing is the same as that of the sixth embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When it is determined in the process of S2208 that the display reserved symbol command has not been received (S2208: No), it is determined whether the display reserved symbol re-variation command has been received (S2220). If it is determined that the display reserved symbol re-variation command is received (S2220: Yes), the corresponding re-variation data is set in the display data table buffer. Thereafter, this process ends. Here, it is set in the display data table such that stop display with a symbol instructed by the command is set for the held symbol indicated by the display symbol re-variation command for display. About the change display of a reservation symbol, the same setting as the change display of the 3rd symbol is performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a normal reach with a low expectation of the jackpot is established for the player (when a fluctuation pattern which is hard to be selected in the case of the jackpot is realized), one of the holding symbols is Because it is configured to fluctuate, it is possible for the player to enjoy and expect the fluctuation pattern of the holding symbol instead of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol that is not of interest and is not a special symbol fluctuation mode, and it is possible to suppress getting bored early in the game .

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it comprised so that the selection alerting | reporting production | presentation of a holding | holding symbol might be performed triggered by a loss normal reach, not only that but a super reach etc. of a hit may perform. In addition, to the big hit by configuring the selection notification effect (re-variation of the reserved symbol) is easier to execute when the fluctuation pattern to be deviated is selected than when the fluctuation pattern to be hit is selected. Even with the fluctuation pattern with a low degree of expectation of the player, the player can expect a re-variation of the holding symbol, and can enjoy the game in various ways.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that one holding symbol (holding symbol which shows one of the number of holdings) might be changed again among holding symbols, it is not restricted to it, but several holding symbols (a plurality of holding numbers May be configured to be re-varied, or the number of re-variations may be determined by lottery.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the selection of the specific variation pattern is used as a trigger to determine the execution of re-variation, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and a specific advance notice display mode and a specific number of reserved items are stored. The configuration may be changed again in response to a specific time, etc. Further, it may be configured to execute re-variation when a random lottery is performed and the player wins the lottery. By configuring this way. It is possible to provide the player with a surprising effect.

  In the present embodiment, as described in the sixth embodiment, the description is given for the one in which the reserved symbol is regularly moved and displayed, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and as shown in the above embodiments, it is randomly The combination of the holding symbols may be selected, or the holding symbols may be variably displayed, and at least one of the holding symbols may be changed again.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113, and when the command is received by the audio lamp control unit 113, it is transmitted to the display control unit 114 in the audio lamp control unit 113. The command to be determined is determined, and thereafter, the command is configured to be transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, when the command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114 and the command is received by the display control unit 114, the display control unit 114 determines the command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control unit 113. After that, the display control device 114 may transmit the command to the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether the resident video RAM 235 for transfer destination or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 for transfer destination or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, it is determined that the image controller 237 accesses the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (that is, using) the normal video RAM 236. ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, the MPU 231 monitors a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235, or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 by the MPU 231, It may be checked whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends the access, the MPU 231 notifies the MPU 231 of the information from the image controller 237 as needed. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the drive state of the image controller 237 or a notification from the image controller 237 whether the scan is in a blank period or not. If the scan state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each video RAM 235, 236 is not in use. Thus, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is not in use, so that the determination can be easily performed.

  Also, in this case, the MPU 231 transfers data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the process of reading out the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be started according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since a predetermined address is defined, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to a display data table or the like by transferring image data according to transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, drawing of the sprite is performed. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for the above can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  The process of reading out image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process or a loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, in the MPU 231, transfer processing of image data can be executed using time during which important processing in the display control apparatus 114 such as command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing is not performed. In addition, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are processes that are executed prior to the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt process or the V interrupt process. Transfer processing can be performed.

  In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage the video RAMs using the addresses held by the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236, but is commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly designate the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or regular video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, but merely designates the address, and The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the regular video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply designated. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction for performing the specification. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as an information indicating the storage destination of the data of the sprite, without using the storage RAM type, simply using the address set in the common address system. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the construction of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) connected to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. It may be connected directly to 237. Also, a bridge circuit is provided to convert the input / output specification of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specification of the mask ROM, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. It is also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the premise of using a general mask ROM as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to be able to directly access the character ROM 234.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and is configured by a large capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage unit, for example, a hard disk It may be done. Although such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 causes the image to be displayed without any problem at the time when it is desired to display by using the configuration described in the above embodiment. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the character ROM 234 is provided with the NOR type ROM 234d, and the MPU 231 stores a part of the boot program to be executed first after releasing the system reset in the first program storage area 234d1. The first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium that can perform read operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 first cancels the system reset in that area. A part of the boot program to be executed may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234 d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM) or the like is provided in the character ROM 234 and a first program storage area is provided thereon. It may store part of the boot program to be executed first.

  In the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program to be executed first in the area after releasing the system reset in the MPU 231 Is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium that can be read faster than the NAND flash memory 234a. The first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program to be executed first after the system reset release in the MPU 231 may be stored in the memory. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234 d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM) or the like may be provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area may be provided thereon. A part of the boot program to be executed first after system reset release may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when it is detected in the ROM controller 234b that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then, When it is detected that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated "0000H" in the ROM controller 234b, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line You may output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, when the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" to the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, whether the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is already set in the buffer RAM 234c, Since the character ROM 234 is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is designated by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the display main processing in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can.

  When ROM controller 234 b detects that the address designated by internal bus (bus line 240) designates a control program stored in first program storage area 234 d 1, first program storage area 234 d 1 is detected. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be directly read out from the memory and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can. In this case, the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may not be set in the buffer RAM 234c. Thus, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  Although the case where the resident video RAM 235 is provided by connecting to the image controller 237 has been described in the above embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and an internal bus (bus It may be provided directly connected to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. When the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video is not necessary even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  Although the above embodiment describes the case where the display control device 114 is provided with one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236, the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more may be provided A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images according to various modes may be made resident, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above embodiment, although the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by the DRAM of one port type (one input / output port) is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. A type of RAM may be used. Thus, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed simultaneously. For example, while the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn, it is read from the character ROM 234 The process of writing the processed image data into the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. One RAM may be a resident area and a normal area. The contents may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the respective areas. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by read or write processing by one of the resident area and the normal area. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, at least image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at least for residence in response to a received command received from the main control unit 110 or the audio lamp control unit 113 or other input from the outside. Preferably, it is resident in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is partially transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident is described, but all image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 You may In this case, since the image data stored in the nonresident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. May be

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The main controller 110 or the audio lamp controller 113 If the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is largely different based on the command received from the image, the image data to be made resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a predetermined timing. Good. In this case, while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Also, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is kept updated in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated even when the other resident images are updated. You may leave it. In addition, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out image data to be newly resident, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. It may be transferred while not in use (ie, during a period in which image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer). Image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 according to data information), and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use (ie, while image data corresponding to the transition image is not read) You may do it.

  When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident and transfer the read out image data through the buffer RAM 237a. It is also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237, which has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231, accesses the character ROM 234, reads image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the content of the resident video RAM 235 while the transition image is displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the above embodiment, after all image data to be resident is made resident in the resident video RAM 235, a RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored when power failure is eliminated. Before the transfer of the main image data at power on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is started in the display main process or the main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control unit 114 after turning on, the RAM judgment value is confirmed, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, this means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored, and thus the image data transfer to the resident video RAM 235 is not performed. It may be configured to In this case, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be made non-execution by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when the system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and execution of the display main process or main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is stored normally. In this case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for the power failure recovery. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, it is necessary to transfer the image data if the data of the resident video RAM 235 normally remains due to a momentary stop or the like. Since time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Alternatively, instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above embodiment, although the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured alone and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Furthermore, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) with many data signal exchanges. Transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by

  In the above embodiment, the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a has been described as one block of the NAND flash memory 234a. However, the storage capacity is not necessarily limited to this and may be appropriately set. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a buffer period (blank period) during scanning on the blank area which is a scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed A data capacity sufficient to complete the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 may be used as the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, transfer from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 generated in this blank period. .

  Although the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the stored image data is transferred from the other buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. It may be configured. In addition, while an area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another image data is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since processing can be performed, the time taken for the processing can be shortened.

  In the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thereby, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. Since image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after the power on of the power-on main image and the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image. Although the case of transferring to 235 b has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power on. Thus, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 displays the image at power-on, while using the character ROM 234. The image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. Since image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while transferring image data corresponding to the image data, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. It may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. In addition, image data corresponding to the main image at power on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power on, and power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the main image stored in the normal video RAM 236. When image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 while transferring image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the hour main image, etc., Image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Thus, transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without intervention of the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 through the buffer RAM 237a, the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power activation fluctuation. Although the case of transferring to the image area 235 b has been described, while image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. Directly transfer image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and power-on fluctuation image from character ROM 234 directly to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on fluctuation image area 235b of resident video RAM 235 without passing through buffer RAM 237a. It is also good. Also, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the power-on main image and power stored in the normal video RAM 236 While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuation image, the resident video RAM 235 If the image data is not read out from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Thus, transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without intervention of the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the player operates the frame button 22, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a back image change command and a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the back image change command and the frame button. Although the case where the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of the super reach are changed based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the contents of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, according to the change of the gaming state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, the display control device 114 can change the back image or the effect mode of the super reach according to the game state based on the back image change command or the game state command. In addition, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10, and change the back image or the effect mode of the super reach according to the gaming state. Then, image data corresponding to at least a partial range of the rear image after the change or the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the presentation mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 From the resident area, the back image can be displayed immediately using the image data resident in the back image area 235c.

  In addition, the display control device 114 may change the rear surface image in accordance with the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the back image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may Here, when the image data of the back image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in the sub area, or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined such that a new back image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the audio lamp control device 113, and when the vibration error is detected by the audio lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Although the case where the warning image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 The controller 110 may detect a vibration error, and the main controller 110 may transmit an error command notifying the error to either the voice lamp controller 113 or the display controller 114. Then, when an error command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, and sends an error command for further notifying the display control device 114 of the error. May be

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of the vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is on in the display setting process (see FIG. 38). The warning image setting process (see FIG. 39) may be performed when it is determined, to display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. In this case, since it becomes unnecessary to transmit and receive the error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  Moreover, although the case where the vibration sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13 was described in the said embodiment, it replaces with the vibration sensor or with the vibration sensor, a magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 It is also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to suppress that the flow of the ball is changed by the magnetic field such as a magnet and the ball is intentionally entered into the ball entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, if the main controller 110 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is An error command to be transmitted may be sent from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114 via the audio lamp control unit 113 or directly. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command that indicates an error may be transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, the image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident in the error message pictorial area 235 f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113 The display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 when receiving an error command from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113 to transmit the magnetic field error. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, the display control device 114 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113. The warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. Thereby, the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113, or recognizes the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235, an error message image for notifying a magnetic field error without delay is shown in FIG. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is not It can be suppressed.

  When the drawing content required to change the color tone of a part or all of one presentation is defined by the additional data table or the display data table, in the additional data table or the display data table, 1 in the third symbol display device 81 The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed at that time corresponding to the address in which the time for which the image for the frame is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) is represented as one unit, and the change in the sprite It may define color information specifying a color tone. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452 d and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If color information to be displayed is specified, color information of the corresponding sprite type specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed. The drawing list may be created in place of the color information specified by the additional drawing content of the data table. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  In addition, when the drawing data necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 In correspondence with the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for displaying is displayed as one unit, at that time, the type of sprite to be replaced, the type of sprite to be newly displayed, and the new It may define the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 displays the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d, various sprites specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233 f Among them, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the type of sprite to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table. It may include transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data which is required when drawing an image according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying effects that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines an effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates the drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. You may configure it.

  Thus, the image controller 237 can transfer image data of a sprite used in drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, effects to be additionally displayed can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 easily and reliably. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing drawing of the image based on the additional drawing content. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table. Although the case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the super reach selected by the above has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table May be This makes it possible to easily identify the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player. Further, since it is not necessary to define drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data size of the display data table.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. The additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table is defined not only for the additional drawing content but also including transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image performed according to the additional drawing content. Good. This makes it possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering, so from the additional data table and the transfer data table for addition The processing load required for the specification can be reduced as compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified.

  In the above embodiment, the display control device 114 has described the case of preparing the display data table for each fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "fluctuation start", "high speed fluctuation", "notice effect", "normal reach", "super reach", and the display data table is prepared according to the fluctuation pattern indicated in the display fluctuation pattern command. After identifying the elements necessary for the fluctuation production, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets necessary for the fluctuation production specified are put together into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is generated. You may do so. For "variation start", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", etc., a display common to each fluctuation pattern is often performed. Therefore, the data table can be efficiently provided by elementizing the fluctuation effect in this way and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

  In the above embodiment, in the display data table and the transfer data table, the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 233f using the common pointer 233f has been described. Alternatively, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every display interval of an image of one frame for ending the drawing processing (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interruption signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image of one frame. Since the driving of the third symbol display device 81 is always performed so that an image of one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), a V interrupt signal is generated for each display of an image of one frame. By sending, it is possible to keep accurate without having to time its time interval.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer to which the drawn image is to be expanded based on the drawing object buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded from the other frame buffer earlier. Has been described and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the image buffer 237 is a frame buffer to which the drawn image should be expanded each time the drawing list is received. May be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read out from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Also, each time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer to which the drawn image should be expanded. The frame buffer to be used may be switched.

  In the above embodiment, after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main display unit 110 is notified via the audio lamp control device 113 until the finalized display effect is finished. When neither the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the case of setting the demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect to the display data table buffer 233 d Although this has been described, the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233 d again. Also, in this case, until the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, the finalized display effect is Each time the process is ended, the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, the finalized display effect can be continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the variation pattern command or the demonstration command is received from the main control device 110.

  In the above embodiment, a case was described where the demonstration effect was to change the back image and to stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers from "0" to "9". The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol including the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semitransparent state. In addition, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. In addition, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third pattern or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, in the display control means 114, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image after power-on from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and power on. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b and displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on after the transfer is completed, transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control means 114 first transfers only image data corresponding to the main image at power on after power on from the character ROM 234 to the power on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 at power on after power transfer is completed. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier after the power is turned on, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be checked in the operation check in the player, the person in charge of the hall, or the factory at the time of manufacture. It is possible to immediately confirm that the operation has started without any problems by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b. Thereby, when the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b and the display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 after that, the display fluctuation pattern command is received. Based on the above, it is possible to display a simple variation display on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. It is desirable that the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b be performed immediately after displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on. As a result, it is possible to more quickly perform the fluctuation display by the power-on fluctuation image.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table should be transferred to the contents of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing contents) or to that time, corresponding to the time that represents 20 milliseconds as one unit. Although the case of defining the information (transfer data information) of the image data has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the display content is defined at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 seconds.

  Further, in the display data table, as a sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals, an address of the character ROM 234 where image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored instead of instructing the sprite type itself. May be defined. In the display control device 114, the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored I manage the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. There is no need to manage both the information specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and for each sprite, whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored. Although the case has been described, in place of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when instructing transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and the predetermined image data It may be determined whether or not it has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, an instruction to transfer image data of that predetermined sprite type may be set. When the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when transferring image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. In the normal video RAM 236, if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the case where the MPU 231 performs the process of disabling the transfer process has been described. The process may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and it is determined whether the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be stored. Also, the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in a work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in this case, the MPU 231 sends an image to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. Alternatively, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  Although the above embodiment has described the case where only the image data corresponding to “rear surface A” among the plurality of rear surface images is made to reside in the rear surface image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessarily limited thereto. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be made to reside in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the back image used in some super reach may be made to reside in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, transfer processing of image data from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed by making the back image of super reach expected to have a high or high frequency of occurrence resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. Can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the transfer instruction of the image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 transmits the transfer instruction at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. Although the case of controlling the image controller 237 to transfer the image data instructed in step from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The display data is displayed at the top of the display data table. The MPU 231 describes information on the type of sprite required in the table, and the MPU 231 transfers the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the type of sprite to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of that image type is The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer data to the video RAM 236.

  In the above embodiment, the case of displaying a high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player can not visually recognize is displayed when performing variation effects. Alternatively, all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so as not to be visually recognized, or all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image y in which a large number of white points are displayed randomly. .

  In the above embodiment, each time the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is updated in the main control unit 110 (that is, when each value increases or decreases), the holding ball number command is mainly controlled Although the case of transmitting from the device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is increased in the main control unit 110, the holding number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223 a by 1 when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. As a result, the number of times the main controller 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced. The control load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the winnings to the first entrance 64 and the passing of the second entrance 67 are configured to be respectively suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of holding balls is limited to four times. It may be set to three or less times, or five or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of balls in the variable display based on winning on the first entrance 64, the number of areas divided into four or a part of the third symbol display device 81 by the number of balls It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of holding balls is notified by the light emitting member You may configure it.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbols as identification information are scrolled in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a design along a predetermined path such as direction or L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, and, for example, one or more characters may be displayed in various ways along with the symbols or in addition to the symbols, or may be displayed in various ways. It also includes the effect display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In addition, the present invention may be implemented to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to slot machines and pachinko machines, various types of game machines may be implemented, such as arelapi and ball ball, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols and does not include a handle for ball launch. The thing is mentioned. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  In addition, some or all of the embodiments and modifications described above may be implemented in combination.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown.

<Feature A group>
Acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on establishment of the start condition, and propriety determination means for executing the determination of a lottery game based on establishment of the lottery condition for the first information acquired by the acquisition means; The first display means for displaying the first identification information indicating the result of the determination by the success or failure determination means, the display control means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the first information acquired by the acquisition means In a gaming machine having storage means for storing information, and second display means for displaying second identification information indicating the number of the first information stored in the storage means, the second identification information is By combining and displaying a plurality of symbols, it is shown that one piece of the first information is stored in the storage means, and among the symbols displayed by the plurality of second identification information, some symbols Combination of Gaming machine A1, wherein those having a symbol determination means for determining a notification display mode for notifying the advisability judgment information regarding the advisability judgment result by.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the first information is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of the start condition. Based on the establishment of the drawing condition of the first information acquired by the acquisition means, the judgment of the lottery game is executed by the judgment unit. First identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed on the first display unit. The identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means. The first information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means. Second identification information indicating the number of stored first information in the storage means is displayed by the second display means. Among the symbols displayed by the plurality of second identification information, a notification display mode in which the success or failure determination information related to the result of the determination on success or failure is notified by combination of some of the symbols is determined by the symbol determination means. As a result, the player can obtain the information on the pass / fail judgment even with the second identification information. Therefore, the player can determine the result of the success or failure judgment not only from the first identification information but also from the second identification information, and can enjoy the game more variously. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early in the game.

  The gaming machine A1 includes an operation means that can be operated by a player, and the second identification information is displayed on the second display means on condition that the first identification information is dynamically displayed. A game machine A2 comprising: second identification information redetermining means for redetermining a symbol constituting the second identification information when the operation means is operated in the state where the game is being performed.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, on the condition that the first identification information is displayed dynamically, the operation means operable by the player can be operated while the second identification information is displayed on the second display means. In this case, the symbols constituting the second identification information are redetermined by the second identification information redetermining means. Thus, the player can execute the process of redetermining the symbol of the second identification information at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, the player can enjoy the change of the second identification information, and can prevent the player from getting bored early in the game.

<Feature B group>
Acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on establishment of the start condition, and propriety determination means for executing the determination of a lottery game based on establishment of the lottery condition for the first information acquired by the acquisition means; The first display means for displaying the first identification information indicating the result of the determination by the success or failure determination means, the display control means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the first information acquired by the acquisition means In a gaming machine having storage means for storing information, and second display means for displaying second identification information indicating the number of the first information stored in the storage means, the second identification information is The second display means is configured with a number display area indicating the number of pieces of the first information stored in the storage means, and the second display means is set in the number display area. , Said second identification information And second display control means for dynamically displaying the second identification information sequentially in a predetermined direction on the second display means, and of the plurality of second identification information. And a symbol determining means for determining a combination of symbols for notifying a player of information on a game by combining several symbols and displaying them at a predetermined position. A game machine B1 characterized by: .

  According to the gaming machine B1, the first information is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of the start condition. Based on the establishment of the drawing condition of the first information acquired by the acquisition means, the judgment of the lottery game is executed by the judgment unit. The first display means displays first identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination means. The identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means. The first information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means. Second identification information indicating the number of stored first information in the storage means is displayed by the second display means. The second identification information is configured by a series of symbols configured by a plurality of symbols. In the second display means, the number of pieces of first information stored in the storage means is indicated in the number display area. The symbols of the second identification information set in the number display area are displayed by the symbol display area. The second identification information is dynamically displayed on the second display means in the predetermined direction sequentially from the second display control means. By combining several symbols of the plurality of second identification information and displaying them at a predetermined position, a combination of symbols for notifying the player of information on the game is determined by the symbol determination means. Thereby, since the second identification information is dynamically displayed in the symbol row, the player can easily determine the order in which the symbols are displayed. Therefore, it can be expected during the fluctuation of the second identification information whether or not the player is displayed in a desired combination for the combination of the symbols of the second identification information. Therefore, the player can enjoy not only the first identification information but also the dynamic display of the second identification information, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early in the game.

  The second identification information is displayed side by side on the second display means for each of the first information, and in combination of a plurality of symbols of the second identification information, notifies the information on the result of the pass / fail judgment as the game information. Yes, in the reach display mode before the symbol of one of the second identification information is displayed among the combinations indicating the hit of the result of the determination by the symbols displayed by the predetermined number of the second identification information (2) When the plurality of pieces of second identification information are displayed in the reach display mode by the reach symbol display means for displaying the identification information on the second display means and the reach symbol display means, the new second identification A game machine B characterized by having prohibiting means for prohibiting dynamic display of the second identification information displayed in the reach display mode while information is displayed dynamically. .

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the second identification information is displayed side by side on the second display means for each first information. Information on the result of the pass / fail determination is notified as gaming information by a combination of symbols of a plurality of second identification information. The second identification information is a reach symbol in the reach display mode before the symbol of one second identification information is displayed among the combinations indicating the hit determination result by the symbols displayed by the predetermined number of second identification information. Displayed on the second display means by the display means. When a plurality of second identification information is displayed in the reach display mode by the reach symbol display means, the second displayed in the reach display mode while the new second identification information is dynamically displayed Dynamic display of identification information is prohibited by the prohibiting means. Thus, by maintaining the state displayed in the reach display mode, it is possible to make the player expect the display mode indicating the win to be displayed by the second identification information. Therefore, by displaying the reach display mode, it is possible to further improve the taste of the game.

  It has a main control means for executing control of a game and a slave control means for executing control of a game based on a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means determines the success or failure of the success or failure judgment means. A success / failure determination signal generation unit that generates a success / failure determination signal for notifying the sub control unit of the result, and a first information signal to the sub control unit based on the fact that the first information is stored in the storage unit. First information signal generation means for generating the first information signal generation means, and prior success / failure determination signal generation means for generating the prior approval signal based on the first information and notifying the slave control means before the lottery condition is established. And the secondary control means displays, based on the yes / no determination signal output from the main control means, the first display means for displaying identification information indicating the yes / no determination result, and the prior yes / no determination Based on the signal, What has the prior information storage means which stores prior information for every establishment of conditions, and the said pattern determination means which determines the symbol displayed as said each 2nd identification information from the said symbol row based on the said prior information A game machine B3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exerted. That is, control of the game is executed by the main control means. Control of the game is executed by the slave control means based on the control signal from the main control means. In the main control means, the success / failure determination signal generation means generates a success / failure determination signal for notifying the sub-control means of the success / failure determination result of the success / failure determination means. Based on the fact that the first information is stored in the storage means, the first information signal is generated by the first information signal generation means in the slave control means. Before the lottery condition is established, a priori pass / fail judgment signal based on the first information is generated by the priori pass / fail judgment signal generating means and notified to the sub control means. In the secondary control means, identification information indicating the result of the yes / no determination is displayed on the first display means based on the yes / no determination signal output from the main control means. The second identification information is displayed by the second display means based on the reception of the first information signal. Prior information is stored by the prior information storage means each time the starting condition is established, based on the prior success / failure determination signal. Based on the prior information, a symbol to be displayed as each second identification information from the symbol row is determined by the symbol determination means. As a result, before the first identification information dynamically starts to be displayed, it is possible to notify of the result of the yes / no determination by the second identification information. Therefore, the success / failure determination result of the first information different from each other can be known from the dynamically displayed first identification information and the dynamically displayed second identification information, and the player can play more games. It can be done efficiently. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early in the game.

<Feature D group>
It has a main control means for executing game control, and a slave control means for executing game control based on a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the start condition. An acquisition means for acquiring the first information, a pass / fail judgment means for judging the success or failure of the lottery game based on the establishment of the lottery condition based on the acquisition of the first information obtained by the acquisition means, and a judgment result of the pass / fail judgment means The success / failure determination signal generation means for generating a success / failure determination signal for notifying the sub control means, the storage means for storing the first information until the lottery condition is satisfied, and the first information in the storage means First information signal generating means for generating a first information signal to the slave control means based on the stored information, and prior acceptance or rejection signal based on the first information before the lottery condition is established; To the slave control means Prior notification determination signal generating means for notifying the user, and the secondary control means displays identification information indicating the result of the determination on the basis of the determination result on the basis of the determination signal output from the main control means; Display means, display control means for causing the first display means to dynamically display the identification information, and storage in the storage means indicated by the first information signal based on reception of the first information signal A second display means for displaying second identification information indicating the number of the first information being stored; and a prior information storage means for storing prior information for each establishment of the start condition based on the prior yes or no determination signal; In the gaming machine, the second identification information is composed of a series of symbols displayed by a plurality of symbols having a predetermined order, and the display means is configured to display the number of pieces of the second identification information Display area and its The number display area has a symbol display area capable of displaying a plurality of symbols, and the slave control means displays the symbol as the second identification information based on the prior information from the symbol array. Symbol determining means for determining a combination of symbols for notifying the player of the content of the prior information by a combination of symbols determined by the plurality of second identification information, and the above-mentioned corresponding to the second identification information The display position of the second identification information is changed to the number of new first information based on the change in the number of the first information stored in the storage unit based on the satisfaction of the lottery condition of the first information. Of the second identification information based on the change of the display position of the second identification information by the display position changing means for changing to the display position corresponding to Move display to move and display the number A game machine D1 characterized by having a means.

  According to the gaming machine D1, control of the game is executed by the main control means. Control of the game is executed by the slave control means based on the control signal from the main control means. In the main control means, the first information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the start condition. Whether the lottery game is successful or not is executed based on the first information acquired by the acquiring means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. A yes / no decision signal generation means generates a yes / no decision signal for notifying the secondary control means of the yes / no decision result of the yes / no decision means. The first information is stored by the storage means until the lottery condition is established. Based on the fact that the first information is stored in the storage means, the first information signal is generated by the first information signal generation means in the slave control means. Before the lottery condition is established, a priori pass / fail judgment signal based on the first information is generated by the priori pass / fail judgment signal generating means and notified to the sub control means. In the secondary control means, based on the yes / no decision signal output from the main control means, identification information indicating the yes / no decision result is displayed by the first display means. The identification information is dynamically displayed by the display control means on the first display means. Based on the reception of the first information signal, second identification information indicating the number of pieces of first information stored in the storage means indicated by the first information signal is displayed by the second display means. Prior information is stored by the prior information storage means each time the starting condition is established, based on the prior success / failure determination signal. The second identification information is configured by symbol rows displayed with a plurality of symbols having a predetermined order. In the display means, the respective second identification information is displayed by the number display area. A plurality of symbols are displayed in the symbol display area in the number display area. In the subordinate control means, the symbol to be displayed as the second identification information is determined by the symbol determination means based on the prior information from the symbol row, and the combination of the symbols formed of a plurality of second identification information sets the prior information A combination of symbols for notifying the player of the content is determined. The display position of the second identification information is new based on the change in the number of the first information stored in the storage unit based on the satisfaction of the lottery condition of the first information corresponding to the second identification information. It is changed by the display position changing means to the display position corresponding to the number of information. Based on the change of the display position of the second identification information by the display position changing means, the symbol row of the second identification information is moved and displayed by the movement display means with a predetermined number of symbols. As a result, when the first identification information is displayed based on the first information stored in the storage unit, the symbol of the second identification information is moved and displayed in accordance with the determined rule. It is possible to predict in advance the change in the display mode of the symbol. Therefore, the player can determine in advance that the predetermined combination will be made, and can determine early about the result of the pass / fail determination. Therefore, since the effects of the game are diversified, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

  In the symbol display area, symbols in a predetermined range of the symbol row are displayed, and the second identification information is displayed on the second display unit, arranged for each of the first identification information stored in the storage unit. The symbol determination means determines a predetermined position among symbol display positions of the symbol display area of the plurality of second identification information as an effective position for displaying information related to the prior information in combination of the symbols. A game machine D2 characterized by being a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the second identification information is displayed on the second display means, arranged for each of the first identification information stored in the storage means. Among the symbol display positions of the symbol display areas of the plurality of second identification information, the symbol determining means is determined by the symbol determining means as an effective position for displaying information regarding the prior information in combination of the symbols. As a result, the player can determine the information related to the advance information by confirming the symbol displayed at the determined effective position, so that the player can easily play the game.

  Acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on establishment of the start condition, and propriety determination means for executing the determination of a lottery game based on establishment of the lottery condition for the first information acquired by the acquisition means; The first display means for displaying the first identification information indicating the result of the determination by the success or failure determination means, the display control means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the first information acquired by the acquisition means In a gaming machine having storage means for storing information, and second display means for displaying second identification information indicating the number of the first information stored in the storage means, the second identification information is By combining and displaying a plurality of symbols, it is shown that one piece of the first information is stored in the storage means, and an arbitrary display area is selected from the display areas for displaying the plurality of second identification information. Second identification It is characterized by having an information selection means and a pattern determination means for determining a symbol to be displayed in the display area selected by the second identification information selection means so as to notify predetermined information related to a game. A gaming machine E1.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the first information is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of the start condition. Based on the establishment of the drawing condition of the first information acquired by the acquisition means, the judgment of the lottery game is executed by the judgment unit. The first display means displays first identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination means. The identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means. The first information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means. Second identification information indicating the number of stored first information in the storage means is displayed by the second display means. The second identification information is displayed by combining a plurality of symbols, which indicates that one first information is stored in the storage means. An arbitrary display area is selected by the second identification information selection means from the display areas for displaying a plurality of second identification information. The symbols to be displayed in the display area selected by the second identification information selection means are determined by the symbol determination means so as to notify predetermined information concerning the game. As a result, since the display area selected from among the display areas for displaying the plurality of pieces of second identification information changes, the player can enjoy the combination of symbols in different display areas as appropriate. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the problem that the game becomes monotonous and the player gets bored with the game early.

  A game machine E2 characterized in that the second identification information selection means selects a display area in which the second identification information is displayed in the display area.

  According to the gaming machine E2, the second identification information selection means selects the display area in which the second identification information is displayed in the display area in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 There is an effect that the player can be expected to select the display area displayed by the combination of advantageous symbols.

  A game machine E3 characterized in that the second identification information selection means selects a display area before the second identification information is displayed in the display area.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1, the second identification information selecting means selects the display area before the second identification information is displayed in the display area, so that the player There is an effect that it is possible to increase interest in the design of the second identification information displayed in the display area selected in.

  The said symbol determination means determines the symbol displayed on the display area selected by the said 2nd identification information selection means based on the yes-no decision result by which the 1st identification information currently displayed dynamically was determined. A game machine E4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine E4, the second identification information selecting means selects the second identification information selection means based on the result of determination of the dynamically displayed first identification information in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3. Since the symbols to be displayed in the displayed display area are determined by the symbol determination means, the player is able to determine in advance the result of the pass / fail judgment before the first identification information is stopped and displayed. is there.

<Feature F group>
It has a main control means for executing game control, and a slave control means for executing game control based on a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the start condition. An acquisition means for acquiring the first information, a pass / fail judgment means for judging the success or failure of the lottery game based on the establishment of the lottery condition based on the acquisition of the first information obtained by the acquisition means, and a judgment result of the pass / fail judgment means The success / failure determination signal generation means for generating a success / failure determination signal for notifying the sub control means, the storage means for storing the first information until the lottery condition is satisfied, and the first information in the storage means First information signal generating means for generating a first information signal to the slave control means based on the stored information, and prior acceptance or rejection signal based on the first information before the lottery condition is established; To the slave control means Prior notification determination signal generating means for notifying the user, and the secondary control means displays identification information indicating the result of the determination on the basis of the determination result on the basis of the determination signal output from the main control means; Display means, display control means for causing the first display means to dynamically display the identification information, and storage in the storage means indicated by the first information signal based on reception of the first information signal A second display means for displaying second identification information indicating the number of the first information being stored; and a prior information storage means for storing prior information for each establishment of the start condition based on the prior yes or no determination signal; In the gaming machine, the display means has a number display area for displaying each of the second identification information, and a symbol display area capable of displaying a plurality of symbols in each of the number display areas. , Said slave control means The symbol storage means storing a plurality of symbol data to be displayed in the symbol display area and the symbol storage means for determining the combination of the symbols to be displayed as the second identification information based on the prior information An effective combination range in which the information on the prior information is notified to the player by the combination of the determination means and the symbols displayed in each of the symbol display areas in the number display area displayed on the second display means A game machine F1 characterized by comprising range determination means for determining.

  According to the gaming machine F1, control of the game is executed by the main control means. Control of the game is executed by the slave control means based on the control signal from the main control means. In the main control means, the first information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the start condition. Whether the lottery game is successful or not is executed based on the first information acquired by the acquiring means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. A yes / no decision signal generation means generates a yes / no decision signal for notifying the secondary control means of the yes / no decision result of the yes / no decision means. The first information is stored by the storage means until the lottery condition is established. Based on the fact that the first information is stored in the storage means, the first information signal is generated by the first information signal generation means in the slave control means. Before the lottery condition is established, a priori pass / fail judgment signal based on the first information is generated by the priori pass / fail judgment signal generating means and notified to the sub control means. In the secondary control means, based on the yes / no decision signal output from the main control means, identification information indicating the yes / no decision result is displayed by the first display means. The identification information is dynamically displayed by the display control means on the first display means. Based on the reception of the first information signal, second identification information indicating the number of pieces of first information stored in the storage means indicated by the first information signal is displayed by the second display means. Prior information is stored by the prior information storage means each time the starting condition is established, based on the prior success / failure determination signal. In the display means, each of the second identification information is displayed in the number display area. In each number display area, a plurality of symbols are displayed by the symbol display area. In the slave control means, a plurality of symbol data to be displayed in the symbol display area is stored by the symbol storage means. From the symbol storage means, the combination of the symbols to be displayed as the second identification information is determined by the symbol determination means based on the prior information. An effective combination range in which information on prior information is notified to the player is determined by the range determining means by the combination of the symbols displayed in each of the symbol display areas in the number display area displayed on the second display means. As a result, by changing the effective combination range, it is possible to make various combinations of symbols, and it is possible to provide the player with an effect having a change. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

<Feature G group>
The acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the start condition, the propriety determination means for determining the first information acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the acquisition means The storage means for storing the first information, the first identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination means, and the first identification information stored in the storage means until the lottery condition corresponding to the first information is satisfied. In a gaming machine having display means for displaying second identification information indicating the number of first information, a predetermined number of symbols are selected as the second identification information from a plurality of preset symbols. A second identification information selection display means for arranging the symbols selected by the symbol selection means in a predetermined direction and displaying them on the display means for each of the first information stored in the storage means; A display area setting unit configured to respectively set a first display area of the display unit shown and a second display area of the display unit on which the second identification information is displayed; A game machine G1, characterized in that the size of each of the first display area and the second display area is varied based on the number of the first information stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the first information is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of the start condition. Pass / fail determination is performed by the pass / fail determination means based on the establishment of the lottery condition for the first information obtained by the obtaining means. The first information is stored by the storage means until the lottery condition corresponding to the first information is satisfied by the acquisition means. The display means displays the first identification information indicating the result of determination by the yes-no determination means and the second identification information indicating the number of pieces of first information stored in the storage means. A predetermined number of symbols are selected as the second identification information from a plurality of preset symbols, and the symbols selected by the symbol selection means are arranged in a predetermined direction for each first information stored in the storage means and displayed Is displayed by the second identification information selection display means. The first display area of the display means for displaying the first identification information and the second display area of the display means for displaying the second identification information are respectively set by the display area setting means. In the display area setting means, the sizes of the first display area and the second display area are respectively changed by the display area setting means based on the number of pieces of first information stored in the storage means. Thereby, the size of the display area can be appropriately changed according to the number of pieces of second identification information to be displayed, and the display area can be effectively used. Therefore, the player can comfortably play the game, and can be prevented from being bored with the game.

<Feature H group>
It has a main control means for executing game control and a slave control means for executing game control based on a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the start condition. And acquisition means for acquiring the first information, and a pass / fail judgment means for judging the success or failure of the lottery game based on the establishment of the drawing conditions for the first information acquired by the acquisition means, and the result of And an effect signal for determining an effect based on the result of the determination on the basis of the determination result of the determination based on the determination result of the determination on the basis of the determination result of the determination unit. The slave control means generates the effect signal generating means to generate, the memory means for storing the first information until the lottery condition is satisfied, and the slave control means based on the fact that the first information is stored in the memory means. 1 information signal First information signal generation means for generating the first information signal generation means, and prior success or failure judgment signal generation means for generating the preliminary success or failure judgment signal based on the first information and notifying the , And the secondary control means displays, on the first display means, first display means for displaying identification information indicating a yes / no determination result based on the yes / no determination signal output from the main control means. Display control means for dynamically displaying identification information, dynamic display mode storage means for storing a plurality of different dynamic display modes for dynamically displaying the identification information, and main control means from the dynamic display mode storage means Dynamic display mode determination means for determining one dynamic display mode based on the above-mentioned effect signal, and the storage means indicated by the first information signal based on the reception of the first information signal The above is stored A second display means for displaying second identification information indicating the number of pieces of information, and a prior information storage means for storing prior information for each establishment of the start condition based on the prior yes or no determination signal In the gaming machine, the second identification information is constituted by a symbol array displayed by a plurality of symbols having a predetermined order, and the display means is provided with a number display area for displaying the respective second identification information and The symbol display area has a symbol display area capable of displaying a plurality of symbols, and the slave control means displays the second identification information based on the prior information from the symbol array. A symbol determining means for determining symbols and determining a combination of symbols for notifying the player of the content of the prior information by a combination of symbols composed of the plurality of second identification information, and corresponding to the second identification information Before the first information to be The display position of the second identification information is displayed corresponding to the number of new first information based on the change in the number of the first information stored in the storage unit based on the establishment of the lottery condition. At least one of the number display area is determined and displayed in the number display area when the display position changing means changes the position and the identification information is dynamically displayed in a specific dynamic display mode. A game machine H1 comprising: re-symbol determination means for determining again a combination of symbols to be displayed and displaying the symbol combination in the symbol display area.

  According to the gaming machine H1, in the main control means that executes control of the game, the first information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the start condition. Based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the first game acquired by the acquiring means is subjected to the lottery judgment of the lottery game. A yes / no decision signal generation means generates a yes / no decision signal for notifying the secondary control means of the yes / no decision result of the yes / no decision means. Based on the determination result of the success or failure determination means, the effect signal generation means generates an effect signal for determining an effect based on the determination result. The first information is stored by the storage means until the lottery condition is established. Based on the fact that the first information is stored in the storage means, the first information signal is generated by the first information signal generation means in the slave control means. Before the lottery condition is established, a priori pass / fail judgment signal based on the first information is generated by the priori pass / fail judgment signal generating means and notified to the sub control means. In the secondary control means, based on the yes / no decision signal output from the main control means, identification information indicating the yes / no decision result is displayed by the first display means. The identification information is dynamically displayed by the display control means on the first display means. A plurality of different dynamic display modes for dynamically displaying identification information are stored by the dynamic display mode storage means. One dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the effect signal from the dynamic display mode storage means from the main control means. Based on the reception of the first information signal, second identification information indicating the number of pieces of first information stored in the storage means indicated by the first information signal is displayed by the second display means. Prior information is stored by the prior information storage means each time the starting condition is established, based on the prior success / failure determination signal. The second identification information is configured by symbol rows displayed with a plurality of symbols having a predetermined order. In the display means, the respective second identification information is displayed in the number display area, and a symbol display area capable of displaying a plurality of symbols is provided in the number display area. In the slave control means, the symbol to be displayed as the second identification information is determined by the symbol determination means based on the prior information from the symbol row, and the content of the prior information is a combination of symbols composed of a plurality of second identification information. A combination of symbols to be notified to the player is determined. The display position of the second identification information is new based on the change in the number of the first information stored in the storage unit based on the satisfaction of the lottery condition of the first information corresponding to the second identification information. It is changed by the display position changing means to the display position corresponding to the number of information. When the identification information is dynamically displayed in a specific dynamic display mode, at least one of the number display areas is determined, and the combination of the symbols displayed in the number display area is again determined by the re-pattern determination means It is determined and displayed in the symbol display area. Thus, the player can expect the symbol displayed in the number display area to be re-varied by displaying the specific dynamic display mode. Thus, the player can enjoy the advance information notified by the second identification information as well as the display mode displayed in the specific dynamic display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early in the game.

  In the gaming machine H1, the slave control means moves a predetermined number of symbols of the second identification information based on the change in the display position of the second identification information by the display position changing means. A game machine H2 characterized by having movement display means for displaying.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the slave control means, the symbol row of the second identification information is moved and displayed by the movement display means with the number of predetermined symbols based on the display position changing means changing the display position of the second identification information. Therefore, the player can determine in advance the display mode of the symbol row of the second identification information due to the change of the display position, and enjoy the player to predict the display manner of the symbol row of the second identification information Has the effect of being able to

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the specific dynamic display mode is set so as to be easily selected by the effect signal generated when the determination result by the success or failure determination means is out of the case of a hit. A game machine H3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, a specific dynamic display mode is more likely to be selected by the effect signal generated when the determination result by the propriety determination means is out than in the winning case Since the setting is made, the player can enjoy the display mode of the second identification information when the dynamic display mode in which it is difficult to have the expectation to the jackpot is displayed, and the player is bored with the game. It has the effect of being able to prevent

  Each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed on a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the winning opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  Each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (1st display means, 2nd display means)
110 Main control unit (main control means)
113 Voice lamp control device (part of slave control means)
114 Display control device (display control means)
203 RAM (storage means)
222 ROM (part of dynamic display mode storage means)
223 RAM (prior information storage means)
S305 Pass / Fail Judgment Means S310 Effect Signal Generation Means S311 Part of Pass / Fail Judgment Signal Generation Means S402 Acquisition Means S405 Part of First Information Signal Generation Means S408, S410, S411 Prior Pass / Fail Judgment Signal Generation Means S1703 Dynamic Display Mode Determination Means S1770 Part S1780 of display position change means Part S1834 of symbol determination means Re-symbol determination means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, a lottery is performed along with a winning of the game ball to the starting opening, and after a predetermined symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the display device, a lottery game is performed to stop and display the symbol indicating the lottery result Ru. If the game ball is further prized at the starting opening while the predetermined symbol is fluctuating, the right to execute the lottery game is held for a predetermined number of times, and the symbol indicating the number of held pieces is displayed on the display device.

JP 2012-239732 A

In this type of pachinko machines, there has been a problem that get bored to Yu skills.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing the Yu skill person will come saturated in a game.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve the object, based on the establishment of acquisition conditions, an acquisition unit for acquiring first information, stores plural allow the first information acquired by the acquiring means of their and Do storage means, a determination means for performing determination based on the first information stored in the storage unit, a first display means in which the first identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means is displayed A display control means for causing the first display means to dynamically display the first identification information, and a second display for displaying second identification information corresponding to the number of the first information stored in the storage means Means, and a display mode determining means for determining a display mode of the second identification information displayed on the second display means, wherein the display mode determining means is displayed based on establishment of a predetermined condition. Of the plurality of second identification information It is possible to determine a notification display mode in which it is possible to notify judgment information corresponding to the judgment result on the dynamically displayed first identification information by combining a plurality of parts without each other. It is configured .

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the acquiring means for acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the acquiring condition, the memory means capable of storing a plurality of the first information acquired by the acquiring means, and the memory means A determination means for performing determination based on the first information stored in the storage means, a first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and a first display means A display control means for dynamically displaying the first identification information, a second display means for displaying second identification information corresponding to the number of the first information stored in the storage means, and And a display mode determining means for determining a display mode of the second identification information displayed on the display means, wherein the display mode determining means is configured to display a plurality of the displayed second modes based on establishment of a predetermined condition. 2 At least a part of the identification information It is possible to determine a notification display mode in which it is possible to notify judgment information corresponding to the judgment result on the dynamically displayed first identification information by combining a plurality of them. It is a thing .

Therefore, the effect there Ru that it can be prevented from being tired of the game.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically area | region division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is a figure which illustrated the display screen of the actual main display area. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display screen of the actual sub display area, (b) is a figure showing a list of normal holding symbols among the holding symbols, (c) is a holding symbol Among them, it is a diagram showing a list of special reserved symbols, (d) is a diagram showing a sub symbol out of the reserved symbol. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display mode of the holding symbol when the number of holdings is one, (b) is a figure which illustrated the display mode of the holding symbol when the number of holdings is two, (C) is a figure which illustrated the display mode of the reservation symbol when the number of reservations is three. (A) And (b) is a figure which illustrated the display mode of an example of a hit reservation symbol. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol, and (b) is the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol It is a schematic diagram which showed the correspondence relationship typically, (c) is a figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main control apparatus, (d) has schematically represented the content of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus. FIG. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing a temporary symbol selection table, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing a holding symbol lottery table. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed the retention symbol selection table typically, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the loss retention symbol selection table typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the model which showed an example of the display data table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed the transfer data table typically, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed an example of a pending | holding display data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding display update process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the suspension transfer processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the temporary holding symbol selection processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation symbol selection processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding number display update process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which shows the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device . (A) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display mode of the display screen when the pending number is 0 in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a display screen when the pending number is 1 in 2nd Embodiment It is the figure which illustrated the display mode of (c) is the figure which illustrated the display mode of the display screen when the number of pending | holding numbers in 2nd Embodiment is two. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display mode of the display screen when the number of pending | holding numbers is 3 in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a display screen when the number of pending | holding number in 2nd Embodiment is four. It is the figure which illustrated the display mode of. (A) And (b) is a figure which illustrated the display mode of the display screen when the number of pending | holding numbers is 3 in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed the coordinate of the display screen of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the coordinate selection table of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the coordinate selection table of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the display area setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display mode of the reservation symbol of the number of pending | holding numbers in 3rd Embodiment per 3rd, and (b) is a display mode of the 2nd chance number display of the pending | holding number in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the various counters of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment, (b) shows typically the content of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the starting winning a prize process 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding display update process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flow chart which showed pending transfer processing 2 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the winning a prize command reception processing which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control control equipment in 3rd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed the list of the reservation symbol row in 4th Embodiment, (b) is the figure shown about the field of the display screen in a 4th embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed the display mode of the retention symbol at the time of 1 number of retention of a prize in 4th Embodiment, and (b) is a display mode of 1 number of suspension symbol stop in 4th Embodiment. FIG. (A) is a figure which showed the display mode of the reservation symbol at the time of a prize number 2 prize-winning in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a display mode of 2 suspension symbol number stop in 4th Embodiment. FIG. (A) is a figure which showed the display mode of the reservation symbol at the time of a prize number 3 prize-winning in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a display mode of 3 suspension symbol stop in the 4th embodiment. FIG. (A) is a figure which showed the display mode of the retention symbol at the time of a prize number of 4 holding in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a display mode of the suspension number stop of 4 pieces in 4th Embodiment. FIG. (A) is a figure showing the display mode of the retention symbol at the time of digestion of the number of reservations 3 pieces in the fourth embodiment, and (b) shows the display mode of the retention symbol per second number in the fourth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a figure showing the display mode of the reservation symbol at the time of holding 3 pieces of holding number in a 4th embodiment, and (b) is the display at the time of reservation number 2 digestion of a holding number in a 4th embodiment It is the figure which showed the aspect. It is a figure showing the display mode of the reservation design at the time of number 2 and 3 pieces of continuous holding prizes in a 4th embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the content of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the reservation reach lottery table of the pachinko machine in a 4th embodiment, and (b) shows typically the reach reserve symbol selection table of a pachinko machine in a 4th embodiment. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the pending | holding fluctuation display data selection table of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the timer interruption processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding display update process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the retention design display processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the holding | maintenance fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reach reserve display processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding 3 display process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding 2 display process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding 1 display process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding number display update process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 3 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flow chart which showed pending change pattern command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 4th embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed the time of the effective lines 1-3 in 5th Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the time of the effective lines 2-4 in 5th Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed the time of the effective lines 1-3 in 5th Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the time of the effective lines 2-4 in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed winning a prize command processing 2 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing pending display update processing 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding number display update process 3 performed by this. (A) is the figure which showed the time of the effective lines 1-3 in another example of 5th Embodiment, (b) shows the time of the effective lines 1-3 change in another example of 5th Embodiment. FIG. (A) is a figure showing the display mode of the reservation symbol at the time of four pieces of reservation number in a 6th embodiment, and (b) is the display of the reservation symbol at the time of three pieces of reservation number in a 6th embodiment It is the figure which showed the aspect. (A) is a figure which showed typically the content of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment, (b) is a figure which showed the loss retention symbol selection table 2 in 6th Embodiment. . It is the flowchart which showed the timer interruption processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control unit in 6th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 6 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flow chart which showed reservation symbol selection processing 2 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 6th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding display update process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display mode of the reservation design before normal reach establishment in a 7th embodiment, and (b) is a display when the selection information effect after normal reach establishment is performed in a 7th embodiment. It is the figure which illustrated the aspect. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display mode by which a reservation symbol is re-varied by the selection alerting effect in a 7th embodiment, and (b) is a hit display after re-variation by a selection alerting effect in a 7th embodiment. It is the figure which illustrated the displayed mode. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display mode after the holding symbol was re-varied by the selection notification production in 7th Embodiment, (b) is after re-variation by a selection notification production in 7th Embodiment. It is the figure which illustrated the display mode when one piece is digested. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 7 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding display update process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the re-variation process which is one process in the pending display update process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flow chart which showed reservation symbol selection processing 3 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding number display update process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 4 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 7th Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The player can change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or change the content of the effect of super reach, for example, by the player. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, 3 of “town stage,” “empty stage,” and “island stage”. There are two stages. Then, various effects such as fluctuation effects and reach effects that are performed along with entering the first ball entry port 64 described later (start winning) are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage It is done. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the variable effects are not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, "town stage" → "empty stage → → "island stage" → "in the city stage" → ... It changes repeatedly in the following order. Further, immediately after the power is turned on, a "town stage" is set as an initial stage.

  On the other hand, when the normal reach effect is started, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach during the normal reach when developing from the normal reach to the super reach. If the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2), and the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor 51a, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance (Not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is set to ON, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of operation, and the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes in accordance with the, and thereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "two-and-a-box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, a windmill and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a first The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a wood screw from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed when the ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (first) when the ball passes the second entrance 67. 2) The lottery will be held. In the drawing of the special symbol performed for entering the first ball entrance 64, the determination of whether or not it is a big hit of the special symbol is performed, and when it is determined that the big symbol is a special symbol, the big hit type The determination of is also made. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is closed until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses) or 10 balls are won ) The opening is repeated five times (five rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, and therefore, a large number of prize balls are paid out from the normal time. As a jackpot type of special symbol, two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided, and after the end of the special game state as a added value after the jackpot end, on the game according to these jackpot types The player's value (game value) is given to the player.

  In addition, when a special symbol (the first symbol) is drawn, variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) Is displayed, the special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of ball entry is held up to four times at maximum, and the number of holding balls is the first symbol display It is shown by the device 37 and also in the third symbol display device 81. When the variation display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the lottery of the next special symbol is performed, and the variation display according to the lottery Is started. The special winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, is provided immediately below the first ball entry port 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player strikes a ball in an attempt to win a special winning opening 65a, so many balls enter the first ball entrance 64 as well. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the second ball entrance 67, a pass / fail determination of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is performed. When the symbol is hit normally, the motorized accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It will be in the state. That is, when it comes to the hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, and as a result, the drawing of the special symbol becomes easy to be performed.

  In addition, when the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83 and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed in the second symbol display device 83, the number of times of passage is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is the first symbol display device 37 , And is also shown in the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variation display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of holding balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed, and the variation display according to the lottery Is started.

  As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, there are provided two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B".

  If it becomes "big hit A", "big hit B", it will become special game state (16 R big hit) of the round number 16 rounds, and if it is "big hit A" as an added value after the big hit after that, it will be the next big hit In the meantime, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state of special symbol (during a special symbol oddity). On the other hand, if it is "big hit B", it will be a time saving state of a normal symbol until the lottery is executed 100 times (until fluctuation of the special symbol is started) after the big hit is finished.

  Here, the "special symbol high probability state" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, a so-called probability state of the special symbol (during the special symbol oddity), in other words, the special gaming state (16R jackpot) It is the state of the game which is easy to shift to). On the other hand, when it is not "high probability state of special symbol" is called "low probability state of special symbol", it is a state where jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of special symbol, that is, jackpot probability of special symbol is normal Indicates the condition (normal condition of special symbol). In addition, "time symbol of the ordinary symbol" (during the short period of the ordinary symbol) means that the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol is increased, and the gaming state in which the ball is easy to enter the first ball entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not "normal symbol time reduction state" is called "ordinary symbol normal state", which indicates that the probability of hitting the symbol is normal, that is, the probability of hitting is lower than during time saving. .

  As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in this embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot, the number of rounds at the jackpot and the probability variation period of the special symbol are made common, depending on the type of the jackpot "time symbol The period of becoming a "state" is changing. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or only a part of the type of jackpot may be changed. Also, for example, instead of changing the period in which the "time symbol of the normal symbol" is changed according to the type of jackpot, the time for opening the motorized part (not shown) attached to the first ball entrance 64, or once The number of times of opening the motorized part may be changed in the hit of the normal symbol. Moreover, in this embodiment, after the big hit end, it becomes "high probability state of special symbol" and "time saving state of normal symbol", but after "high probability state of special symbol" is finished, "time symbol of normal symbol" "" May be configured.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power supply or the like, it is always set to the "special symbol low probability state". After that, when it becomes the jackpot of the special symbol, it shifts to "the high probability state of the special symbol", and shifts to "the time saving state of the normal symbol".

  A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, at the upper right side upper part (right upper part of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform fluctuation display by indicating whether or not the drawing of the special symbol performed in conjunction with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is being executed, or performing fluctuation display or fluctuation As a stop symbol after the end, the special symbol (the first symbol) according to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown in the lighted state or the variation of the ball entering the first entrance 64 has not been executed. The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display of the special symbol (the first symbol) is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of ball entry is held up to four times at maximum The holding ball number is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entry slot 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of times of suspension is not limited to four times, and is three times or less Alternatively, it may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in the jackpot and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the luminescent color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states (high probability state of special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 with few LED by the combination of the luminescent color Or, it can display the time of the normal pattern, etc.). In addition, LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a big hit according to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) The special symbol (the first symbol) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is disposed on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (start winning combination), the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed in the first symbol display device 37 using it as a trigger. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inches in size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right The columns are displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is used to display the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is performed according to the request. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten main symbols attached with the numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, and the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is The front of the wooden box is almost fully filled with large numbers. On the other hand, the main symbol with an even number (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached symbol imitating a character such as a furoshiki or helmet, which is almost full on the front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added are aligned. Moreover, if it is "big hit B", the variable display in which the main symbol to which "0,2,4,6,8" which is an even number is added aligns is performed. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically, and the upper 1/3 of the main display area Dm where the third symbol is variably displayed, the lower side 2/3 has become the sub display area Ds which displays the holding symbol which shows the number of holding balls.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed on the upper, middle, and lower three stages for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 at each game. Is displayed. A large hit moving image is displayed as a big hit if it is aligned with a combination of big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided vertically below the main display area Dm. Among these, the small areas Ds1 to Ds4 are areas for displaying the number of holding balls which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which the variation has not been executed among the balls entered at the first entrance 64.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. The main symbols of each third symbol are composed of symbol rows 1 to 9, and are scrolled in order from top to bottom.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to 4 times The reserved ball number is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small areas Ds1 to Ds4 of the sub display area Ds. The small areas Ds1 to Ds4 are each assigned a number indicating the number of holding balls, the small area Ds1 is “1” indicating the first holding order, and the small area Ds2 is the second holding order. In the small area Ds3 indicating "2" and "3" indicating the third of the holding order, and in the small area Ds4, "4" indicating the fourth of the holding order are displayed in the display area.

  In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entry slot 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of balls reserved is not limited to four times, and is three times The number of times may be set to five or more (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of the display of the number-of-hold ball number symbol in the sub-area Ds1, the number of number-of-hold balls is divided by a number into a part of the third symbol display device 81 or (For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol performed as the ball passes through the second ball entry port 67 is being executed by a lighting state, or As a stop symbol after the end of fluctuation, the normal symbol (the second symbol) according to the lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by the lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "o"), the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 operates for a predetermined time. It becomes a state (it is open | released), and as a result, it is comprised so that it may be in the state which a ball | bowl easily enters into the 1st ball entrance 64. FIG. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to four times, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and also displayed in the second symbol holding lamp 84 as well. Ru. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display device 37 And you may make it carry out using a part of 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. Similarly, lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Moreover, the passage of the ball in the second ball entrance 67 is not limited to four times the maximum number of holding balls, as in the first ball entrance 64, and is three times or less, or five times or more (For example, eight times) may be set. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 through which a ball can enter is disposed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A lottery of special symbols is made by the main control device 110, and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first ball entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls enter.

  Below the first ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65 is disposed, and at a substantially central portion thereof, a horizontally-long rectangular specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after the predetermined time (variation time) has passed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (a jackpot of 16 rounds) in which a large amount of prize balls are paid out from the normal time. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is lit in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning A game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times as a special gaming state is triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided. Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to an unshown ball discharge path through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 8) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 8), for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About display pattern of reserved symbol>
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5 (a), a reserved symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds as a display mode for informing the number of the reserved balls stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. As the type of the holding symbol, it is configured to indicate one holding by displaying the three holding symbols side by side. As a reserved symbol, a normal reserved symbol (refer to FIG. 5 (b)) showing a reserved symbol for notifying either the big hit A or the big hit B for advance notice (refer to FIG. 5 (b)) The figure (refer FIG.5 (d)) of the shellfish which is FIG.5 (c) and the sub-pattern is set, respectively. When the gaming ball enters the ball entry port 64 and the holding ball is generated while the third symbol is variably displayed in the main display area Dm, up to four balls are stored as the holding ball. Based on the establishment of the holding balls, three holding symbols are selected and displayed in the holding symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds4 corresponding to the number of holding balls.

  This reserved symbol is displayed, and when the same reserved symbol is aligned three on any of the valid lines H1 to H5, the player is informed that the result of determination of the success or failure of the third symbol being changed is a hit. In the present embodiment, although a hit is notified, the present invention is not limited to that, and may be configured to notify the type of reach, the type of a character to be displayed, the number of gaming balls that can be acquired in a big hit game, and the like.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it comprised so that one holding could be displayed combining three holding symbols, it may combine not only it but four holding symbols, but the number of holding symbols combined by lottery is It may be configured to be variable.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it was set as the structure which performs the effect which alert | reports the propriety determination result of the 3rd symbol by a reservation symbol, it does not restrict to it and notifies the display mode of the 3rd symbol displayed by the 3rd symbol in advance. It is good also as composition. Specifically, a symbol which is a reach display mode in the third symbol may be configured to be notified by displaying the corresponding reserved symbol in advance in the reach display mode.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 6-7, an example of the display mode of a holding symbol is demonstrated taking an actual number of holdings into an example. FIG. 6A is a diagram showing an example of the suspension display in the case where the number of suspension is one. As shown in FIG. 6A, when one gaming ball is won in the entrance 64 while the third symbol is fluctuating, three reserved symbols are displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds1. After that, when the game ball wins the entrance 64 further, it is informed that the number of holding balls is 2 as shown in FIG. 6 (b) by displaying the holding symbol in the holding symbol display area Ds2 .

  Next, when the gaming ball is further prized in the entrance 64, as shown in FIG. 6C, it is notified that the number of holding balls is 3 by holding symbols being displayed in the holding symbol display area Ds3. Be done. Furthermore, when the gaming ball is won in the entrance 64 and the number of holding balls is four, as shown in FIG. 7A, the symbol of the egg is displayed in the holding symbol display area Ds4.

  When the third symbol in motion is a hit, as shown in FIG. 7 (b), three shark symbols are aligned and displayed on the effective line H1, or as shown in FIG. 7 (c), the effective line H5 Three dolphin patterns are displayed on the screen. In addition, when displaying a hit, it is displayed by stopping and displaying the same symbol in any of the effective lines H1-H5 (refer FIG. 4 (a)).

  In addition, when the hit classification of the 3rd symbol in fluctuation is big hit A, a normal retention symbol or a special retention symbol is displayed. Also, when the special hold symbol is displayed, it is informed that the jackpot type of the third symbol is the jackpot A.

<Electric Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electric Configuration of Main Controller 110>
The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  In main controller 110, lottery of special symbols, lottery of ordinary symbols, setting of display in first symbol display device 37, setting of display in second symbol display device 83, and setting of display in third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. Used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to

  In order to select the jackpot type of the special symbol and the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the special symbol, in the drawing of the special symbol and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first contact type counter C2 used for the first, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the out of special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first contact random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 17), and some counters are updated periodically in the main processing (see FIG. 25). The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas is a first ball entrance The values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64, respectively. The RAM 203 is also provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas), and in each of these areas, a ball is on the left and right The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored according to the timing of passing through any one of the second ball entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 299) It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17) is executed, and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 25).

  The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the storage area 203a. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the special symbol big hit random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is special When it agrees with the value of the random number which becomes the jackpot set by the symbol jackpot random number table, it is determined that the special symbol is the jackpot. In addition, this special symbol big hit random number table is for high probability of special symbol (period during the low probability state of special symbol) and high probability of high probability of becoming special jackpot from the low probability (special symbol) And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot. The special symbol big hit random number table (not shown) for high probability of special symbol and the special symbol big hit random number table (not shown) for low probability of special symbol are in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110. Provided in

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) And return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol hold of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number to be a big hit of a special symbol, that is, if it is a random number to be a special symbol out of order, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is at the time of removal of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that will be the big win of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 The display mode is for the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first random number counter C1, at the low probability of the special symbol, there are three random number values that become the big wins of the special symbol, and the random number "7, 107, 282" is the special symbol for low probability It is stored in the jackpot random number table. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 300, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 3, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1/100".

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 30 random number values that become the jackpot of the special symbol, and the value is "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 "is a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability Is stored in As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 300, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 30, so the probability of being a big symbol of a special symbol is "1/10".

  In the present embodiment, the random number value for the big hit stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for the low probability time, and the random number value for the big hit stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for the high probability time In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers are set to be the respective jackpots. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 as a random number value that will be a jackpot, the random number value may be input from the outside, and it may be easy to illegally attract a jackpot. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state of special symbol or low probability state of special symbol), change the random number value to be a big hit Since it can be made difficult to predict the random number value which becomes the jackpot of a special symbol by this, suppression against fraud can be aimed at.

  Further, the value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 10A, the jackpot type when the random number value is “0 to 59” in the first hit type counter C2 is “jackpot A”. In addition, the jackpot type when the value is “60 to 99” is “jackpot B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. In addition, the random number value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the first type counter C2 is set by the special symbol jackpot type table (not shown), and this table is It is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reach is generated, the final stop design shifts by only one before and after the reach design. "Launch front and back out of reach" (for example, 98, 99) and "Leach other than front and back out of reach" (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop design stops at other than front and back Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected with "complete out" (e.g., a range of 0 to 89) in which a reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol holding ball storage of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the area 203a.

  In addition, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Moreover, in this embodiment, this table is divided into those for high probability of special symbol and low probability for special symbol, and the range of the random number value set for each stop type of out according to the table Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

  For example, in the high probability state, a table for high probability when the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is wide 0 to 89 so that reach effect is not selected more than necessary since jackpots are easily generated Is selected, and "complete removal" is likely to be selected. In this table, "longitudinal outreach" narrows to 98, 99 and "non back and forth out of reach" also narrows to 90 to 97, making "front and back out of reach" and "reach other than back and forth out of reach" difficult to select. In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79. Table is selected and it becomes difficult to select "completely out".

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than back and forth deviation” is wide as 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach display with a long rendering time, so it is possible to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 and the fluctuation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear outreach” is set to 98, 99.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). It is acquired at the timing when the game ball enters the first entrance 64 and is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110. A rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 Ru. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 25) to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table (not shown) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 There is.

  In the fluctuation pattern table 202b, for example, as a fluctuation pattern for detachment, "displacement (for a long time)," "displacement (for a short time)," "displacement normal reach" various, "disparate super reach" various, "disparate special “Leach” various types are defined, and “common normal reach” various types, “shared super reach type” various types, and “shared special reach type” various types are defined as the variation patterns of jackpot A and jackpot B sharing. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type).

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67 which is either left or right. It is acquired at the time of being stored, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the ordinary symbol per random symbol table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the ordinary symbol When it agrees with the value of the random number which is set by the per random number table, it is determined that the symbol is normal. In addition, this normal symbol per random number table is for low probability of normal symbol (during normal condition of normal symbol) and high probability of high probability of being hit of normal symbol from the low probability (of normal symbol) It is divided into two types, one for the time-saving state), and the number of random numbers for making a big hit included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be hit.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (b), at the time of low probability of the normal symbol, there are 24 random values that hit the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in the random number per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

  If the ball passes through the second entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 obtains a normal symbol. Is displayed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as), and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "0.5 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, there are 200 random number values that become the jackpot of the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the random number per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 200, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1 / 1.2."

  If the ball passes through the second entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 selects the normal symbol. Is displayed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as), and the first entrance 64 is opened “one second × twice”. Thus, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds" as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and furthermore, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first ball entry port 64. In addition, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit or not from the value (random number value) of the second random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for “one second × 2 times” when the normal symbol comes into contact, but it is opened. The time and the number may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17). And is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 25).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to various counters shown in FIG. 9, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 25), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 23) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 23) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 has a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a middle time It has a counter 203 e and other memory areas 203 z.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas is a first random number counter C1. The respective values of the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired at the timing when the ball reaches the first entry slot 64 (start winning), and the acquired data includes four reserve areas ( Among the vacant areas of the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of a special symbol is performed, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is an execution area Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area, determination such as drawing of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the ball wins to the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), and as soon as each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is obtained according to the starting winning, the original special symbol Aside from the jackpot lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the values of the acquired counters C1 to C3. As described above, before the drawing of the original special symbol is performed, various kinds of information obtained when the original drawing is performed based on the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to the starting winning combination. The prediction of the information will be described later, when the lottery result of the special symbol is read ahead. In addition, a pass / fail, stop classification, a fluctuation pattern etc. correspond as various information.

  Then, when the pre-reading is finished, a winning information command including various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the pass / fail, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information to save the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. Store in 223a.

  In the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the result of judgment of success / failure (pre-reading judgment) determined in S407 of the start winning process (S106 in FIG. 19) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 described later is also held. It is respectively stored in the first to fourth areas.

  The regular symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes either the left or right second entrance port 67, and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  It should be noted that when data is shifted from the first holding area to the execution area, the first holding area becomes empty, so similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the winning combinations stored in the other holding areas A shift process is performed to pack data into a reserve area with a small area number. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination) It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and the ball enters the first entrance 64 and 1 to the maximum value 4 each time the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. Are added (see S404 in FIG. 16). On the other hand, the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 18).

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 18 and S405 in FIG. 19). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the holding ball of the variation display held on the main control device 110 by the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203 c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. Thereby, the number of holding balls of the variable display managed by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 is the number of holding balls of the actual variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from that, it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the number of balls command received next.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send the ball number command and the display symbol command for display. The display control device 114 holds the holding symbols in the holding symbol display area Ds1 to Ds4 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the holding ball number command for display, the number of holding balls notified by the holding symbol command for display, and the holding symbol. Display

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is the number of holding balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entry hole 67 It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 each time the ball passes through the second entry port 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 22). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 20).

  When the ball passes either the left or right second entrance 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number per hit The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 22). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes either the left or right second entrance 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Not (S703 in FIG. 22: No).

  The time saving counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol Indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol if the value of the time counter 203 e is zero. At this time, the initial value of the counter 203e is set to zero, and a lottery for a special symbol is performed in the main control unit 110, and a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set every time it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot Be done. That is, when it becomes the big hit of the special symbol, the value according to the big hit type is newly set regardless of how many the value of the time-and-time counter 203 e is.

  Specifically, it is set to 100 when it is determined that the "big hit B" (see S214 in FIG. 18). Thereafter, 1 is subtracted each time the variation effect of the special symbol is finished, until the value of the hour / minute counter 203 e becomes 0 (S 217 in FIG. 18).

  When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time-sinking counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, a lottery for a normal symbol based on a random symbol table for high probability time. On the other hand, if the value of the time-span-middle counter 203e is 0, the lottery for the regular symbol is conducted based on the random symbol per symbol table for low probability (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 21).

  The other memory area 203z is an area in which various other flags, data, etc. required for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to control the pachinko machine 10 are stored.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208 Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 23) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

<Electric Configuration of Audio Lamp Controller 113>
The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) Control of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, or at the time of super reach The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores control programs necessary for various controls, various data, and the like. As part of that, as shown in FIG. 10 (d), the temporary holding symbol selection table 222a, the holding symbol lottery table 222b, the holding symbol selection table 222c, the effect content command selection table 222d, the out-of-hold holding symbol selection table 222e Each is set.

  The temporary holding symbol selection table 222a is a data table showing temporary holding symbols to be displayed in the holding symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds4 in the initial state when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. Since the voice lamp control device 113 has a configuration in which data is not backed up when the power is shut off, the data is initialized. Therefore, it can not be determined what holding symbol is displayed before the power is turned off. In such a case, it is possible to notify the player that a temporary holding symbol is displayed by displaying a temporary holding symbol corresponding to each holding number as shown in FIG. 11A. The hold 4 indicates that a star-shaped symbol is displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds 4 instead of the symbol of the egg. In addition, since the command which shows the number of holding balls is output about the number of holdings in the process of S911 of a starting process (refer FIG. 24), it becomes a structure which can be discriminate | determined at the time of power activation.

  The held symbol lottery table 222b is a lottery table for drawing whether or not to display a held symbol with a held symbol, as shown in FIG. 11 (b). If the value of the effect counter 223 f is any one of “0 to 100”, it is determined that the hit display for displaying the held symbol in the held symbol lottery is executed. On the other hand, when the effect counter 223f is any one of "101 to 199", it is determined in the holding symbol lottery that the off indication displaying the deviation holding symbol is executed.

  As a result, even when the third symbol being changed is a hit, the hit symbol is not always displayed, and the third symbol is a big hit even though the off hold symbol is displayed. Can give the player unexpectedness. Therefore, even when the out-of-hold holding symbol is displayed, the player can continue to play the game with the expectation of the jackpot.

  The holding symbol selection table 222c is a lottery table for determining the type of the holding symbol to be displayed when it is determined in the holding symbol lottery to display the hit holding symbol as shown in FIG. 12A. . In the reserved symbol selection table 222d, the symbols to be displayed are respectively allocated by the effect counter 223f depending on whether the jackpot type (symbol type) of the third symbol in fluctuation is jackpot A (positive variation) or jackpot B (normal) It is done. In the case of a definite variation, all the holding symbols (except shell patterns) are set to be selected, and in the normal case, the normal holding symbol is set to be selected.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (b), the off-hold reserved symbol selection table 222e is a selection table for selecting the off-hold pending symbol (three on-hold symbols corresponding to the number of pending balls reporting off). A combination of symbols to be displayed on the display positions X1 to X3 of the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds4 is set, and the effect counter 223f is allocated to each combination. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to easily select a combination of reserved symbols to be displayed in the notification mode of the outing.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the combination was set beforehand, you may comprise it so that it may select not only that but each symbol by lottery. In this case, a dedicated non-synchronous selection counter may be set and selected for each symbol.

  In the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223a, a change start flag 223b, a stop type selection flag 223c, a big hit determination flag 223d, a holding symbol storage area 223e, and a presentation counter 223f At least the SW valid time counter 223g and the other memory area 223z are provided.

  Similar to the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control unit 110, the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter which counts and holds the number of balls (waiting number) of the holding of the fluctuation effect held in the main control unit 110 up to four times.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of holding balls with the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variation display is added by entering the ball into first entrance 64, or the variation display in the special symbol is executed in main controller 110. When the number of holding balls is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the holding ball number command. The symbol holding ball number counter 223a is stored (see S1409 and S1412 in FIG. 28). Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a is used for displaying the number-of-holding-balls symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of {circle over (1)}, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball number for the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled to display the symbols in the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds4 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a is changed while being synchronized with the special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the holding symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds4 of the third symbol display device 81 is also changed while being synchronized with the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 Can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The fluctuation start flag 223b is set to ON when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1402 in FIG. 28), and the fluctuation display setting in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. It is set to off (see S1702 in FIG. 33). When the fluctuation start flag 223b is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223c is set to ON when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1405 in FIG. 28), and the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1706 in FIG. 33).

  The jackpot determination flag 223 d is a flag indicating that a jackpot winning command in which the success or failure determination result is a jackpot is received from the main control device 110. The jackpot determination flag 223d is set to on in the process of S1411 of the command determination process (S1312 in FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and is set to off in the process of S1413. The jackpot determination flag 223d is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial setting when the power is turned on.

  The reserved symbol storage area 223e is a storage area in which data of the reserved symbols of the respective reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds4 selected is stored. In the reserved symbol storage area 223e, each symbol corresponding to the display positions X1 to X3 of the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds4 is stored for each suspension. In addition, when the reserved symbol data is newly stored or the data in the reserved symbol storage area 223e is shifted by the termination of the suspension, the change flag is set to ON. In addition, the change flag is set to off when the display symbol of the holding symbol is updated.

  The effect counter 223 f is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 199. The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selection of a hold symbol, hold symbol lottery, and the like. The effect counter 223 f is repeatedly updated in the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The SW effective time counter 223 g is a counter for measuring the time for which the operation of the frame button 22 is set to be effective. In addition, when a fluctuation pattern command is received from main controller 110, SW fluctuation time counter 223g has its fluctuation time set (executed in the process of S1403 in FIG. 28).

  The RAM 223 further includes another storage area 223z for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 30) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation display (variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81) Control). The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 23) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

<Electric Configuration of Display Control Device 114>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, described later, in the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237 Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. The second program storage area 234a1 for storing and the character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, each holding symbol shown in FIG. 5 (b) to (d) And at least the stored symbol selection table 234a3.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234 a or the like. Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is used as one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234 d, the ROM controller 234 b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234 c from the NOR ROM 234 d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 36) executed after the boot process by the boot program (see S1801 in FIG. 32) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is performed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 13) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 38B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on time variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power on, and the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect when it is done.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 36).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at the time of the power on, and the main image at the time of the power on (in this embodiment, The third symbol display device 81 displays characters (power-on characters).

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power on. On the display screen, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" in the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "X" in the same position as the "○" symbol, fluctuation period The display is repeated alternately. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. The result is judged, and in the case of "big hit of special symbol", the "○" image is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the change production, and in the case of "out of special symbol", the "×" image is after the stop of the change production Display for a fixed period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the power change image area when the power is turned on. The power-on-time change image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on time change image resident on 235b, and the “o” and “x” images are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately it can.

  Returning to FIG. 13, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) having the numerals "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, reside. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64, although the fluctuation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, the fluctuation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unintended condition.

  In the third symbol area 235d, characters such as a main symbol with a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a symbol with a rear symbol, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out image data previously resident. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message pictorial area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the graphic area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is determined in advance.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, variation effects, round effects A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. When the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B If it is either, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally displayed stopped. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  The ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special game state, and informs the player of the game value (short period of time of the normal symbol) to be given to the player after the end of the jackpot, or the special symbol being held. It is an effect for informing the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the lottery.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next change effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one change effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. Note that if the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type indicates which of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage") is displayed, or the back surface A to C Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. Moreover, when specifying to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. Also, the range of the rear view image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear surface image different from the rear surface A to C, the rear surface image to be displayed is specified from the rear surface type.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 14). "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 16) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

<Pending display data table>
The hold display data table will be described with reference to FIG. As in the configuration of the display data table, the reservation display data table is data in which data necessary for display of the holding symbol is set in time series. As shown in FIG. 15 (b), the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds4 are set for the reserved symbols displayed on the display positions X1 to X4. Like the display data table, the hold display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233 d so that the drawing list is generated from the transfer data table. In addition, until a new pending display data table is set, the same pending display data table is repeatedly set in the drawing list so that the display pattern of the pending symbol is maintained.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15A is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of sprites used in effects specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Are described (addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 15A correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined to mean (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 12).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (FIG. In the example, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 16) described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 15A, when the pointer 233 f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 determines transfer data information defined in the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It adds to the created drawing list, and sends the drawing list after the addition to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display on the third symbol display device 81 the character of "initial setting" which is the image at power on (main image at power on and fluctuation image at power on). It is a flag. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main processing (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 231 (see S1805 in FIG. 36). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 44 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 38B). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 38B) and the simplified display setting process (figure in FIG. 38B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 38 (see S2109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 39 to 41) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 42 to 43) are performed.

  Also, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 of FIG. 44A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Since resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 44B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 45) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 16) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction for the image is described is generated. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 16) describing the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 16) described later (see FIG. 16) describing the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process for one frame (FIG. 42)), pointer update processing (see S3005 in FIG. 42) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. The transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer is to be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while creating (see FIG. 16), and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 16, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite, such as a design. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern) Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) , Character (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number symbol 1 (holding symbol 1), holding ball number symbol 2 (holding symbol 2), ..., error symbol (not shown), pre-reading effect Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of the notices 1 to 3).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process (FIG. Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3008 in FIG. 38). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" which indicates that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The update of the stored image data determination flag 233i is performed when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3517 in FIG. 45). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 45). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is zero, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is one. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 46).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 38B) is performed (see S3602 of FIG. 46).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

<Control Process Executed by MPU 201 of Main Control Device 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment) There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When 299, 99, 99, 239) are reached, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 while executing processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104), and thereafter, The start winning process associated with the winning on the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for performing display in the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106), and the through gate passes along with the passage of the ball at the second entrance port 67 A process is performed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 20 and 22. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device It is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81, and the like.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (S201). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: Yes), this processing ends.

  If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation A holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c from the holding ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223 .

  After setting the holding ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If has not passed (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol variation start process is executed, a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, according to the value of the first random number counter C1 it is determined whether or not the big win of the special symbol, and in the case of the big win of the special symbol, according to the value of the first type counter C2 Whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B occurs, the red LED is turned on. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variable display under execution in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether it is a jackpot of a special symbol (S211). If the lottery result this time is a big hit of the special symbol (S211: Yes), of the two types of big hit of the special symbol (big hit A, big hit B), it determines what the big hit type is (S212), big hit type If is the jackpot A, the setting regarding the jackpot A is executed (S213). In the setting relating to the jackpot A, the number of jackpot rounds (16 rounds in the present embodiment) and the probability variation jackpot are set (S213). In the case of the jackpot B, the setting of the jackpot round number (16 rounds in the present embodiment) and the number of time reductions (100 times in the present embodiment) are set (S214). Then, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S215), and the present process is ended.

  In the process of S211, if the current lottery result is the deviation of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S216). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203e is 1 or more (S216: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S217), and the process is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 (S216: No), the process of S221 is skipped and this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). The special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 18) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17), and the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. On the basis of the values of the various counters stored in the table, a lottery of “big hit of special symbol” or “out of special symbol” is made (decision determination), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 It is a process for determining the production pattern (the fluctuation production pattern) of the fluctuation production to be done.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired To do (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a high probability state (during a definite change) (S302). When in the high probability gaming state (S302: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability (S304).

  In the process of S304, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired. Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random value of 30 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability. As mentioned above, as a random value which becomes the big hit of the special symbol, “4, 11, 28, 38, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168 , 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 "are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the number of these rounds Is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol when the random numbers match. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S306.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) in the process of S302 (S302: No), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and for low probability Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol jackpot is acquired (S305). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random value of 3 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability. Three random numbers, "7, 107, 282", are set as the jackpot of the special symbol, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number of those hits. , Determined to be a jackpot of special symbols. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S306.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S304 or S305 is the jackpot of the special symbol (S306), and it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is (S306: Yes), The display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) (S307). Further, in order to cause the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S308). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S308, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, check the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the fluctuation pattern table (not shown), design fluctuation such as normal reach or super reach Determine the variation pattern (variation time). The relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is previously defined by this fluctuation pattern table.

  For example, as the fluctuation patterns for outliers, various types of “outside”, “normal reach out”, “super reach out”, and “special reach out” are defined. As the fluctuation pattern for jackpot A, various “permanent jackpot normal reach” various, “permanent jackpot super reach” various, “various jackpot special reach” various types are defined, as the fluctuation pattern for jackpot B “various normal jackpot normal reach” various , "Normal jackpot super reach" various, "normal jackpot special reach" various are defined.

  In the process of S306, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S306: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S309). In the process of S309, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and the display mode corresponding to the symbol is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of out of step is determined from the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (S310). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation pattern of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach or super reach based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determine the (variation time).

  When the process of S308 or S310 ends, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S308 or S310 is set (S311). A stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type (the stop type at the time of the big hit) is set (S312). The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 25). Ru. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S312 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) to determine whether or not the first ball entrance 64 has a winning (start winning), and there is a start winning. These are processes for executing hold processing of values indicated by various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding times N of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S402) . Then, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  And if there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: No) or if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). And the ball holding number command which shows the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c changed by calculation is set (S405).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 25) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c from the holding ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223 .

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S405, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first of the vacant holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entrance 64. It is a process for controlling the open time of the motorized part and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is in the middle of a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made in the second symbol display device 83. Included. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number M of holding the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, a process of shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b in order toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the time-span-middle counter 203 e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S 608). The hour-time counter 203e is a counter indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the time-shortening counter 203e is 1 or more, the time-saving state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal symbol If the value of the time counter 203 e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  If the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be less likely to hit. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (ie, in the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so the motorized prize associated with the first entrance 64 is opened. This is for the purpose of suppressing the entry of the ball intended to be won by the special winning opening 65a into the first ball entry port 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first ball entrance 64, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the first ball entrance 64 in the big hit of the special symbol, the first Many balls enter the ball entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of holding balls for the first ball inlet 64 is maximum (four times).

  In the process of S609, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number per symbol table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 7 (b)).

  In the process of S608, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607, Based on the symbol random number table for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the symbol is hit normally is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 7 (b)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is the hit of the normal symbol (S612), and if it is determined that the symbol is the normal symbol (S612: Yes) The display mode of the hit time is set (S613). In the process of S 613, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “o” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour and hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S614), and if the value of the hour and hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the current is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this embodiment, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible during the jackpot of the special symbol, even when the normal symbol is hit, it is the same as when the normal symbol is detached. The number of times of opening of the motorized part and the opening time thereof are set.

  In the process of S615, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, the first entry ball opening The opening period of the motorized accessory attached to 64 is set to one second, and the number of times of opening is set to two (S616), and the process proceeds to the processing of S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the motorized accessory accompanying the first ball inlet 64 is 0 The setting is made for 2 seconds, and the number of times of release is set to 1 (S617), and the processing shifts to the processing of S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is normally out (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour and hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the hour and hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S619: Yes), fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 The variation time of the display is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is ended. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short with "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and further Since the release period of the first ball entrance 64 becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first ball entrance 64.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). In addition, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621.

  In the process of S 622, when the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S 622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "o" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit It is set to be displayed. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out and the display mode is set by the processing of S 618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (displayed) in the second symbol display device 83 Are set to When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the second symbol display updating process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 25) is executed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is changed. The process is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

  Then, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing is a hit of the ordinary symbol Is determined (S624). If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol hit (S 624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electrically driven combination attached to the first ball entrance 64 is set (S 625), and this processing is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the motorized part is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the motorized part is performed when the motorized part opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 25) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the motorized part is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or S617 end. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S624 that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). The through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, and if the ball has passed, This is processing for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second ball entrance 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entry hole 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number M of holdings of variable display in the normal symbol) is obtained (S702) . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed the second entrance ball opening 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed the second entrance ball opening 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S703: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67 (S701: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is the first of the vacant hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 This process is ended by storing in the area of (S705). In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 24, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is set to ON (S904). If it is set to ON (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. Transition to On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not set to ON (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not generation information of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No), since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the processing shifts to S912 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S912. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the process of S1014 of FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S913, S914), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not set to ON (S904: No), occurrence information of the power-off is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal. For example (S907: Yes), while holding the backed up data in the RAM 203, the power-off occurrence information is cleared (S908). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery is transmitted to restore the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of the drive power supply cutoff (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S910, the rendering permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Then, the interruption is permitted (S911), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic processing of 4 m second cycle, and the counter updating processing of S1010 and S1011 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 17) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the acquired ball number. Send an award ball command. Further, the ball number command for holding balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 18) and the start winning process (see FIG. 20) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, if the special symbol is in the jackpot state, execution of the jackpot effect or variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified winning opening 65a has a specified number of balls. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, a motorized product opening and closing process is performed to control the opening and closing of the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 (S1005). In the electric part opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric part is set by the process of S625 in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 21), the opening / closing control of the electric part is started. In addition, the opening / closing control of the motorized prize is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 in the normal symbol variation process end.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19), the first symbol display is a variation display according to the variation pattern Start at device 37. In this embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from when the fluctuation is started. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Also, in the first symbol display update process, the first symbol display device when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19) ends. The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (the first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19). The stop display (lighting display) is performed on the device 37.

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update processing, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 21), the variation display is performed in the second symbol display device 83 Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Also, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set in the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20), the second symbol display device 83 is executed Ends the fluctuation display, and stops the stop symbol (the second symbol) in the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S613 or the processing of S618 of the normal symbol fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 20) Display (light on).

  After that, it is judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described S1001 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing of this time (S1009: No), the first main processing is performed until it reaches the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing (1) Update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1010, S1011).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 23 has been executed, so that the process at the time of the power-off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1001. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can start from the process of S1001. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

<Control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113>
Next, each control process performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 26, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1318 (see FIG. 27) is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called "temporary power failure"). It is determined whether or not it has been started during the execution of step S1202). As described later with reference to FIG. 27, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 27), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off processing of S1318. Before the power-off process is performed, the power-off process flag is set to on, and after the power-off process is completed, the power-off process flag is set to off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1318 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1202: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1318 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. From the above, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1318 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When it is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1202: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after the instantaneous power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1318, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1206). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1208, it is determined whether the power-off flag is set to ON (S1208). The power-off flag is set to ON when the power-off process of S1318 is performed (see S1317 in FIG. 27). That is, since the power-off flag is set to ON before the power-off processing of S1318 is performed, the process of S1208 is performed in the state where the power-off flag is set to ON is the current start-up process. This is a case where the power failure process of S1318 is started after completion of the power failure process after the occurrence of a momentary power failure. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1209), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210). The permission is set (S1211), and the processing shifts to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1208 in the state where the power-off flag is set to off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, via the processing of S1204 to S1206. This is the case when the processing of S1208 is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209 which is a clear process of the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, and an initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and interrupt permission is set. Then (S1211), the process proceeds to the main processing.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1209 is that when the process of S1208 is reached via the processes of S1204 to S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1204. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current processing of S1301 has been executed (S1301), and 1 ms or more has elapsed If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the process of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, the process of determining whether or not 1 ms has elapsed is mainly a process relating to display (effect) in S1302 to S1310, and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms) This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1312, the command determination process of S1311, and the process of updating the counter values of S1313 and S1314 in a short cycle. Since the process of S1311 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent reception omission of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1311 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1311 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1302) ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to become the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1304). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1305 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1306). About the detail of this pending | holding number display update process (S1306), a detail is demonstrated with reference to FIG.

  In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to the device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of lighting a hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223a.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S1307), the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set so as to perform an effect corresponding to. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set. The frame button input monitoring and rendering process (S1307) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the variable effect is not executed or during a high speed change period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and a rear surface image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during reach production produces a sense of expectation for the jackpot. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be set as a decision button for selecting one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects. When the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1307 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process shifts to the process of S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1311, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 (S1311). The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In this variation display setting process (S1312), in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute variation presentation, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 . As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1312 is finished, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1313). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1315 (S1313: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1315), and the power-off process is executed (S1316). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1317), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1313: No), it is judged based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1314) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1314: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1314: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the command determination processing (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S1311), first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern is detected from the main control apparatus 110. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1401). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1402). Next, a variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1403). Thereafter, the pending display update process is executed (S1404). After that, it returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 33) described later is executed. And it is used in order to set the fluctuation pattern command for indication which notifies the start of fluctuation production and the fluctuation pattern classification to display control 114.

  Further, with regard to the on-hold display update process (S1404), the details will be described with reference to FIG. 29, but as the new lottery game is started to change, a process associated with the transition of each on-hold data is executed.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is next determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1405). When the stop type command is received (S1405: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223c of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1406), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1407). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 33) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, when the stop type command has not been received (S1405: No), it is next determined whether the number-of-holding balls backup command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1408). And when the holding ball number backup command is received (S1408: Yes), the value contained in the received holding ball number backup command, that is, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 ( The number N of holdings of the variable display in the special symbol is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1409). Further, in the process of S1409, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223a is set. Thereafter, temporary storage symbol selection processing is executed (S1410). The temporary holding symbol selection process (S1410) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 31. However, when the number of holding balls is backed up at the time of power on, the temporary holding symbol is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. Execute processing to display on. After the process of S1410 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1408, when the holding ball number backup command is not received (S1408: No), next, it is determined whether the holding ball number command is received from the main control device 110 (S1411). And when the holding ball number command is received (S1411: Yes), the value included in the received holding ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol The number of holdings N) of the variable display in is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1412). Thereafter, a reserved symbol selection process is executed (S1413). The holding symbol selection process (S1413) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 32, but executes processing for determining a holding symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, since the number of holding balls command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball wins at the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) or when the drawing of the special symbol is performed, the starting winning combination is performed. Every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 by the process of S1409 is taken as the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc. At the time of lottery of symbols, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1409 is executed, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223a is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1411, when the holding ball number command is not received (S1411: No), it is determined whether or not other commands are received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S1419) ), Return to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed control The command is set to be sent to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the pending display update process (S1404) which is one process of the command determination process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this pending display update process (S1404).

  In the pending display update process (FIG. 29, S1404), first, a process of shifting (moving) the data of each pending symbol stored in the pending symbol storage area 223e to the previous area one by one is executed (S1421) . After that, it is determined whether data has been transferred from the storage area (pending 4) of the pending symbol storage area 223e corresponding to the pending quantity "4" to the storage area (pending 3) corresponding to the pending quantity "3" ( S1422).

  If it is determined that the data has been transferred from the hold 4 to the hold 3 (S1422: Yes), the hold transfer process is executed (S1423). The pending transfer process (S1423) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no transition from the hold 4 to the hold 3 (S1422: No), this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the suspension shift processing (S1423) which is one of the suspension display update processing (S1404 in FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 231 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this suspension transfer process (S1423).

  In the on-hold transfer process (FIG. 30, S1423), first, the value of the effect counter 223f is obtained (S1431). Currently, a display mode for notifying a hit with a reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (in the present embodiment, a display mode in which the same reserved symbol is displayed on the effective lines H1 to H5) It is determined whether or not there is (S1423). In the processing of S1423, if it is determined that the hit is unreported in the reserved symbol (S1432: No), whether the success or failure determination result of the lottery game currently displayed by fluctuation in the third symbol display device 81 is a hit It discriminates (S1433).

  If it is determined in the process of S1433 that the change determination result during the change is a win (S1433: Yes), the process of S1434 is executed. In the process of S1434, based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired, the display lottery (hold symbol lottery) of the hold symbol is executed from the hold symbol lottery table 222b (S1434). This reserved symbol lottery is a lottery process for determining whether or not to notify the player that the success or failure determination result of the third symbol being changed is to be a hit by the reserved symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81. is there. Here, if the value of the effect counter 223f acquired in the process of S1431 is any of "0 to 100", it is determined to report a hit, and if any of "101 to 199", it is determined to report a release. judge.

  It is determined whether or not it is determined that the lottery result in S1434 is displayed to notify a hit (S1435). When it is determined to notify the hit (S1435: Yes), the third symbol display device 81 in any of the effective symbol lines H4 and H5 of the reserved symbol displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. It is determined whether notification can be made with notification content corresponding to the symbol of the result of the determination of the third symbol during variation display (S1436).

  Here, when the notification content corresponding to the symbol of the result of the determination of the third symbol during the variation display is a definite variation when the result of the determination of the third symbol during the variation display is the big hit A, the reserved symbol Shows that one of the reserved symbols is displayed side by side in the effective line. On the other hand, when the success or failure judgment result of the third symbol in the variable display is the big hit B which is the big hit B, among the holding symbols, to display any of the holding symbols of the normal holding symbols aligned in the effective line It shows.

  When three same symbols are displayed among the special holding symbols on the activated line, the player is stopped and displayed that the lottery result of the third symbol in fluctuation is a probability change big hit (big hit A). Can be determined before the In addition, when the same normal holding symbol is displayed three times on the activated line, the player can determine that at least the result of the success or failure judgment is the normal jackpot (jackpot B). It should be noted that even if three normal holding symbols are displayed on the effective line, the result may be a probability change jackpot, so the player expects the stop of the third symbol in expectation of becoming a probability change jackpot. can do. As a result, even with the holding symbol, it is possible to identify the success or failure judgment result, and to enjoy the game more.

  In the process of S1436, when it is determined that the hit with hold symbol corresponding to the symbol of the judgment of acceptability can be displayed on the valid line H4 or H5 (S1436: Yes), the valid line capable of displaying the hit hold symbol. A holding transition symbol including a symbol corresponding to H4 or H5 is selected, and is set in the holding symbol storage area 223e (S1437). Here, when two same reserved symbols corresponding to the result of the pass / fail determination are displayed on the activated line H4 or H5 of the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 and Ds2, the process of S1437 is executed. Therefore, by displaying the same symbol as the holding symbol on which the same holding symbol is displayed, on the effective line H4 or H3 of the holding symbol display area Ds3, three identical holding symbols are displayed on the effective line H4 or H5. Be done. For other symbols displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds3, based on the value of the effect counter 223f selected in S1431, the display position corresponding to any of the outlier reserved symbol selection table 222e (any two of X1 to X3) The symbol of is selected.

  In addition, although the explanation was omitted here, if a symbol other than the hit holding symbol displayed in the holding symbol display area Ds 3 is selected, is it not notified of a hit by an effective line other than the winning effective line? If it is a win, it is replaced so that it becomes a different pattern from the win. Here, the symbols to be selected preferentially are determined in advance by setting the priority order, and replacement of the symbols is executed in the priority order.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1436, when it is determined that it is impossible to form the effective line of the hit retention symbol corresponding to the symbol of the hit / fail determination (S1436: No), the result of the hit / fail determination result and the effect counter 223f Based on the hold symbol selection table 222d, the hit hold symbol to be displayed on the valid line H3 is selected and set in the corresponding hold symbol storage area 223e (S1438). Here, three reserved symbols selected from the reserved symbol selection table 222d are displayed in the effective line H3 in the reserved symbol display area Ds3.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1432 that the hit symbol has been notified by the holding symbol (S1432), if it is determined in the process of S1433 that the success or failure determination result of the third symbol during variation is out (S1433: No In the process of S1435, when it is determined that the lottery result executed in the process of S1434 has been drawn out as a display (S1435: No), the process of S1439 is executed.

  In the processing of S1439, based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired in the processing of S1431, the holding symbols to be displayed at each display position of the holding symbol display area Ds3 are selected from the out-of-hold holding symbol selection table 222e, respectively, It is set to 223e (S1439). It is determined whether or not there is an effective line (hit line) to be a hit holding symbol in the hit line H4 or H5 according to the hold symbol set (S1440). If it is determined that there is a hit line (S1440: Yes), the hold symbol displayed in the hold symbol display area Ds3 corresponding to the hit line is changed to a hold symbol to be removed and set in the hold symbol storage area 223e (S1441). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no hit line (S1440: No), this process ends.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, the holding symbol for notifying the player of the fourth holding is that a symbol imitating a fish egg is displayed in the holding symbol display area Ds4. Therefore, the player can not determine whether the third symbol in the process of change is acceptable or not from the held fourth symbol. However, when the reserve is digested and the new third symbol fluctuation starts, the reserve symbol displayed in the reserve symbol display area Ds3 is triggered by the shift of the fourth reserve to the third reserve. It is selected based on the determination result of the 3rd design during change.

  Therefore, when four reservations are stored, the notification notification mode based on the determination result of the third symbol is displayed by the holding symbol at the same timing as the change start timing of the third symbol. Therefore, the player can know the information related to the result of the pass / fail judgment of the third symbol before the change time elapses at the start of the change. As a result, the player can have an interest in the game not only at the time of the stop of the change of the third symbol but also at the start of the change, and can enjoy the game more. Further, in this embodiment, even if the success or failure judgment result of the third symbol is a hit, it is not displayed in the hit holding symbol unless it is won in the lottery whether to display with a hit holding symbol, so in the hit holding symbol Even if not displayed, the player can play the game with the expectation of winning.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the temporary holding symbol selection process (S1410) which is one process in the command determination process (S1311 in FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the temporary storage symbol selection process (S1410).

  In the temporary storage symbol selection process (FIG. 31, S1410), first, it is determined whether the value of the special storage ball number counter 223a is a value larger than 0 (that is, the storage ball is stored) (S1501). If it is determined that the special holding ball number counter 223a is a value larger than 0 (S1501: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a is set to the variable [H] (S1502). A reserved symbol corresponding to the value of the variable [H] is selected from the temporary symbol selection table 222a (S1503). The value obtained by computing the variable [H] -1 is set as the value of the variable [H] (S1504). Next, it is determined whether the value of the variable [H] is a value larger than 0 (S1505). If the value is larger than 0 (S1505: Yes), the process returns to S1503 to select a temporary holding symbol. The process is repeated until it is determined in the process of S1505 that the value of the variable [H] is 0, and then this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1501 that the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a is 0 (S1501: No), this process is ended.

  Thus, when power is turned on, a temporary holding symbol is displayed until a command indicating the holding symbol is output from the main control device 110. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11 (a), by displaying a holding symbol different from the normal time in the holding symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds4, the temporary holding symbol is displayed on the player. It is configured to notify. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a temporary state at the time of power activation, and it is possible to prevent the player from having anxiety in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a reserved symbol selection process (S1413) which is one process in the command determination process (S1311 in FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the reserved symbol selection process (S1413).

  In the reserved symbol selection process (FIG. 32, S1413), first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1601). Whether the result of the determination of the third symbol during the variation by the third symbol display device 81 is a hit or not is determined (S1602). If it is determined that the success or failure determination result during the change is a hit (S1602: Yes), based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired in the process of S1601, the holding symbol lottery table 222b (see FIG. 11 (b)) The holding symbol lottery is executed (S1603). It is determined whether the lottery result of S1603 is a hit (S1604).

  In the process of S1604, when it is determined that the lottery result of S1603 is a hit (S1604: Yes), the effective line H4 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the third symbol being changed by the third symbol display device 81. Alternatively, it is determined whether the hit retention symbol of H5 can be displayed (whether the hit line can be formed) (S1605).

  In the process of S1605, when it is determined that it is not possible to form a hit line (S1605: No), a line is displayed (displayed on any of effective lines H1 to H3) corresponding to the symbol of the judgment of acceptance or not A symbol is selected from the held symbol selection table 222d based on the value of the effect counter 223f, and set in the corresponding held symbol storage area 223e. In this reserved symbol storage area 223e, it is stored in an area corresponding to the number of reserved gaming balls that have entered this time.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1605, when it is determined that the hit line can be formed (S1605: Yes), the same symbol as the held symbol displayed on the effective line H4 or H5 which can display the hit reserved symbol Is selected and displayed on the effective line H4 or H5 displayed by the reserved symbol display area Ds3. Based on the value of the effect counter 223f, a symbol other than the symbol to be a hit symbol set in the symbol symbol display area Ds3 is selected from the outright symbol symbol selection table 222e (see FIG. 12 (b)) and the corresponding display region is selected. A reserved symbol is selected (S1607).

  In addition, although the explanation was omitted here, if a symbol other than the hit holding symbol displayed in the holding symbol display area Ds 3 is selected, is it not notified of a hit by an effective line other than the winning effective line? If it is a win, it is replaced so that it becomes a different pattern from the win. Here, the symbols to be selected preferentially are determined in advance by setting the priority order, and replacement of the symbols is executed in the priority order.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1602 that the success or failure judgment result of the third symbol in fluctuation is out (S1602: No), based on the acquired effect counter 223f, the out-of-stock pending symbol selection table 222e (figure 12 (b)) to select an off-hold symbol from 12) and set (store) it in the corresponding on-hold symbol storage area 223e.

  Next, in the valid line H4 or H5, it is determined whether there is a valid line (hit line) to be a hit retention symbol (S1609). If it is determined that there is a hit line (S1609: Yes), the hold symbol displayed in the hit line of the hold symbol display area Ds3 corresponding to the hit line is changed to be a hold symbol, and the hold symbol is changed. The symbol storage area 223e is set (S1610). Here, the reserved symbols to be selected with priority are set in advance by determining the priority order, and replacement of the symbols is executed in the priority order. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1609 that there is no hit line (S1609: No), this process ends. Moreover, although description was abbreviate | omitted, when the number of pending | holding numbers received the 4th pending | holding ball number command, an egg pattern is set as a pending | holding pattern.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, each time a holding ball number command is received, processing for selecting a holding symbol corresponding to the holding ball number is executed. Therefore, the player can play the game looking forward to what kind of symbol is displayed in the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds3 when the game ball enters the entrance 64 and becomes the holding ball. . Therefore, the player's interest in the holding ball can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the variation display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S1312). This variation display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation effects, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223b is not on (that is, off) (S1701: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S1706. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223b is on (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223b is turned off (S1702), and then the fluctuation pattern in the process of S1404 in the command determination process (see FIG. 28). The fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1703).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  In the process of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223c provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1706). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223c is not on (that is, off) (S1706: No), since the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, this fluctuation display End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223c is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223c is turned off (S1707), and then in the process of S1407 of the command determination process (see FIG. 28) The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1708).

  In the process of S1709, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1709).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the pending number display update process (S1306) which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing this pending number display updating process (S1306).

  In the number-of-helds display update process (FIG. 34, S1306), first, it is determined whether there is a change in the held design (S1711). Although the description is omitted here, the change flag is set, the update of the held symbol is newly executed, and the data in the held symbol storage area 223e is changed, the change flag is set to ON. . In the process of S1711, it is determined whether the change flag is set to on. Then, after it is determined, it is set to off.

  If it is determined in the process of S1711 that there is a change in the held symbol (S1711: Yes), it is determined whether the held transition symbol is set in the held symbol storage area 223e (S1712). In addition, this suspension shift design is set by processing of S1439, S1437, and S1438 of suspension transition processing (FIG. 30, S1423), respectively. In order to be able to determine that it is a pending transition symbol, pending symbol data to which identification data different from other pending symbols is given is stored in the pending symbol storage area 223e.

  In the process of S1712, when it is determined that the pending transition symbol is stored in the pending symbol storage area 223e (S1712: Yes), the pending transition symbol set in the pending symbol storage area 223e, data of the pending symbol The indicated hold command for display is set. The hold command for display is output to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1712 that no pending transfer symbol is set in the pending symbol storage area 223e (S1712: No), a display corresponding to each pending symbol set in the pending symbol storage area 223e A hold command for setting is set (S1714). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S171 that there is no change in the held symbol, this process is ended. In addition, as for the suspension command for display set in the process of S1713 and S1714, a command capable of determining the number of balls for suspension can be set for the suspension symbol stored in the suspension symbol storage area 223e.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the holding command for display was set corresponding to the number of holding balls with respect to the holding symbol, it is not limited to that, so that the holding symbol of each holding ball can be determined in one command. It may be configured. Specifically, the command is configured into upper and lower 2 bytes, each bit (plurality of bits) is made to correspond to a holding ball, and data indicating a holding symbol is set.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, if there is no change in a holding symbol, it was set as the structure which does not output the holding symbol command for a display, but not only that but also when there is no change in a holding symbol, it memorizes in holding symbol storage area 223e The display hold command may be set based on the data. By configuring in this manner, the display control device 114 stably and correctly displays the third reserved symbol even when a defect such as deletion of the stored symbol data stored due to noise or the like occurs. It can be displayed on the device 81.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a frame button input monitoring and rendering process (S1307) which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring and effect process (S1307).

  In the frame button input monitoring / rendering process (S1307 in FIG. 35), first, it is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223g is 0 (S1721). In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted in this embodiment, the fluctuation time is set to this SW effective time counter 223g based on the fluctuation | variation start of a 3rd symbol. If it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223g is 0 (S1721: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223g is larger than 0 (S1721: No), the value of the SW effective time counter 223g is subtracted and updated (S1722). The value corresponding to the passage of time is subtracted from the value of the SW effective time counter 223g (in the present embodiment, the count value corresponding to the cycle of executing the frame button input monitoring and effect process is subtracted).

  It is determined whether the player has pressed the frame button 22 (S1723). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S1723: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed by the player (S1723: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1724). The held symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is hit on any of the valid lines H1 to H5 to determine whether the held symbol is displayed (hit notification completed) (S1725). If it is determined that the hit notification has been made (S1725: Yes), it is determined whether the hit holding symbol being displayed is displayed as a special hold symbol (S1726).

  If it is determined that the displayed hit holding symbol is a special holding symbol (S1726: Yes), the holding symbol corresponding to the displayed holding symbol is set again in the holding symbol storage area 223e (S1727) .

  In the present embodiment, the same holding symbol is set again. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the processing may be ended without updating the data of the holding symbol storage area 223e without setting it again. With this configuration, the control load of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1726, when it is determined that the hit holding symbol being displayed is the normal holding symbol (S1726: No), the holding symbol selection table 222d (FIG. 12) is displayed based on the value of the effect counter 223f. (A) See) Select a holding symbol from the line, overwrite it as a hit holding symbol on the hit line, and set it in the holding symbol storage area 223e (S1728). Thereafter, the processing of S1729 is executed.

  As described above, even when the hit holding symbol is displayed, if the hit holding symbol being displayed is the normal hold symbol, the hit holding symbol is changed by the player pressing the frame button 22. Therefore, the player can enjoy the change of the hit and hold symbol by pressing the frame button 22. In addition, when the determination result of the third symbol in fluctuation is a probability variation big hit (big hit A), it may be changed to a special hold symbol by lottery and displayed, and the player is expected to have a probability variation jackpot Holding, the frame button 22 can be pressed to change the hit design. Therefore, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of pressing the frame button 22 and to improve the player's interest in the game.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1725, when it is determined that the displayed holding symbol is not displayed in the hit holding symbol (S1725: No), the processing of S1729 is executed. In the process of S1729, it is determined whether the determination result of the third symbol during variation is a win (S1729). If it is determined that the lottery result during the change is a hit (S1729; Yes), the holding symbol lottery is performed from the holding symbol lottery table 222b (see FIG. 11B) based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired. It executes (S1730). Here, the holding symbol lottery is a lottery process for determining whether or not to display the holding symbol in the hit holding symbol.

  If the lottery result of S1730 is hit (displayed on a hit symbol), it is determined whether or not a lottery is made (S1731). If it is determined that the lottery result is displayed as a hit (S1731: Yes), it is determined whether it is possible to form a hit line corresponding to the symbol of the pass / fail judgment (S1732). If it is determined that the hit line can not be formed (S1732: No), the hit holding symbol is displayed in a row on the effective lines H1 to H3 corresponding to the symbol of the judgment of the hit or not based on the value of the effect counter 223f. It selects from reservation symbol selection table 222d, and sets to the corresponding reservation symbol storage area 223e (S1733). On the other hand, in the process of S1732, when it is determined that the hit line corresponding to the symbol of the pass / fail judgment can be formed (S1732: Yes), the hold symbol corresponding to the hit line is selected, and the hold symbol storage area 223e is selected. It sets to (S1734).

  Here, if it is possible to form a hit line by changing one of the holding symbols displayed on the effective line H4 or H5, the process of replacing the one with the holding symbol to be the holding symbol is executed. Be done.

  Thus, when the player presses the frame button 22, the displayed holding symbol is changed, and the hit holding symbol is displayed. Therefore, even when the hit holding symbol is not displayed, the player can change the holding symbol by pressing the frame button 22 and can display the hit holding symbol by his / her operation. Therefore, it is possible to play a game without bored time until the third symbol is stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1729, when it is determined that the determination result of the third symbol in fluctuation is out (S1729), in the process of S1731, when it is determined that the lottery result in S1730 is out (S1731: No), the processing of S1735 is executed. In the process of S1735, based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, the holding symbol is selected from the out-of-hold holding symbol selection table 222e and is set in the holding symbol storage area 223e (S1735).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is an effective line (hit line) to be a hit symbol in the displayed hold symbol (S1736), and if there is an active line to be a hit retention symbol (S1736: Yes), it corresponds to the hit line. One of the holding symbols to be played (in the present embodiment, the holding symbol displayed in the holding symbol display area Ds3) is changed to the holding symbol and is set in the holding symbol storage area 223e (S1737). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1736 that there is no hit line (S1736: No), this process is ended.

<Control Process Executed by MPU 231 of Display Control Device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 36 to FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, it is necessary to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S1801), and the display control device 114 is enabled to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S1801) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S1801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S1901). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1902). Thus, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1901.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S1902, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S1902, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs and fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1903). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after the other processing necessary for the boot processing is executed (S1904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after this boot processing (see S1801 in FIG. 36) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 36) (S1905), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process is finished.

  As described above, when the boot process (S1801) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 37, a predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S1902. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S1901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S1901. After repeating the process including the process of S1902 a plurality of times, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process starts, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1903 to S1905 without performing the processes of S1901 and S1902. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. When the boot process is finished, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1803). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1803, next, the fluctuation image at power on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1804). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller 237, according to the transfer instruction, transmits the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S1804, the simplified image display flag 233c is then performed. Is turned on (S1805). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 44A) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed so as to transfer (see S3302 of FIG. 44A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Thus, during the V interrupt process (see FIG. 38B), the simplified command determination process is performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is drawn. The simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 38B) is executed (see S2108 in FIG. 38B).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) to the first ball entrance 64, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110 When it is through the device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image can be displayed immediately during the variation presentation period, and a simple variation presentation can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, so it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S1805, the interrupt permission is set (S1806), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the processing of S1806, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38A, the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 38 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 38 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 16) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 38B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect image Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S2102) is executed, and then the display setting process (S2103) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2102), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41.

  In the display setting process (S2103), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like, an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 42 to 43.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S2104). In this task processing, based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 set in the display setting processing (S2103) or the simple display setting processing (S2109), the image is configured In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object), various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process (S2105), while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the transfer instruction to transfer. The details of the transfer setting process (S2105) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2106). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S2104), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2105) The drawing list shown in FIG. 16 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by processing of S2107, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S2108) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S2109) is executed to shift to the process of S2104.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2102) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 34, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S2203).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2204), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed. Then (S2205), the process returns to the process of S2201.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2205) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing (S2205) is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing (S2205), first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation rendering pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, The display data table buffer 233d is set (S2301).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2301, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each of the fluctuation display data tables corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2301 is turned on, and other fluctuation The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2303). In the display setting process, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d easily corresponds to which fluctuation pattern by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2303. It can be judged.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2304), 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 2305). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2306).

  Thereafter, the variation pattern command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing. By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized in the process of S2305, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2301. , And at the same time the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81 while extracting the contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing of S2302. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the image data of the sprite required in the variable display data table set in advance from the character ROM 234 for the normal video R To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2304, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2204 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2204: No), it is then determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2206), If there is a display type-of-stop command (S2206: Yes), the type-of-stop command processing is executed (S2207), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (large jack A, big jack B, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, reach out completely) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S2401), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time V interrupt processing (see FIG. 38B) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect is set (S2402).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is It is set to off (S2403).

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2402 is described. In the above-described task processing (S2105), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2403 and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, but before drawing is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the normal video from the character ROM 234 is used. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, high drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained.

  It should be noted that, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2401, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the process of S2402.

  Temporarily, if the stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit of the special symbol" is set, in fact, even if it is "the removal of the special symbol", the "special symbol" in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, causing the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "big hit of the special symbol", which may lower the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set as in the present embodiment, in fact, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", stop of complete removal on the third symbol display device 81 Even if the symbol is displayed, the player can be pleased because the pachinko machine 10 is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. When it is determined in the process of S2206 that there is no display type command for suspension (S2206: No), it is determined whether there is a display design symbol command (S2208). If it is determined that the display design symbol command has been received (S2208: Yes), the suspension display data table (see FIG. 15 (b)) indicated by the received command is set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S2209).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2208 that the display design symbol command has not been received (S2208: No), it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2217) If there is an error command (S2217: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2218), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2218) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing error command processing. The error command process (S2218) is to execute a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In error command processing (FIG. 41, S2218), first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S2901). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S 2902), and the error command is The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2901, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S2902, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S2902, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2210 that there is no error command (S2217: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2219), and the process returns to S2201.

  In the process of S2201 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes ), Each processing of S2202 to S2209 and S2217 to S2219 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2201 to S2209 and S2217 to S2219 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and the process of S2201 determines that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. , This command determination process is ended.

  In the simplified command determination process (S2109) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 38B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image, ie, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command The variation pattern command process (see FIG. 40A) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 40B), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are extracted and the other commands are Perform processing to discard without executing the processing corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (refer to FIG. 40A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2301. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image necessary for the setting are stored in the power-on main motion image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233b, and a process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 43, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2103) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 42, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S3001: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the process of S3002 to S3004 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the new command flag is set to off (S3002). The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3004).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 (a) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3101).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3004), or when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off in the process of S3003 (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, pointer update processing is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 (b) is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process (FIG. 43 (b), S3005), first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233 f is updated by the process of S 3201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233 f after the update is End information (S2802). As a result, if it is the End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3203). If it is a demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S3205), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2803 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3206), the present process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S3202: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S3006 together with the warning image etc. expanded earlier, and the display coordinates for each sprite Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variable display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not. (S3009).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S3009: Yes), the finalized display is not yet performed, and it is the timing to perform the finalized display, so first, the finalized display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3010), and then the contents are cleared by writing the null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S3015) Return to the V interrupt processing.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. Further, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In the task processing (S2104), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S3015, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the finalized display flag is not on but off in the process of S3009 (S3009: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S3016). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S3016: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so the demonstration display data table is displayed data table The contents are set in the buffer 233 d (S 3017), and then the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233 e to clear the contents (S 3018). Then, time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration effect is being performed in the on state is set on (S3021), this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the finalized display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can set the drawing contents.

  In the process of S3016, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3017: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is And return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simplified display setting process (S2109) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interruption process (see FIG. 38B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, an image of the power-on-time fluctuation image according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect based on the power-on time fluctuation image is finished. Is set to the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2105) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 44A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3302) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simplified image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the process of S3301, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44B, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 44B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer process of the image data performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (S3402). In this processing of S3402, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing is completed when the transfer completion signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S3402 (S3402: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Also, as a result of the process of S3301, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to S3403.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3403), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3403: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. In the transfer data information, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the process of S3403, if all resident target image data have been transferred (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 38B), not the simple command determination process and the simple display setting process, but the command determination process (see FIGS. 39 to 41) and the display setting process (FIGS. 42 to 43). Since reference is performed, drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the image at the normal time is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 45) (see S3301: No in FIG. 44A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

  In the normal image transfer setting process (S3303 in FIG. 42), first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2103) executed earlier is performed. The information described in the address indicated by the updated pointer 233 f is acquired (S 3501). Here, the information indicated by the transfer data table of the display data table and the pointer of the notice transfer data table of the notice data table is acquired respectively. Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502), and if it is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3503, the transfer start flag is set in the work RAM 233 to indicate that there is image data to be transferred in the on state, and the process proceeds to step S3505.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S3502 (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not an image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the last transfer of image data is completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

  In the process of S3406, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, if it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3506 (S3506: No), since the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Also, as a result of the process of S3505, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3505: No), the process proceeds to S3507.

  In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag Is turned off (S3508), and in the process of S3517, it is determined whether transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517). The determination in the process of S3517 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3517 (S3517: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3517 (S3517: No), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3418). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3518, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3519), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233i sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  Next, it is determined whether the rear image change flag is on (S3513). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S3513: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3513: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S3514), the back image provided for each back image type Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3515). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3516), and the process proceeds to S3517.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the back image determination flag in the on state is of the back A, the normal image transfer process is ended as it is.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2106) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2105) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) The drawing list shown in FIG. 16 is generated from the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105) (S3601). That is, in the process of S3601, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2105), the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored is specified for each sprite. Then, with respect to the specified storage RAM type and address, the necessary parameters for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing object buffer information specified by the drawing object buffer flag 233 j are transmitted to the image controller 237 (S 3502). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 1 including the information for expanding the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236 b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. Can.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing object buffer flag 233j is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is performed by inverting the value, that is, setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 38B) is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  In addition, in this embodiment, before the success or failure determination result is alert | reported by 3rd symbol, the success / failure decision result of the 3rd symbol in fluctuation | variation is alert | reported by pending | holding symbol. Therefore, the player tries to know the result of the judgment more quickly during the change of the third symbol, and shoots the game ball to make the game ball win in the ball entry port 64 and generate the holding ball. I do. Therefore, it is possible to make the player continue to shoot the game ball even while the third symbol is fluctuating, and it is possible to increase the sales of the game arcade.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when it counts as a holding ball, it was set as the structure which displays a holding symbol and alert | reports the pass / fail determination of the 3rd symbol, but it is not restricted to it, The game ball is exceeded the upper limit number of holding balls. Even when the player wins, the displayed holding symbol may be changed and displayed. By configuring in this way, when the hit symbol is not displayed and the hit symbol is not displayed, the player updates the hold symbol even if the hold ball is stored up to the upper limit, and the hit is successful. In order to display the holding symbol, the game ball can be continued to be fired to play a game. Therefore, it is possible to extend the time for playing the game by firing the game ball, and to increase the sales of the game arcade.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the holding symbol which shows 4 pieces of holding numbers was made into the symbol which does not alert | report the yes or no determination result of the 3rd symbol in fluctuation as a symbol of an egg, it is not restricted to it but the success or failure of the 3rd symbol The color of the egg may be selected based on the determination result. Specifically, gold, red, and blue are set, gold is selected only when the result of the determination is a hit, and red is selected rather than when the result of the determination is a drop. It may be configured to be easy to be selected, and blue may be configured to be more easily selected if the result of the pass / fail judgment is out. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to continue the game and allow the player to play to establish hold until the number of the hold is four. Thus, the sales of the game arcade can be increased.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it was set as the structure which alert | reports the propriety determination result of the 3rd symbol in fluctuation | variation with a reservation symbol, if the 3rd symbol in fluctuation | variation is a display mode of reach not only that, the reach display The holding symbol may be displayed in the same reach display mode as in the mode.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 to 56, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the case has been described in which the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds4 are set in advance in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 and displayed constantly.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the size of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is variably set, displayed, and displayed according to the number of held pieces. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

<Regarding Display of Suspended Design in Second Embodiment>
An example of the display mode of the reserved symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 49. FIG. 47 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the third symbol is in a fluctuating display in a state where the number of balls held is 0, that is, there is no ball held. In the second embodiment, when the number of holding balls is zero, the sub display area Ds is not displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. Only the area Dm is displayed on the entire display area of the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, FIG. 47 (b) shows a state in which the game ball has won the ball entry port 64 while the third symbol is being changed from the state where the holding ball is zero, and the holding ball has become one. FIG. As shown in FIG. 47 (b), when the number of holding balls is one, the second symbol display device 81 displays a holding symbol display area Ds1 necessary for the sub display area Ds to display one holding ball. . In this case, the display area of the main display area Dm is reduced and displayed.

  Next, FIG. 47 (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the number of reservations is changed from two (see FIG. 47 (b)). As shown in FIG. 47 (c), when the number of held items is two, the display area of the sub display area Ds displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is enlarged and displayed by the held display area Ds2. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the number of held pieces becomes 2, the held symbols are displayed respectively, and when the same held symbol is reached on the effective line H4 or H5, the comment window becomes more It is displayed in the sub display area Ds. Accordingly, the size of the display area of the main display area Dm is reduced and displayed. In the comment window, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the characters “reach !! if sharks are aligned チ ャ ン ス chance !!” are displayed, and the player symbol becomes a reach symbol, and which symbol is an effective line If it is aligned with, it will be in the structure to inform whether the jackpot can be expected more.

  Note that after the comment window is displayed for a predetermined time, the display area is reduced and is not displayed. In that case, the size of the main display area Dm is enlarged and displayed. Further, FIG. 47 (c) shows the case where the comment is displayed when the number of held pieces is two, but even if the number of balls held becomes two, the comments may not be displayed, and in that case, The comment window is not displayed, and the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds2 are displayed.

  Next, FIG. 48 (a) is a diagram showing a case where the number of pending items is displayed as three. As shown in FIG. 48A, the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds3 are displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the size of each of the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds3 is configured to be the same, and the same size is also applied to the case where the number of reservations is one or two. Therefore, the size of the main display area Dm is reduced and displayed.

  FIG. 48 (b) is a diagram showing a case where the number of pending is displayed as four. As shown in FIG. 48 (b), the number-of-helds display area Ds4 is displayed at a part of the right end of the held symbol display area Ds3 displayed when the number of held is three (see FIG. 48 (a)) . In this case, the sizes of the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds are set without change.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the display mode of the holding symbol when the variable display of the third symbol is newly started from the state of the holding number 4 will be described. As shown in FIG. 49 (a), when the display of the third symbol is newly started from the state where the number of reservations is 4 (see FIG. 48 (b)), the reservation is made one by one in the previous storage area Be shifted. Although the symbol of the egg is displayed as shown in FIG. 48 (b), the number of the held unit is four, but the suspension is shifted so that the suspension display area Ds4 is erased as shown in FIG. 49 (a). And a picture in which the holding symbol of the egg is broken is displayed, and the holding symbol is scrolled from among them. Then, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), the combination of the selected holding symbols is scrolled from the left to the right of the holding symbol display area Ds3 and displayed at a predetermined display position. In addition, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), when the same hold symbol is displayed on the valid line H4 or H5 and the hit hold symbol is displayed, a comment window is formed below the hold symbol display area Ds3. The word "chance !!" is displayed to indicate that the hit holding symbol has been displayed.

  The size of the comment window is configured to be the same size as the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds3, and the size of the main display area Dm is reduced and displayed as the comment window is displayed. In addition, display is appropriately set for the comment window, and various contents of the comment are displayed as well as the contents shown in FIG. 49 (b).

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Main Controller 110 in Second Embodiment
The electrical configuration of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment is the same as the electrical configuration of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Controller 113 in Second Embodiment
The electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment is such that a status storage area 223 h is added to the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment.

  The status storage area 223 h is a storage area for storing status information for setting the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Although details will be described later, coordinates indicating each of the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds are allocated in advance to the status information stored in the status storage area 223h. As status information, statuses 1 to 7 are set according to the size of each display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device 114 in Second Embodiment
In the display control device 114 in the second embodiment, a coordinate selection table 234a4 is added to the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, as compared with the display control device 114 in the first embodiment.

  The coordinate selection table 234a4 is a coordinate selection table (Dm) 234a4 for selecting a front face for setting the display area Dm based on the status information received from the audio lamp control device 113 shown in FIG. 52 (b). 53 is composed of a coordinate selection table (Ds) 234a4 for selecting a spreadsheet for setting the display area Ds shown in FIG. 53 based on the status information received from the audio lamp control device 113 shown in FIG. 53. .

  In the coordinate selection table (Ds) 234a4, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the coordinates of the third symbol display device 81 are set corresponding to each status. As for the face of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 52A, A (X0, Y0) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is set as the origin. B (X0, Y1) is a position set as the display position of the main display area Dm when the number of reservations is 4 and the comment window is also displayed. This B (X0, Y1) is set as the coordinates of the main display area Dm when the status information of the main display area Dm is 1. Note that the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 displays the main display area Dm by B (X0, Y1) based on the reception of the display area setting command indicating the status information “1” of the main display area Dm. Set to The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 sets the display area in the horizontal direction from the coordinates set by the coordinates B (X0, Y1).

  Similarly, referring to FIG. 52A, coordinates C (X0, Y2) correspond to status information "2" of the main display area Dm, and coordinates D (X0, Y3) indicate status information of the main display area Dm. The coordinate E (X0, Y4) corresponds to "3", the status information "4" of the main display area Dm, and the coordinate F (X0, Y5) corresponds to the status information "5" of the main display area Dm. It is set.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 53, the status information “1” of the sub display area Ds is selected when the coordinates are not set and the number of pending items is 0, and the sub display area Ds displays the third symbol It is selected when it is not formed in the device 81. In the status information "2" of the sub display area Ds, coordinates E (X0, Y4) are set as a display area of the reserved symbol display area Ds1 (pending 1). When E (X0, Y4) is set as the coordinate for setting the display area of the hold display area Ds1 as the sub display area Ds, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 sets horizontal and vertical directions with the coordinate E as a start point. Form a reserved symbol display area Ds1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 53, in the status information “3” of the sub display area Ds, coordinates D (X0, Y3) are set as coordinates for setting the held symbol display area Ds1 (hold 1), and the held symbol display Coordinates E (X0, Y4) are set as the coordinates for setting the area Ds2 (pending 2). When the status information “3” of the sub display area Ds is set, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 horizontally sets the coordinate display area D from the coordinate D to the coordinate E in the horizontal direction as the display area of the holding symbol display area Ds1. Up to the right end of the display area of the symbol display device 81 is formed as the hold display area Ds1. Furthermore, the display area of the reserved display area Ds2 is formed in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction from the coordinate E, respectively.

  Similarly, each display area and its coordinates set in the coordinate selection table 234a4 corresponding to each status information are selected, and each display area in the sub display area Ds is formed. Note that how to form each of the reserved display areas Ds1 to Ds4 from the selected coordinates is set in advance. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

<About Control Processing Executed by Main Controller 110 in Second Embodiment>
The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the second embodiment is executed in the same manner as the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the first embodiment, so the illustration and description thereof are omitted. Do.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Controller 113 in Second Embodiment>
Control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 55.

  With reference to FIG. 54, the command determination process 2 (S1320) which is one process in the main process (FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 2 (S1320). In command determination processing 2 (FIG. 54, S1320) in the second embodiment, display area setting processing (FIG. 55, S1414) is added to the command determination processing (FIG. 28, S1311) in the first embodiment. . As the other processes, the same processes as the command determination process (FIG. 28, S1311) in the first embodiment are executed, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  After the holding symbol selection process (FIG. 32, S1413) of the command determination process 2 (FIG. 54, S1320) is executed, the display area setting process is executed (S1414). The display area setting process (S1414) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. After the display area setting process (FIG. 55, S1414) is executed, this process ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 55, about the display area setting process (S1414) which is one process in the command determination process 2 (FIG. 54, S1320) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. explain. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the display area setting process (S1414).

  In the display area setting process (FIG. 55, S1413), first, it is judged from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a whether the number of holdings is 0 or not (S1621). If it is determined that the number of held pieces is 0 (S1621: Yes), the status information of the main display area Dm is set to "5" and the status information of the sub display area Ds is set to "1" in the third symbol display device 81. Are set (stored) in the status storage area 223h. After that, a display area setting command for notifying the display control device 114 of the set status information is set (S1623).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the pending number is greater than 0 (S1621: No), it is determined whether the pending number is 1 (S1624). If it is determined that the number of pending items is one (S1624: Yes), the status information of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is "4", and the status information of the sub display area Ds is "2". Are set in the status storage area 223h (S1625). Thereafter, the process of S1623 is executed, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1624 that the number of reservations is not one (S1624: No), it is determined whether the number of reservations is two (S1626). If it is determined that the number of reservations is 2 (S1626: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a comment display mode. In the present embodiment, the determination of the presence or absence of a comment is made based on whether or not a held symbol to be reached is displayed on the activated line H4 or H5 in the held symbol selection process (FIG. 32, S1413).

  In the present embodiment, the presence or absence of a comment is determined based on whether or not the holding symbol is displayed in the reach display mode. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a predetermined lottery is determined based on the value of the effect counter 223f. If there is a symbol of a predetermined symbol (for example, a shark etc.) in the reserved symbol, it may be set to have a comment, or displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The presence or absence of a comment may be determined based on the result of determination as to whether the third symbol has been selected or the selected variation pattern.

  If it is determined in the process of S1627 that there is a comment (S1627: Yes), the status information "2" of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 and the status information "4" of the sub display area Ds are statuses. It is set in the storage area 223h (S1628). Thereafter, the process of S1623 is executed, and the process ends. As described above, when two comments are displayed on hold, the size of the main display area Dm becomes the coordinate C (see FIG. 52A), and in the sub display area Ds, the hold display areas Ds1 to Ds2 are displayed. The comment display areas are set to have uniform widths from the coordinates C, the coordinates D, and the coordinates E, respectively.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1627 that there is no comment, the status information "3" of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 and the status information "3" of the sub display area Ds are status storage areas respectively. The value is stored in 223h (S1629). Thereafter, the process of S1623 is executed, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1626, when it is determined that the number of pending is not two (S1626: No), it is determined whether the number of pending is three (S1630). If it is determined that the number of pending items is 3 (S1630: Yes), it is determined whether the comment window is displayed (S1631), and if it is determined that there is a comment (S1631: Yes), the main display Status information "1" of the area Dm and status information "6" of the sub display area Ds are set in the status storage area 223h (S1632). Thereafter, the process of S1623 is executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no comment in the process of S1631 (S1632: No), the status information "2" of the main display area Dm and the status information "5" of the sub display area Ds are set in the status storage area 223h. (S1632). Thereafter, the process of S1623 is executed, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1630 that the number of pending is not three, that is, if it is determined that the number of pending is four (S1630: No), it is determined whether there is a comment (S1634) . If it is determined that there is a comment (S1634: Yes), status information "1" of the main display area Dm and status information "8" of the sub display area Ds are set in the status storage area 223h (S1632). Thereafter, after the process of S1623 is performed, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1634 that there is no comment (S1634: No), status information "1" of the main display area Dm and status information "6" of the sub display area Ds are set in the status storage area 223h. (S1632). Thereafter, after the processing of S1623 is executed, this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the sizes of the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds are respectively variably set depending on the increase or decrease of the number of holdings and the presence or absence of the comment. Therefore, when the number of balls held is small, the display area of the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is displayed is enlarged and set, so that the player can play the game easily seeing the third symbol. .

  In addition, when the number of holding balls is stored, the display area is formed and set each time, so that the necessary display area is allocated and the display area can be used effectively. In addition, since the display area is newly set and displayed when the holding symbol is displayed, it is possible to draw more attention of the player to the holding symbol.

Regarding Control Processing Executed by Display Control Device 114 in Second Embodiment
Control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment is V interrupt processing for the control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment (FIG. 38B). The command determination process (FIG. 39, S2102) in the above is changed to the command determination process 2 (FIG. 56, S2110). The other processes are the same as in the first embodiment.

  The command determination process 2 (S2110) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 2 (S2110). In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 56, S2110) in the second embodiment, each process of S2110 to S2111 is added to the command determination process (FIG. 39, S2102) in the first embodiment. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In S2208 of command determination processing 2 (FIG. 56, S2110), when it is determined that the display reserved symbol command is not received (S2208: No), it is determined whether the display area setting command is received ((S2208) S2210). If it is determined that the display area setting command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 (S2210: Yes), each coordinate is selected from the coordinate selection table 234a4 based on the status information indicated by the received command. , And display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Thereafter, this process ends.

  In this embodiment, the coordinates selected from the coordinate selection table 234a4 are set and updated in the display data table and the hold display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, respectively, and then the third symbol display device is displayed. The display mode displayed on 81 can be changed.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the determination result of the third symbol which is variably displayed so as to be distinguishable by the holding symbol.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when displaying the holding symbol, the judgment result of the success or failure in the case where the third symbol corresponding to the holding symbol starts to change is determined first. It is different from the first embodiment in that the display pattern of the holding symbol is set on the basis of the result of the judgment on the acceptability. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

<About the display mode of the retention symbol in the third embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 57, the display mode of the reserved symbol in the third embodiment will be described. Although the details will be described later, in the third embodiment, when the gaming ball is won in the entrance 64 and stored as a holding ball, it is before the variation judgment result of the holding ball becomes the fluctuation start. Execute the process of determining (prefetching). And based on the determination result, it is comprised so that the determination result may be alert | reported by the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 by a reservation symbol.

  FIG. 57 (a) is a diagram showing a hit holding symbol which informs the player that the number of holdings is 3 and the result of judgment of the third holding ball (hold 3) becomes a hit. . In FIG. 57A, three symbols of dolphins are aligned and displayed on the effective line H3, and the player is notified that the hold 3 is to be a hit.

  Next, FIG. 57 (b) is a diagram showing a case where the number of holding balls is two and the second holding ball (holding 2) is displayed with a chance eye that is a combination of special holding symbols. . This chance is set to be effective when it is displayed in advance in any of the effective lines H1 to H3 in the order of "shellfish, shark, shellfish". The player is configured such that this chance is likely to be displayed when the hit / fail judgment of the holding ball whose hold is displayed is hit or the variation pattern of the third symbol corresponding to the holding ball becomes super reach. ing. Therefore, when the chance eye is displayed, it is possible to make the player more expecting a hit in the lottery game corresponding to the holding ball.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 According to Third Embodiment
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Main Controller 110 in Third Embodiment
The electrical configuration of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is the same as the electrical configuration of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment shown in FIG. Among the counter values shown in a), the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is acquired when the gaming ball is in the ball entry port 64 and the number of holding balls is less than four, and stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a Differs from the first embodiment in that The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Controller 113 in Third Embodiment
In the ROM 222 (see FIG. 59B) of the audio lamp control device 113 MPU 221 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, a sub variation pattern table 222 f is added to the first embodiment. The sub variation pattern table 222f is the same data table as the variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 10C) set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Thus, by setting the same data table as the main control unit 110 in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113, the main control unit 110 does not have to output a change pattern command indicating a change pattern selected. The MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 of various counter values acquired based on the game ball winning at the entrance 64, whereby the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 selects Variation patterns can be determined.

  In the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, a winning information storage area 223i is added to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment. The other points are the same as in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning combination when the start winning combination is achieved in the main control device 110. The main control unit 110 predicts (estimates) various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when the drawing of the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning combination is performed, and the predicted various information is The main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, the various information (pass, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area), the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). Be done. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to an earlier winning is stored, and data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored in the first area.

<About Control Processing Executed by Main Control Device 110 in Third Embodiment>
The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the third embodiment is the start winning process (FIG. 20, S105) as compared to the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the first embodiment. Is changed to start winning process 2 (FIG. 60, S115). The other processing is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the start winning process 2 (S115) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 2 (S115). The start winning process 2 (FIG. 60, S115) in the third embodiment is different from the start winning process (FIG. 20, S105) in the first embodiment in the process of S406 in which the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is reserved for special symbol It is changed to the structure stored in the ball | bowl storage area 203a, and each process to S407-S411 is added. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the process of S406 is executed, it is determined based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S406 whether or not it becomes a big hit than the gaming state at the start of the change (S407). If it is determined that it is a jackpot (S407: Yes), a jackpot winning command is set (S408). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S407 that the variation is out (S407: No), the variation pattern of the super reach variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in S406. (S409). If it is determined that the change is to be a super reach (S409: Yes), an out-of-reach reach winning command is set (S410).

  On the other hand, in the process of S409, when it is determined that the variation pattern of the super reach is not selected (S409: No), a losing prize command is set (S411). Thereafter, this process ends.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Controller 113 in Third Embodiment>
Control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The command determination process 3 (S1350) which is one process in the main process (FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The command determination process 3 (FIG. 61, S1350) in the third embodiment differs from the command determination process (FIG. 28, S1311) in the first embodiment in the pending display update process (FIG. 29, S1404). In the process 2 (FIG. 62, S1420), the reserved symbol selection process (FIG. 31, S1413) is deleted, and each process from S1415 to S1416 is added. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  After the process of S1403 is executed, the pending display update process 2 is executed (S1420). The pending display update process 2 (S1420) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the pending display update process 2 (S1420). The pending display update process 2 (FIG. 62, S1420) in the third embodiment is a pending transfer process (FIG. 30, S1423) is a pending transfer with respect to the pending display update process (FIG. 29, S1404) in the first embodiment. It is changed to processing 2 (FIG. 63, S1450). The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, pending transfer process 2 (S1450) which is one process of pending display update process 2 (FIG. 62, S1420) in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the suspension transfer process 2 (S1450).

  In the pending transfer process 2 (FIG. 63, S1450), first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1451). It is determined from the data stored in the prize information storage area 223i whether the winning information is shifted from the fourth holding ball number (holding 4) to the third holding ball number (holding 3) S1452). If it is determined that the winning information transferred to the hold 3 is a hit (S1452: Yes), the hold symbol lottery table 222b (see FIG. 11B) is held based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired. A display lottery of symbols (pending symbol lottery) is executed (S1453). The reserved symbol lottery is a lottery process for determining whether to notify that the result of determination of acceptance for the suspension shifted to the suspension 3 is a win.

  It is determined whether or not it is determined that the lottery result in S1453 indicates the notification of a hit (S1454). When it is determined to notify a hit (S1454: Yes), in any of the effective lines H4 or H5 of the reserved symbol displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, the symbol of the result of the determination result It is determined whether notification is possible with the corresponding notification content (S1455).

  Here, the notification content corresponding to the symbol of the result of the pass / fail judgment is that if the symbol type corresponding to the hold 3 is a probability variation that the jackpot A is big hit, any hold symbol among the hold symbols is the effective line It shows that it displays side by side. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot which is a jackpot B, it is shown that among the holding symbols, any holding symbol of the normal holding symbols is arranged and displayed on the effective line.

  If three of the same symbols are displayed among the special holding symbols on the activated line, the player is stopped and displayed that the lottery result stored in the holding 3 is a probability change big hit (big hit A). Can be determined before the In addition, when the same normal holding symbol is displayed three times on the activated line, the player can determine that at least the result of the success or failure judgment is the normal jackpot (jackpot B). It should be noted that even if three normal holding symbols are displayed on the activated line, the result of the success or failure judgment may be a probability change jackpot, so the player can continue playing the game in anticipation of becoming a probability change jackpot. As a result, by the combination of the holding symbols, it is possible to identify the result of the judgment of the acceptance or rejection before the lottery game for holding is started, and it is possible to enjoy the game more.

  In the process of S1455, when it is determined that the hit and hold symbol corresponding to the symbol of the pass / fail judgment can be displayed on the valid line H4 or H5 (S1455: Yes), the valid line capable of displaying the hit and hold symbol. A holding transition symbol including a symbol corresponding to H4 or H5 is selected, and is set in the holding symbol storage area 223e (S1456). Here, when two same reserved symbols corresponding to the result of the pass / fail determination are displayed on the activated line H4 or H5 of the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 and Ds2, the process of S1456 is executed. Therefore, by displaying the same symbol as the holding symbol on which the same holding symbol is displayed, on the effective line H4 or H5 of the holding symbol display area Ds3, three identical holding symbols are displayed on the effective line H4 or H5. Be done. The other symbols displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds3 are displayed on the basis of the value of the effect counter 223f selected in S1451 and the corresponding display position (X1) from the out-of-hold reserved symbol selection table 222e (see FIG. 12B). Any two symbols of ~ X3) are selected.

  In addition, although the explanation was omitted here, if a symbol other than the hit holding symbol displayed in the holding symbol display area Ds 3 is selected, is it not notified of a hit by an effective line other than the winning effective line? If it is a win, it is replaced so that it becomes a different pattern from the win. Here, the symbols to be selected preferentially are determined in advance by setting the priority order, and replacement of the symbols is executed in the priority order.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1455, when it is determined that it is impossible to form the effective line of the hit retention symbol corresponding to the symbol of the hit / fail determination (S1455: No), the result of the hit / fail determination result and the effect counter 223f On the basis of the hold symbol selection table 222d (see FIG. 12A), the hit hold symbol to be displayed on the valid line H3 is selected and set in the corresponding hold symbol storage area 223e (S1457). Here, three reserved symbols selected from the reserved symbol selection table 222d (FIG. 12A) are displayed in the effective line H3 in the reserved symbol display area Ds3.

  As a result, the player can identify that the hold data stored in the hold 3 is a hit determination result. Thus, the player can know that he will win more quickly, and can enjoy the game until the jackpot game is started. Furthermore, since it is possible to know that the jackpot will occur faster, it is possible to prepare for the jackpot game and prepare necessary lending of the game balls, etc. The jackpot game is started with few game balls remaining, and the game is It is possible to prevent problems that would be disadvantageous to the

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1452 that the winning combination information shifted to holding 3 is out (S1452: No), the winning information shifted to holding 3 is the information stored based on the reach winning combination command. It is determined whether there is any, that is, if the variation pattern of outliers is selected (S1458). If it is determined that the change pattern to be put on hold 3 that has been transferred to hold 3 is out and super reach is selected (S1458: Yes), the process of S1459 is executed. Even when it is determined in the process of S1454 that the lottery result in S1453 is out (S1454: No), the process of S1459 is executed.

  In the process of S1459, based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the chance symbol (see FIG. 57 (b)) is to be displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds3. In addition, if the value of the effect counter 223f is any one of "150 to 199", it is determined that the chance eye is to be displayed, and it is determined whether it is "0 to 149" or not. For example, it is determined that the chance eye is not displayed.

  If it is determined in the process of S1460 that a chance eye is to be displayed, each holding symbol corresponding to the chance eye is set as a holding transition symbol in the corresponding holding symbol storage area 223e (S1461). Here, with the corresponding holding symbol storage area 223e, a storage area capable of storing the holding symbol data corresponding to holding 1 to holding 4 is set in the holding symbol storage area 223e, and the storage corresponding to the number of holdings It indicates that the holding symbol is stored in the area.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1458, when the change pattern in which the suspension which has been shifted to the suspension 3 becomes the super reach is not selected (S1458: No), it is determined that the chance eye is not displayed in the process of S1460 (S1460: The processing of S1462 is executed. In the processing of S1462, a holding symbol to be displayed in each display position of the holding symbol display area Ds3 from the out-of-hold holding symbol selection table 222e (refer to FIG. 12B) based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired in the processing of S1451. Each is selected and set in the reserved symbol storage area 223e (S1462). It is determined whether or not there is an effective line (hit line) that is to be hit and held in the hit line H4 or H5 according to the set hold symbol (S1463). If it is determined that there is a hit line (S1463: Yes), the held symbol displayed in the held symbol display area Ds3 corresponding to the hit line is changed to a held symbol which is removed and set in the held symbol storage area 223e (S1464). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no hit line (S1463: No), this process ends.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, the holding symbol for notifying the player of the fourth holding is that a symbol imitating a fish egg is displayed in the holding symbol display area Ds4. Therefore, the player can not determine whether the third symbol in the process of change is acceptable or not from the held fourth symbol. However, when the reserve is digested and the new third symbol fluctuation starts, the reserve symbol displayed in the reserve symbol display area Ds3 is triggered by the shift of the fourth reserve to the third reserve. , It is selected based on the result of the pass / fail determination corresponding to the holding symbol.

  Therefore, in the case where four reservations are stored, the notification notification form based on the result of the determination of acceptance is displayed at the same timing as the change start timing of the third symbol. Therefore, the player is displayed a new holding symbol at the start of the change, and can increase the enjoyment when storing four holdings.

  Referring back to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1411 that the holding ball command has not been received (S1411: No), it is determined from the voice lamp control device 113 whether the winning command is received (S1415). When it is determined that the winning command is received (S1415: Yes), a winning command reception process is executed (S1416). Thereafter, this process ends. The winning command reception process (S1416) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing this winning command reception process (S1416). In the winning command reception process (FIG. 64, S1416), first, it is judged whether the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a is 4, that is, the number of holding balls is 4 (S1641). If it is determined that the number of holding balls is 4 (S1641: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of holding balls is less than 4 (S1641: No), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1642). It is determined whether the received winning command is a winning command (S1644).

  If it is determined that the received winning command is a winning command (S1644: Yes), the holding symbol is drawn from the holding symbol lottery table 222b (FIG. 11B) based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired. A lottery is executed (S1645). It is determined whether the lottery result executed in S1645 is a hit (S1646). When it is determined that the lottery result is a hit (S1646: Yes), the hold symbol corresponding to the symbol type (whether it is jackpot A or jackpot B) indicated by the received prize command is the effective line H4 or H5 It is determined whether it is possible to display (form) a hit symbol (hit line) (S1647). If it is determined that a hit line can not be formed (S1647: No), a jackpot type (symbol type) than the holding symbol selection table 222d (see FIG. 12A) based on the value of the effect counter 223f. In response to, the holding symbol is selected and set as a holding symbol to be displayed in a row in the corresponding holding symbol storage area 223e (set the same holding symbol to X1 to X3) (S1648).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit line can be formed in the process of S1647 (S1647: Yes), the reserved symbol corresponding to the hit line is set for the corresponding display position, and is set to the other display position. Based on the value of the effect counter 223f, the holding symbol to be displayed is selected from the out-of-hold holding symbol selection table 222e and set (S1649).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1644, when the received winning command is the off winning command (S1644: No), it is determined whether the received winning command is the out-of-reach reach winning command (S1650). If it is determined that the command is an out-of-reach reach winning command (S1650: Yes), the processing of S1651 is executed. In the process of S1646, when it is determined that the result of the determination in step S1645 is the display of cancellation (S1646: No), the process of S1651 is performed.

  In the process of S1651, based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, a lottery (chance lottery) of whether or not to display the chance eye is executed (S1651). About this chance eye lottery, since it is processing similar to S1459 of suspension transfer processing 2 (Drawing 63, S1450), detailed explanation is omitted. When the lottery result in the process of S1651 indicates the chance eye, it is determined whether or not the lottery is performed (S1652). If it is determined that the chance eye is to be displayed (S1652: Yes), the chance eye is set as the hold symbol and the corresponding hold symbol storage area 223e is set (S1653). Thereafter, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the chance eye is not displayed (S1652), the process of S1650 is executed if it is determined that it is not the out-of-reach reach winning command (S1650). In the process of S1654, each holding symbol is selected based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, and is set in the corresponding holding symbol storage area 223e (S1654). It is determined whether or not there is a hit line on which the held symbol is displayed while the hit symbol is displayed on the effective line H4 or H5 of the held symbol (S1655). If it is determined that there is a hit line (S1655: Yes), the held symbol corresponding to the hit line is changed to the left hold symbol and is set in the held symbol storage area 223e (S1656). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1655 that there is no hit line (S1655: No), this process is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the winning command is received, the holding symbol is selected based on the result of the determination of the winning command or the variation pattern indicated by the winning command, and the information is notified to the player. Therefore, the player can determine whether or not a hit ball is included in the hold balls by the combination of the hold symbols. In addition, since the same holding symbol is displayed on the effective line H4 or H5, the hit is notified, so that the holding symbol is also displayed for the holding symbol displayed for the holding whose judgment result is out of order. A game can be played in anticipation of being aligned on the activated line H4 or H5. Therefore, the player becomes more interested in the display mode of the holding symbol, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (S1330) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (S1330).

  In frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S1330 in FIG. 65), first, it is determined whether the value of the SW effective time counter 223g is 0 (S1331). In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted in this embodiment, the fluctuation time is set to this SW effective time counter 223g based on the fluctuation | variation start of a 3rd symbol. If it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223g is 0 (S1331: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223g is a value larger than 0 (S1331: No), the value of the SW effective time counter 223g is subtracted and updated (S1332). The value corresponding to the passage of time is subtracted from the value of the SW effective time counter 223g (in the present embodiment, the count value corresponding to the cycle of executing the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (S1330) is subtracted) .

  It is determined whether the player has pressed the frame button 22 (S1333). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1333: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed by the player (S1333: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1334). The held symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is hit on any of the valid lines H1 to H5 to determine whether the held symbol is displayed (hit notification completed) (S1335). If it is determined that the hit notification has been made (S1335: Yes), it is determined whether the displayed hit holding symbol is displayed as a special hold symbol (S1336).

  If it is determined that the displayed hit holding symbol is a special holding symbol (S1336: Yes), the holding symbol corresponding to the displayed holding symbol is set again in the holding symbol storage area 223e (S1337) .

  In the present embodiment, the same holding symbol is set again. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the processing may be ended without updating the data of the holding symbol storage area 223e without setting it again. With this configuration, the control load of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1336, when it is determined that the hit symbol being displayed is the normal symbol (S1336: No), the symbol selection table 222d (FIG. 12) is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223f. (A) See) Select a holding symbol from the line, overwrite it as a hit holding symbol on the hit line, and set it in the holding symbol storage area 223e (S1338). Thereafter, the process of S1339 is executed.

  As described above, even when the hit holding symbol is displayed, if the hit holding symbol being displayed is the normal hold symbol, the hit holding symbol is changed by the player pressing the frame button 22. Therefore, the player can enjoy the change of the hit and hold symbol by pressing the frame button 22. In addition, when the determination result of the third symbol in fluctuation is a probability variation big hit (big hit A), it may be changed to a special hold symbol by lottery and displayed, and the player is expected to have a probability variation jackpot Holding, the frame button 22 can be pressed to change the hit design. Therefore, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of pressing the frame button 22 and to improve the player's interest in the game.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1335, when it is determined that the displayed holding symbol is not displayed in the hit holding symbol (S1335: No), the processing of S1339 is executed. In the process of S1339, it is determined whether a chance (see FIG. 57B) is displayed on any of the valid lines H1 to H5 (S1339). If it is determined that the chance is displayed (S1339: Yes), the processing of S1337 is executed, and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the chance is not displayed (S1339: No), it is determined whether or not winning data is stored in the winning information storage area 223i based on the winning command (S1340).

  If it is determined that there is no hit in the winning information storage area 223i (S1340: No), based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired, of the valid lines H1 to H3, the number of reservations from the loss reservation symbol selection table 222e It selects as a holding symbol corresponding to a large number of holdings, and sets to the corresponding holding symbol holding storage area 223e (S1341).

  By configuring in this way, the holding symbol of one valid line is updated among the holding symbols, so the player can hit the frame button 22 every time the holding symbol is not aligned and hit the effective line of the holding symbol. Can be given to In addition, even when the holding ball is not stored, the player can quickly generate the holding ball and give the player a feeling of wanting to enjoy the effect by the holding symbol, and the motivation to play the game can be amplified.

  Here, in the present embodiment, only the holding symbols corresponding to the holding with the largest holding number among the valid lines H1 to H3, that is, 1 to 3 holding numbers, are newly selected. Not only that, it may be configured to reselect all the reserved symbols. In that case, a plurality of effect counters 223f which are not updated in synchronization are set, and each holding symbol is selected according to the value, or an effect counter 223f which differs according to a predetermined calculation according to the value of one effect counter 223f. It may be configured to generate the value of. By configuring in this manner, when the player presses the frame button 22, more hold symbols can be updated, and the sense of expectation displayed in the hit hold symbol can be amplified.

  In the process of S1342, it is determined whether or not there is an effective line (hit line) to be a hit symbol in the held symbol being displayed (S1342), and if there is an active line to be a hit symbol (S1342: Yes), a hit One of the holding symbols corresponding to the line (in the present embodiment, the holding symbol displayed in the holding symbol display area Ds3) is changed to the holding symbol and set in the holding symbol storage area 223e (S1343). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1342 that there is no hit line (S1342: No), this process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning information storage area 223i is hit in the process of S1340 (S1340: Yes), the holding symbol lottery table 222b (see FIG. 11 (b) is referred to based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. ) The hold symbol lottery is executed (S1344). It is determined whether the lottery result executed in the process of S1344 is a hit display (S1345). If it is determined that the lottery result is out of display (S1345: No), the processing of S1341 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1345, when it is determined that the lottery result is a hit display (S1345: Yes), the hit line symbol is held by updating the line symbol on the line H3 to the line H4 or H5. It is determined whether the displayed hit line can be formed (S1346). If it is determined that the hit line can be formed (S1346: Yes), the reserved symbol corresponding to the hit line is set to the display position of the corresponding effective line, and the symbols of the other display positions are displayed in the effect counter 223f. Based on the value, it is set in the reserved symbol storage area 223e (S1348). Thereafter, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1346 that a hit line can not be formed (S1346: No), the hit type of the hit information stored in the win information storage area 223i and the effect counter 223f. Corresponding to the value and the winning symbol selection table 222d from the winning number corresponding to the winning information as a pending symbol of the hit pending symbol (set the same pending symbol in any of the effective line H1 ~ H3 set three) corresponding It sets to the reservation symbol storage area 223e which it does. Thereafter, this process ends.

  As described above, since the player can operate the frame button 22 to change the displayed holding symbol, the player can receive the holding symbol even when the hit holding symbol is not displayed. And the frame button 22 can be operated. In addition, when the hit holding symbol is already displayed, the hit holding symbol is configured not to be updated to the holding symbol indicating the detachment, so that the player is worried about the notification information. Problems can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the third symbol is shortened and the efficiency of the game is improved, the time for displaying the notice effects etc. using the third symbol is shortened, resulting in a monotonous game. There is. However, with the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the advance notice effect of notifying the result of the determination of the success or failure of the third symbol to be displayed in a variable manner, using the time when the reserved symbol is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the trouble that the player is bored.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Fourth Embodiment>
The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, as the holding symbols, the holding symbols indicating the number of holding balls are displayed as random symbols, and the combination is used to notify the determination of the success or failure of the third symbol being changed.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, the holding symbol is configured by a symbol row configured with a plurality of symbols, and the symbol row is for a predetermined time when triggered by the generation of the holding ball. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that it is configured to be displayed in a stopped state after being scrolled, and to be notified of a yes / no determination by a combination with a holding symbol indicating another holding ball. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

<Configuration of Hold Symbol in Fourth Embodiment>
Fig.66 (a) shows the symbol row of the retention symbol displayed on the sub display area Ds of the 3rd symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 4th embodiment. As in the first embodiment, the holding symbol and the special holding symbol are respectively configured, and each holding symbol is assigned a number indicating the order in which it is arranged in the symbol row. The reserved symbol array is scrolled and displayed in ascending order of symbol array in the corresponding reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds3 triggered by the generation of the reserved spheres of 1 to 3 of the reserved spheres.

  FIG. 66 (b) is a view showing a display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth embodiment. Since the configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, the detailed description will be omitted.

<About the display mode of the retention symbol in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 67-73, the display mode of the holding symbol in this 4th Embodiment is demonstrated. 67 to 73 are views showing only the sub display area Ds in the display area of the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

  FIG. 67 (a) shows the case where the third game symbol is fluctuating in the main display area Dm and there is no holding ball, the gaming ball is won in the entrance 64 and one holding ball is generated. FIG. When the game ball is won in the entrance 64 and the first holding ball (Hold 1) is generated, variable display (dynamic display) of the holding symbol row is started as shown in FIG. 67 (a). The symbol columns are displayed in ascending order by scrolling from right to left. In this embodiment, based on the remaining time of the third symbol in the variable display, the scroll display is performed with a fluctuation time of either 5 seconds or 3 seconds. After the scroll display is started, when the fluctuation time passes, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), stop display is made with a predetermined holding symbol (the holding symbol determined by lottery stops at a predetermined position) Ru.

  FIG. 68 (a) shows the display mode of the holding symbol when the game ball is further prized at the entrance 64 and the holding ball is generated after the state of FIG. 67 (b) and the holding becomes two pieces. FIG. As shown in FIG. 67 (b), when the game ball is won in the entrance 64 and the second holding ball (holding 2) is generated (established), it is stopped in the holding symbol display area Ds1 The fluctuation display is started in which the holding symbol of holding 1 being displayed scrolls from right to left. At the same time, the holding symbol indicating the second holding ball is displayed in the holding symbol display area Ds2, and scroll display is started from the right direction to the left direction of the holding symbol display area Ds2.

  After that, the holding symbols corresponding to the holding 1 and the holding 2 are scrolled for a predetermined time, and then the holding symbols of the holding 1 and the holding 2 are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 68 (b). In the example shown in FIG. 68 (b), two octopus symbols are aligned on the effective line H4, and a line display notifying the effective line H4 that has reached the reach is displayed on the effective line H4, and the reserved symbol display area Ds4. The word "reach" is displayed indicating that the holding symbol is in the reach state. In addition, when the symbols of Hold 1 and Hold 2 are stopped and displayed, neither line display nor characters are displayed if reach is not reached. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the notification display of characters and the like is not performed when the reach is not achieved. However, the present invention is not limited to this.

  In the case of FIG. 69 (a), when the gaming ball is further won in the entrance 64 from the state of the reach of FIG. 67 (b), the third holding ball (pending 3) is generated (established) It is a figure showing the display mode of the reservation symbol of. In the state in which the holding symbol shown in FIG. 67 (b) is reached, if the holding ball is further generated, the holding symbols of the holding 1 and holding 2 that are reaching are not displayed in a variable manner, and only the holding symbol of holding 3 Varying display. Thereafter, the reserved symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 69 (b) after passing from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. At this time, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), when the tach symbol is stopped even on the hold symbol of hold 3 on the effective line H4, the character of “chance !!” is displayed on the hold symbol display area Ds3 and the hold ball is displayed. Informing the player that the hit is included. Furthermore, since the octopus symbol is one of the special hold symbols, the player is informed that there is a probability change result that is a probability change jackpot (big hit A) while being held.

  On the other hand, when the Tako symbol does not stop on the effective line H4 as a suspension symbol on the suspension 3, it becomes a suspension symbol indicating a detachment. At that time, the characters “Sorry !!” are displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds3.

  FIG. 70 (a) is a diagram showing a suspension display mode in a state in which the suspension number is displayed with the suspension symbol in the state of the number of suspension being four. From this state, the third symbol is stopped and displayed, and then, when the variable display of the third symbol is newly started, the variable display of the third symbol for the hold 1 is started, and the hold 2 to hold 4 is hold 1 to hold Shifted to 3 At that time, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the display pattern of “Egg”, which is the holding symbol of holding 4 is changed to a broken display mode, and the holding symbol display area Ds3 is shifted from holding 4 to holding 3 The symbols are scrolled from right to left and displayed variably.

  By displaying in this way, it is possible to show the player as if each holding symbol was born from the egg. At that time, the holding symbol which has been shifted to holding 1 to holding 2 is also variably displayed. After that, after being variably displayed for a predetermined time, the stop display is performed with a combination of predetermined holding symbols (see FIG. 71A).

  FIG. 71 (b) is a diagram showing a notification symbol displayed when informing the player that the result of determination of the first holding ball is a hit or not. In this case, when the hold 1 is generated and the held symbol is variably displayed in the same manner as normal and displayed at high speed, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), the symbols of all the held symbol rows are the same symbol (for example, , Ankou symbol) is changed, and it is stopped and displayed in the state where three same symbols are displayed as it is. As described above, by displaying in a special display manner, it is possible to accurately inform the player of which holding ball will be a big hit.

  FIG. 72 (a) shows that the number of pending symbols displayed in pending 2 and pending 3 changes next, with the pending symbols being displayed with the pending symbols 1 to 3 being displayed in a stopped state, with the pending number being three. It is a figure showing a player that it is a fixed state which forbids change start, even if conditions which become a start are satisfied. As shown in FIG. 72 (a), with regard to the holding symbols displayed on paper holdings 2 and 3 with holding, the holding 2 and the holding 3 will start to be changed and then the third symbol will start to be changed and displayed. In the case of the reach display mode when shifting to 1 and hold 2, the change is prohibited and the display mode as it is is maintained.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the variation of the third symbol corresponding to hold 1 is started, and the symbols of hold 2 and hold 3 are shifted to hold 1 and hold 2. After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the characters “reach !!” are displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds3.

  FIG. 73 (a) is a view showing a display mode of the holding symbol displayed when the gaming ball newly wins the ball entry port 64 while the holding symbol is variably displayed. FIG. 73 (a) shows a case where hold 3 is established while the hold 1 and the hold 2 are fluctuatingly displayed. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 73 (a), the reserved symbol of the egg is displayed as the reserved symbol of the reserved 3 in the reserved symbol display area Ds3. As described above, when the holding ball is established during the fluctuation display of the holding symbol, the fluctuation display of the holding symbol to the new holding ball is not performed, and the egg indicating that the fluctuation display of the holding symbol is on standby The hold symbol is displayed. Thereafter, after the fluctuation display of the holding symbols of the holding 1 and the holding 2 is stopped and displayed, the egg is broken, and the holding symbols are displayed by being changed from among them. At that time, if the holding symbols of holding 1 and holding 2 are not reach-displayed either, they are displayed in a variable manner.

  Thus, in this embodiment, it was comprised so that it would alert | report about the success / failure determination result in pending | holding by pending | holding symbol. Therefore, the player can enjoy not only the variation display mode of the third symbol but also the display mode of the hold symbol. Further, since the holding symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, the more the number of holding balls is increased, the more the effect of the holding symbol is, and the player may feel that he wants to hold more holding balls. it can. Therefore, more game balls can be consumed by the player.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 According to Fourth Embodiment
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 79. In addition, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted about the structure same as 1st Embodiment.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Audio Lamp Controller 113 in Fourth Embodiment
The electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77. FIG. The RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment has a winning information storage area 223i, a hold information storage area 223 j, and a hold status with respect to the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. A flag 223k, a pending reach flag 223m, a pending hold flag 223n, and a fluctuation time counter 223p are respectively added. The winning information storage area 223i has the same configuration as that described above in the third embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the holding ball is established, the holding information storage area 223 j is a storage area where information on the holding symbol is selected and information on the holding symbol is stored. In the holding information storage area 223j, storage areas are set for the holding balls (holding 1 to holding 4). Then, when the holding ball is digested (the variation of the third symbol corresponding to the holding ball is started), each data stored in the holding information storage area 223 j is also shifted to the storage area corresponding to the number of holdings one before Ru.

  The suspension hit flag 223m is a flag indicating that the suspension symbol is displayed on any of the valid lines H1 to H5 and the suspension symbol (the same suspension symbol is displayed side by side) is displayed. The per-hold flag 223 m is set to on based on the display being set with the per-hold symbol, and is then set to off when the hold is digested and is not displayed with the per-hold symbol.

  The holding reach flag 223 m is a flag indicating that the displayed holding symbol is displayed in the reach display mode. The holding reach flag is set to on based on the fact that the stop display in the reach display mode is determined when the holding symbols of holding 1 and holding 2 are to be variably displayed. After that, the reserve is digested or the reserve symbol of the reserve 3 is displayed in a variable manner, and it is set to be off when it becomes an outright reserve symbol (the same reserve symbol is not aligned on the activated line).

  The hold hold flag 223 n is a flag indicating that the variable display of the held symbol being displayed is in a maintenance state in which the fluctuation display is prohibited. The hold hold flag 223n is a flag that can be individually set for each of the hold 1 to hold 3, and is configured to be capable of determining which hold symbol fluctuation display is prohibited. The hold flag 223n is set to ON when it is determined that the hold state for inhibiting the fluctuation display of the held symbol being displayed is determined, and the hold for which the hold flag is targeted is digested, or reach It will be set to off when it comes to the state.

  The fluctuation time counter 223p is a counter for measuring the fluctuation display time of the third symbol. The variation pattern of the third symbol is determined, and the variation time indicated by the variation pattern is set in the variation time counter 223p. The fluctuation time counter 223p is updated based on the passage of fluctuation time. The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the remaining fluctuation time of the third symbol during fluctuation from the fluctuation time counter 223p. In the present embodiment, when the hold is established, the fluctuation time of the held symbol is also determined based on the remaining time of the third symbol, so in this case, the remaining fluctuation from the fluctuation time counter 223p The time is determined.

  With reference to FIG. 76, the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. The ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment compares the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the first embodiment with a sub variation pattern table 222f, a hold reach lottery table 222g, and reach hold selection. Each table 222h is added. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted. The sub variation pattern table 222f has the same configuration as that described in the third embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The on-hold reach lottery table 222g is a data table shown in FIG. 77 (a). The hold reach lottery table 222g (see FIG. 77 (a)) displays the stop display mode of the hold symbol based on the value of the effect counter 223f, in any one of the reach display mode, the hold display mode, and the out-of-display mode. It is a data table for deciding whether to When the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223i, the reach display mode and the hold display mode are more easily selected (the probability of being selected is higher) than when the winning information is not stored. It is set to

  By configuring in this way, the player can be made to expect that there will be a hold that will be hit in the hold by the display mode of the holding symbol being displayed in the reach display mode or the hold display mode. . Therefore, the player can give an interest in the display mode of the holding symbol, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early in the game.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (b), the reach-hold selection table 222h is a selection for determining the type of the hold symbol to be displayed in the reach state on the effective line H4 or H5 when the hold symbol is displayed in the reach display mode. It is a table.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device 114 in Fourth Embodiment
The electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 79. In the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 in the fourth embodiment, a hold variation display data selection table 234a5 is added to the NAND flash memory 234a of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment. It is done. Further, in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in the fourth embodiment, a selection counter 233 m is added to the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as the configuration of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the holding variation display data selection table 234a4 is a selection table for selecting the variation pattern of the holding symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the selection counter 233m. In addition, each change pattern is a hit notification, a release notification, a change hold symbol (hold symbol of hold 1 to hold 3) indicated by the display hold fluctuation pattern received from the audio lamp control device 113, a change content (reach display mode, According to the information on the hold display mode) and the fluctuation time (3 seconds fluctuation, 5 seconds fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern can be selected. The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 selects the hold display data table based on the fluctuation pattern selected from the hold fluctuation display data selection table 234a4, and sets it in the display data table buffer. The pending display data table is set (stored) in the pending change display data selection table 234a4.

  The selection counter 233m is counted in the range of 0 to 199, and is used when selecting the hold fluctuation pattern from the hold fluctuation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 10C). In an initial state such as power-on, the initial value is counted from 0, and when it is counted up to 199, the initial value is updated to 0. In the present embodiment, although illustration is omitted, each selection processing of the selection counter 233m is performed after the processing of S1806 of the main processing (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is performed. During the waiting time until execution, it is repeatedly updated one by one.

Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller 110 in Fourth Embodiment
Control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The control process executed by the main control unit 110 in the fourth embodiment is the start winning process (see FIG. 17) in the timer interrupt process (as opposed to the control process executed by the main control process 110 in the first embodiment). FIG. 20, S105) is changed to the start winning process 2 (FIG. 60, S115). Since the start winning process 2 (FIG. 60, S115) is the same process as that already described in the third embodiment, the detailed description will be omitted. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

<About control processing of voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 to 90, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described.

  The main processing (see FIG. 81) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The main process (see FIG. 81) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment is different from the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. The pending number display update process (FIG. 34, S1306) is for the pending number display update process 2 (FIG. 90, S1360), and the command determination process (FIG. 28, S1311) is for the command determination process 4 (FIG. 82, S170). has been changed. In addition, a reserved symbol display process (FIG. 84, S1380) is added. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted. The command determination process 4 (FIG. 82, S1370) and the holding symbol display process (FIG. 84, S1380) will be described first, and then the number-of-holds display updating process 2 (FIG. 90, S1360) will be described.

  The command determination processing 4 (S1370) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 4 (S1370). The command determination process 4 (FIG. 82, S1370) in the fourth embodiment differs from the command determination process (FIG. 28, S1311) in the first embodiment in the pending display update process (FIG. 29, S1404). It is changed to the process 3 (FIG. 83, S1470), and each process to S1417-S1418 is added. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, pending display update process 3 (S1470) which is one process in the command determination process 4 (FIG. 82, S1370) will be described. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing the pending number display updating process 3 (S1470).

  In the pending display update process 3 (FIG. 83, S1470), first, each data of the pending symbol storage area 223e is shifted to a storage area corresponding to the number of pending balls immediately before (S1420). Each data in the pending information storage area 223 j is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the number of pending balls immediately before (S 1472). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received is set in the fluctuation time counter 223p (S1473).

  Referring back to FIG. 82, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1408 of the command determination process 4 (FIG. 82, S1370) that the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S1408: No), the process of S1417 is executed. In the process of S1417, it is judged whether or not the winning command is received from the main control device 110 (S1417). If it is determined in the process of S1417 that a winning command has been received (S1417: Yes), the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223i and the hold information storage area 223j based on the received command. It is stored in the area corresponding to the number of holding balls (S1418).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, a reserved symbol display process (S1380) which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 81) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. . FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the held symbol display process (S1380).

  In the reserved symbol display process (FIG. 84, S1380), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is in progress (S1381). Although illustration is omitted about determination of whether or not the jackpot game is in progress, the jackpot start command (opening command) is received from the main control device 110, and then the ending command indicating the end of the jackpot is received. It is determined by By setting the flag on based on the reception of the opening command and setting the jackpot determination flag on which the flag is set off based on the reception of the ending command, the determination can be easily made.

  If it is determined in the process of S1381 that a jackpot game is being played (S1381: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S1381: No), it is determined whether or not the holding symbol is variably displayed (S1382). If it is determined that the holding symbol is changing (S1382: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reserved symbol is being stopped (S1382: No), it is determined whether the remaining variation time of the third symbol being varied is 5 seconds or less (S1383). The determination of the remaining fluctuation time is executed by determining the value of the fluctuation time counter 223p.

  If it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 5 seconds or less (S1383: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is longer than 5 seconds (S1383: No), it is judged whether or not there is a held symbol data before fluctuation in the holding information storage area 223j (S1384). Although it is not shown in the figure, it is not shown that the pending fluctuation data set in the area corresponding to the number of pending balls in the pending information storage area 223j is on. It is determined by whether it is set. This pending change completion flag is set to ON when the process of S1385 is executed. Then, as for the pending change flag, when the stored data is shifted, the pending change flag of the area is set to OFF, and the shifted previous pending change flag is set to ON. Thus, after all the holds have been digested, the hold variation flag for all areas is set to off.

  If it is determined in the process of S1384 that there is no pre-variation data in the hold information storage area 223j (S1384: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is data before fluctuation (S1384: Yes), a display hold fluctuation start command corresponding to the corresponding hold before fluctuation is set (S1385).

  Each data of the pending information storage area 223j is shifted (S1386), and a pending change start process is executed (S1387).

  This suspension change start processing (S1387) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this suspension change start process (S1387).

  In the suspension change start process (FIG. 85, S1387), first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired. It is determined whether the on-hold reach flag 223m is set (S1512). If it is determined that the on-hold reach flag 223m is on (S1512: Yes), reach on-hold display processing is executed (S1513).

  The reach hold display process (S1513) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the reach hold display process (S1513). In the reach hold display process (S1513 in FIG. 86), first, it is determined whether or not the winning information indicating a hit in the winning information storage area 223j is stored (set) (S1531). That is, it is determined whether there is a hold to be hit. When it is determined that there is a hit to be held (S1531: Yes), a held symbol lottery is executed from the held symbol lottery table 222b (see FIG. 11 (b)) based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. (S1532).

  It is determined whether the lottery result in S1532 is a hit display (S1534). If it is determined that the lottery result is a hit display that causes the hit symbol to be displayed and displayed on the activated line with the hit symbol (S1534), the hit symbol corresponding to the reach hold symbol is held symbol corresponding to the activated 3 line Are set in the reserved symbol storage area 223e (S1535). Thereafter, the process of S1537 is performed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1534, even if it is determined that the lottery result is out of display or hit display, if the hit symbol type of hit does not correspond to the reach hold symbol type (S1534: No), the process of S1536 Is executed. In the process of S1536, the holding symbol set to -1 from the holding symbol of the reach holding symbol is set in the holding symbol storage area 223e as the holding symbol on the activated line of the holding 3 that is the reach (S1536) . Thereafter, the process of S1537 is performed.

  In the present embodiment, since the reserved symbol is displayed in a symbol row, by setting the stop position (one of X1 to X3) of one reserved symbol, the reserved symbol displayed in another display position is also automatically Setting (decision). In the process of S1537, it is determined based on the value of the fluctuation time counter 223p whether the remaining fluctuation time of the third symbol during fluctuation is 7 seconds or more (S1537).

  In the process of S1537, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 7 seconds or more (S1537: Yes), the reach length holding fluctuation pattern based on the holding symbol of holding 3 set in the holding symbol storage area 223e Is set (S1538). On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is less than 7 seconds (S1538: No), the reach short holding fluctuation pattern is set based on the holding symbol of holding 3 set in the holding symbol storage area 223e. (S1539). After the processes of S1538 and S1539 are performed, this process ends.

  In addition, the reach length suspension change pattern and reach short suspension change pattern set in the process of S1538 and S1539 are out of being displayed as a suspension suspension pattern or whether a suspension symbol is a hit suspension variation pattern displayed by a hit suspension symbol. It can be determined whether it is a hold change pattern. In addition, a holding symbol (in the present embodiment, a holding symbol of holding 3) corresponding to the number of holding balls to be variably displayed is configured to be distinguishable.

  As described above, when the holding symbol is displayed in the reach state (the holding symbol of the holding symbol of holding 1 and holding 2 is the same holding symbol being displayed on the effective line H4 or H5, the holding symbol of the holding 3 changes) When started, only the hold 3 is set to be displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, while maintaining the reach state, the player can play a game expecting whether or not the hit holding symbol will be established (displayed). In addition, when it is displayed in the off-hold symbol, it is configured to stop display in the-1-frame hold symbol from the combination to be a hit-hold symbol, even when the player is stopped in the off-hold symbol, It is possible to play a game expecting to be just before the stop if it becomes a hit holding symbol.

  Returning to FIG. 85, the description will be continued. After the reach hold display process (FIG. 86, S1513) is performed, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1512, when it is determined that the holding reach flag 223m is off, that is, the holding symbols of holding 1 and holding 2 are not displayed as reach holding symbols (S1512: No), change start It is determined whether or not the holding symbol that triggered the event is a holding symbol of the holding 3 (S1514). In the process of S1514, when it is determined that the holding symbol that triggered the start of the change is the holding symbol of holding 3 (S1514: Yes), whether the holding per capita flag 223k is on, ie, already holding It is determined whether the symbol is displayed as a hit symbol on any of the activated lines (S1515). If it is determined that the suspension hit flag 223m is off (S1515: Yes), based on the value of the effect counter 223f, select the symbol to be stopped and displayed at the display position X1 of suspension 3 from the loss suspension symbol selection table 222e Are set in the corresponding hold symbol storage area 223e, and the hold 1 to 3 offset length hold fluctuation pattern and the hold 1 to 3 offset short hold fluctuation pattern are set based on the remaining fluctuation time (S1516). After the process of S1516 is performed, the process of S1517 is performed.

  In addition, although illustration is omitted, the outlier reserve symbol selection table 222e in the fourth embodiment is the reserve 1 to 3 corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223f with respect to the reserve symbol selection table 222e in the first embodiment. The difference is that a symbol to be stopped and displayed is set at the display position X1 of. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily select a holding symbol of an outset to be displayed randomly.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, if the remaining fluctuation time of the third symbol is 7 seconds or more, the long holding fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation time 5 seconds) is selected, and if the remaining fluctuation time is less than 7 seconds, the short holding fluctuation pattern (Variation time 3 seconds) is selected.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1515 that the hit-to-hold flag 223k is off (S1515: No), the hold 3 display process is executed (S1517). The hold 3 display process (S1517) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the hold 3 display process. In the pending 3 display process (FIG. 87, S1517), a process regarding determination of a pending change pattern of a pending symbol that is started when the pending of the pending 3 is established is executed.

  In the hold 3 display process (FIG. 87, S1517), first, it is determined whether or not winning winning information (holding of win) is set in the winning information storage area 223i (S1541). If it is determined that the winning information is set in the winning information storage area 223i (S1541: Yes), based on the obtained design counter 223f, based on the holding symbol lottery table 222b (see FIG. 11 (b)) A reserved symbol lottery is executed (S1542). It is determined whether the lottery result executed in S1542 is a hit display for displaying a hit holding symbol (S1543).

  If it is determined that the lottery result is a hit display (S1543: Yes), the hit-to-hold flag 223k is set to ON (S1544). Thereafter, based on the obtained effect counter 223f, a hit symbol is selected from the held symbol selection table 222d (see FIG. 12A), and the hit symbol storage area 223e is hit and set as a held symbol (S1545). Based on the remaining fluctuation time, a hit reach short hold fluctuation pattern or a hit reach length hold fluctuation pattern indicating the hit holding symbol set in the process of S1545 is set (S1546).

  In the present embodiment, since the determination of the effective line H4 or H5 on which the reach display of the holding symbol is displayed is performed by the display control device 114, the holding fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 is The type of display mode (per reach reach change), the per hold pattern, the change time, etc. can be determined from the command. The reserved symbol displayed on the actual third symbol display device 81 is determined by the effective line for displaying the hit reserved symbol determined by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1541 that the winning information to be hit is not set in the winning information storage area 223i (S1541: No), or in the process of S1543, it is determined that the lottery result of S1542 is out of display If it has been (S1543: No), the processing of S1547 is executed. In the process of S1547, based on the acquired effect counter 223f, a hold reach lottery is performed to determine the type (reach, hold, or drop) of the off hold fluctuation pattern from the hold reach lottery table 222g.

  Here, three types of reach, hold, and release are set as the type of the out-of-hold fluctuation pattern. The display mode of reach is a hold symbol of hold 1 and hold 2, and after the same hold symbol is displayed on the activated line H4 or H5 in a stopped state to be in the reach display state, the hold symbol of hold 3 has become reach This is a display mode in which a reserved symbol different from the symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

  The display mode of the hold is a display mode in which the hold 1 is stopped and displayed, the hold symbol of the hold 2 and the hold 3 is stopped and the same hold symbol is displayed on the activated line H4 or H5, and the stop is displayed in the lost hold symbol. The display mode of out of alignment is a display mode in which stop display is performed in a combination in which the same reserved symbol is not displayed side by side continuously in the activated line H4 or H5.

  It is determined whether the lottery result executed in S1547 is reach (S1548). If it is determined that the lottery result is a reach (S1548: Yes), the reach holding symbol is selected from the reach holding symbol selection table 222h based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired, and the corresponding holding symbol is selected. The storage area 223e is set out as the reach symbol (S1550). Based on the remaining fluctuation time, an outreach length holding fluctuation pattern and an outlier short holding fluctuation pattern indicating the set out-of-hold symbols are selected (S1551).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1548 that the lottery result of S1547 is not reach (S1548: No), it is determined whether the lottery result of S1547 is hold (S1552). If it is determined that the lottery result is hold (S1552: Yes), the hold flag 223n is set to ON (S1553). Based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired, the normal retention symbol is selected from the retention symbol selection table 222d (see FIG. 12A) (S1554).

  Based on the remaining fluctuation time, the out-of-hold length holding fluctuation pattern or out-of-hold short holding fluctuation pattern indicating the symbol selected in the process of S1554 is set. When it is determined that the lottery result is not the hold (S1552: No), the process of S1556 is executed. In the process of S1556, the out-of-order holding symbol to be displayed on the display position X1 of the first to third holding is determined from the out-of-hold holding symbol selection table 222e based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f (S1557). Thereafter, this process ends.

  In addition, although illustration is omitted, the outlier reserve symbol selection table 222e in the fourth embodiment is the reserve 1 to 3 corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223f with respect to the reserve symbol selection table 222e in the first embodiment. The difference is that a symbol to be stopped and displayed is set at the display position X1 of. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily select a holding symbol of an outset to be displayed randomly.

  Returning to FIG. 85, the description will be continued. After the hold 3 display process (FIG. 87, S1517) is executed, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1514, when it is determined that the trigger for becoming the fluctuation start of the holding symbol is not the establishment of the holding 3 (S1514: No), the trigger for the fluctuation start of the holding symbol is It is determined whether the hold 2 is established (S1518). If it is determined that the start of fluctuation of the holding symbol is the fact that holding 2 is established (S1518: Yes), the holding 2 display process is executed (S1519). The hold 2 display process (S1519) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the hold 2 display process (S1519). In the holding 2 display process (FIG. 88, S1519), processing relating to the fluctuation of the holding symbol whose fluctuation is started is executed based on the holding 2 being established.

  In the hold 2 display process (FIG. 88, S1519), first, it is determined whether the hold per cap flag 223k is off, that is, whether the hit design is not displayed in the hold 1 effective line H1 (S1561). If it is determined that the hit winning flag 223k is off (S1561: Yes), it is determined whether or not hit winning information is set in the win information storage area 223i (whether there is a hit hold) (S1562). If it is determined that the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223i (S1562: Yes), based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired, refer to the reservation symbol lottery table 222b (see FIG. 11 (b) ) The hold symbol lottery is executed (S1563).

  If it is determined that the lottery result executed in the process of S1563 is a hit display (S1564: Yes), the with-hold flag 223k is set to ON (S1565). With respect to the suspension of winning, based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired, select the winning reservation symbol from the holding symbol selection table 222d (see FIG. 12 (a)), and set it in the corresponding storage area 223e ( S1566). In this case, the held symbol selected at the display positions X1 to X3 is set. In the present embodiment, in the case where the winning combination information in which both the hold 1 and the hold 2 are successful is stored, the hold symbol is set and the hold symbol is set. In this way, priority is given to holding with an earlier hold order.

  With respect to the other hold (in the present embodiment, hold 1 or hold 2), it is stopped at the display position X1 of hold 1 or hold 2 from the out-of-hold hold symbol selection table 222e based on the acquired value of effect counter 223f. The off holding symbol is selected and set in the holding symbol storage area 223e (S1567). Based on the set holding pattern, a long fluctuation pattern per holding 1-2 or a short fluctuation pattern per holding 1-2 corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time is set (S1568). In addition, as for this command, the holding symbol of each holding, the variable holding symbol (in this embodiment, holding 1-2), etc. are comprised so that identification is possible.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1561 that the hit-to-hold flag 223k is on (S1561: No), the hold symbol to be displayed on the display position X1 of the hold 2 is stopped based on the value of the effect counter 223f. , And is selected from the reserve symbol selection table 222e and set in the corresponding reserve symbol storage area 223e (S1569). A long hold fluctuation pattern or a short hold fluctuation pattern per hold 1-2 corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time is set based on the hold symbol of each hold set (S1570).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1562, if a hold is not stored in the winning information storage area 223i (S1562: No), or if it is determined in the process of S1564 that the lottery result in S1563 is out of display ( The process of S1564: No) and S1571 is performed. In the process of S1571, a pending symbol is displayed on the display position X1 of each pending (pending 1 to 2) from the outright pending symbol selection table 222e based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f for the pending 1 to 2 Is selected and set in the corresponding reserved symbol storage area 223e (S1571). On the basis of the holding symbols set for each hold, a hold 1-2 out-of-length hold fluctuation pattern or a hold 1-2 short-out short hold fluctuation pattern is selected corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time (S 1572). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 85, the description will be continued. After the hold 2 display process (FIG. 88, S1519) is executed, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1518, when it is determined that the trigger for becoming the fluctuation start of the suspension symbol is that the suspension 1 is established (S1518: No), the suspension 1 display process is executed (S1520) . The hold 1 display process (S1520) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the suspension 1 display process (S1520). In the hold 1 display process (FIG. 89, S 1520), a process regarding fluctuation of the hold symbol executed upon the hold 1 being established is executed.

  In the hold 1 display process (FIG. 89, S 1520), first, it is determined whether or not winning information to be a hit is set in the winning information storage area 223i, that is, hold 1 is a hold to be a hit (S 1520). If it is determined that the winning information storage area 223i is on hold (S1581: Yes), the holding symbol lottery is executed from the holding symbol lottery table 222b based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f (S1582 ). It is determined whether the lottery result executed in S1582 is a hit display (S1583). If it is determined that the lottery result is a hit display (S 1583: Yes), the per-hold flag 223 k is set to ON (S 1584). With respect to holding 1, a holding symbol is selected from holding symbol selection table 222d (see FIG. 12A) based on the acquired value of effect counter 223f, and is set in corresponding holding symbol storage area 223e (S1585). ). A long hold change pattern per hold or a short hold change pattern per hold is set corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time based on the set hold symbol (S1586).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1581, when it is determined that the winning information to be hit is not set in the winning information storage area 223i, that is, it is determined that the hold 1 is removed (S1581: No), or in the process of S1583, S1582. If it is determined that the result of the lottery is out of display (S1583: No), the process of S1587 is executed. In the process of S1587, the holding symbol to be displayed on the display position X1 of the holding 1 in a stopped state is selected from the out-of-hold holding symbol selection table 222e based on the value of the effect counter 223f and is set in the holding symbol storage area 223e (S1587). Thereafter, based on the set holding pattern of hold 1, the hold 1 off length hold fluctuation pattern or the hold 1 off short hold fluctuation pattern corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time is set (S 1588).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 90, pending number display update processing 2 (S1360) which is one of main processing (see FIG. 81) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. explain. FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing the pending number display updating process 2 (S1360).

  In the number-of-holds display update process 2 (FIG. 90, S1360), first, it is determined whether there is information before the change of the hold symbol in the hold information storage area 223j (S1741). If it is determined that there is information before the change (S1741: Yes), the notification pattern before the change is set for the suspension before the change, and the notification pattern before the change is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 A display pre-variation notification symbol command for display is set (S1742). Thereafter, the process of S1733 is performed. Here, as the notification symbol before change, the symbol of the egg is displayed as shown in the reserved symbol display area Ds3 of FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the information before change is not set in the hold information storage area 223j (S1741: No), the processing of S1743 is executed. In the process of S1743, it is determined whether the hold change pattern is set (S1743). If it is determined that the hold fluctuation pattern is set (S1743: Yes), a display hold fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the set hold fluctuation pattern is set (S1744). On the other hand, when it is determined that the suspension fluctuation pattern is not set (S1743: No), this process ends.

Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device 114 in Fourth Embodiment
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fourth embodiment is a command determination process (FIG. 39, S2102) with respect to the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment. Is changed to command determination processing 3. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The command determination processing 3 (S2120) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 3 (S2120). The command determination process 3 (FIG. 91, S2120) in the fourth embodiment is the same as the command determination process (FIG. 39, S2102) in the first embodiment except that each process from S2208 to S2209 is deleted. Each process has been added. The other processes are the same as the processes of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  If it is determined in the process of S2206 that the display stop type command has not been received (S2206: No), it is determined whether the display hold variation pattern command has been received (S2212). If it is determined that the display holding variation pattern command is received (S2212: Yes), the holding variation pattern command process is executed (S2213). The holding variation pattern command process (S2213) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing this suspension change pattern command processing (S2213). In the hold variation pattern command process (S2213), first, the value of the selection counter 233m is acquired (S2311). Thereafter, based on the received hold variation pattern command, it is determined whether it is necessary to select a valid line (S2312). Here, when the received holding fluctuation pattern command is outreach or falling holding, the holding fluctuation pattern command in which the hit holding design is shown, the display of the hit holding design is shown in any of the valid lines H1 to H3 If not, it is determined that the selection of the valid line H4 or H5 is necessary. Further, in the present embodiment, although the determination is made as described above, the invention is not limited thereto, but in the case where the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 generates the hold variation pattern command, the one requiring the selection of the valid line H4 or H5 May be configured to set an identification code (for example, setting a specific bit of a command to “1”). With this configuration, it is possible to easily determine whether it is necessary to select the effective line H4 or H5. Further, in the present embodiment, the effective line H4 or H5 is selected by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. However, the effective line H4 or H5 is determined by the process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. , And may be configured to generate a pending change pattern command based thereon.

  In the process of S2312, when it is determined that the selection of the effective line H4 or H5 is necessary (S2312: Yes), the symbol shown by the hold fluctuation pattern command is displayed from the hold fluctuation display data selection table 234a5 (see FIG. 79) The hold fluctuation pattern is selected based on the line (hold 1 to hold 3) and the value of the selection counter 233m, and the hold fluctuation display data table is selected (S2313). Thereafter, the process of S2315 is performed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2312, when it is determined that the selection of the valid line H4 or H5 is not necessary (S2312: No), the received change pattern command is a hold symbol corresponding to the received change pattern command. The set holding fluctuation pattern is selected, and the holding fluctuation display data table is selected (S2314). Thereafter, the process of S2315 is performed.

  In the process of S2315, the pending change display data table selected in the process of S2313 and S2314 is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2315). A rolling data table corresponding to the set pending change display data table is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Based on the data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h. The pointer 233 f is initialized and set (S 2318).

  As described above, in the hold variation pattern command processing (S2213), it is determined whether the selection of the valid line H4 or H5 is necessary based on the hold variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113, if necessary. The selection is performed. Thereby, the holding symbol to be displayed on the display position X1 of each holding is determined. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the impediment to control of the process of determining the holding symbol of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the third symbol is shortened and the efficiency of the game is improved, the time for displaying the notice effects etc. using the third symbol is shortened, resulting in a monotonous game. There is. However, with the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the advance notice effect of notifying the result of the determination of the success or failure of the third symbol to be displayed in a variable manner, using the time when the reserved symbol is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the trouble that the player is bored.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a configuration is described in which the combination judgment of the holding symbols displayed on the valid lines H1 to H5 set in the holding 1 to 3 gives notification about the pass / fail judgment of the third symbol during fluctuation. . On the other hand, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the valid lines H1 to H5 are set for holding 1 to 3 and the valid lines H1 to H5 are set for holding 2 to 4 The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the process of switching the setting of the valid line is executed. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

<About the display mode of the retention symbol in the fifth embodiment>
The display aspect of the holding symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 94. Drawing 93 (a) is a mimetic diagram showing the case where effective lines H1-H5 were set to a reservation design of reservations 1-3. A valid line notification display YL indicating a valid line is displayed across the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds3 of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81.

  Drawing 93 (b) is a mimetic diagram showing the case where effective lines H1-H5 were set to a reservation design of reservations 2-4. An effective line notification display YL indicating an effective line is displayed across the reserved symbol display areas Ds2 to Ds4 of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81.

  Thus, the player can be notified of the effective line in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, since the pay line is changed, the player can watch the holding symbol outside the pay line with caution, and can further increase the interest in the game. Also, when the hit symbols are aligned and displayed outside the effective line, the player can play a game expecting that the effective line is not changed.

  FIG. 94 (a) shows the display mode in the case where the number of pending is 2 and the valid line is set across the pending 1 to the pending 3. Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), the display mode is shown in the case where the number of holding balls is three and the valid line is changed to holdings 2 to 4. Here, when the holding symbol of holding 3 is displayed, two holding symbols of the turtle are displayed in an aligned reach state on the effective line H4 changed to holding 2 to 4. As described above, in the case of the valid lines in the case of the hold 1 to the hold 3, even when the reach display mode is not obtained, the reach line can be set by changing the valid line. In addition, the change of an effective line is performed by lottery regardless of the previous timing, after a holding symbol is displayed. Therefore, if the pay line is changed after the hold symbol is displayed in the reach display mode or the hit hold pattern display mode outside the pay line, the player strongly expects that the pay line is not changed. You can enjoy the game more by being changed as it is. In addition, if the change of the effective line is executed before the reserved symbol is displayed, the game is expected in anticipation that the held symbol and the reach display mode will be established on the effective line. It can be carried out.

Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller 110 in Fifth Embodiment
The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the fifth embodiment is the same as that described in the third embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

Regarding Control Processing of Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in Fifth Embodiment
The control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing (see FIG. 95) in the fifth embodiment is the same as the main processing (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment, but the pending number display updating process (FIG. 34, S1306) is the pending number display updating process 3 (see FIG. In FIG. 98 (b) and S1750, the command determination process (FIG. 28, S1311) is changed to the command determination process 5 (FIG. 96, S1490). The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the command determination processing 5 (S1490) which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 95) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 5 (S1490). In the command determination process 5 (FIG. 96, S1490) in the fifth embodiment, with respect to the command determination process (FIG. 28, S1311) in the first embodiment, the pending display update process (FIG. 29, S1404) is pending display update The process is changed to process 4 (FIG. 98A, S1480), the process of S1413 is deleted, and the processes of S1415 and S1580 are added. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, winning command reception processing 2 (S1660) executed when it is determined that a winning command has been received in the process of S1415 (S1415: Yes) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing this winning command reception process 2 (S1660).

  In the winning command reception process 2 (FIG. 97, S1660), first, the value of the effect counter 223f is obtained (S1661). It is determined whether the received winning command is a winning command (S1662). If it is determined that the received prize command is a hit prize command (S1662: Yes), the reserved symbol is drawn from the held symbol lottery table 222b (see FIG. 11 (b)) based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired. A lottery is executed (S1663).

  It is determined whether the lottery result in the process of S1663 is a hit display (S1664). If it is determined that the lottery result is a hit display (S1664: Yes), is it possible to display a hit holding symbol corresponding to the symbol type (big hit A, big hit B) of the pass / fail judgment on the valid line H4 or H5? It is determined (S1665). If it is determined that the display can not be made on the activated line H4 or H5 (S1665: No), the reserved symbol corresponding to the symbol (jackpot A or jackpot B) of the pass / fail judgment based on the value of the effect counter 223f A symbol is selected from the reserved symbol selection table 222d (see FIG. 12A), and is set in the corresponding reserved symbol storage area 223e (S1666).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1665 that the hit line H4 or H5 can hit the formation of the hold symbol (S1665: Yes), the same symbol as the hold symbol displayed on the check line H4 or H5 is displayed. Set as a holding symbol of the display position corresponding to the effective line H4 or H5, and set the holding symbol of the other display position based on the value of the effect counter 223f, selected from the out-of-hold holding symbol selection table 222e and corresponding holding symbol storage area It is set to 223e.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1664, when it is determined that the lottery result in S1663 is the disappointing display (S1664: No), the holding symbol can be set to the reach display mode by changing the valid line It is determined whether there is any (S1668). If it is determined that the reach display mode can be set (S1668: Yes), the hold symbol to be the reach display mode is selected, and the hold symbol displayed at the other display position is the effect counter 223 f Based on the value, the holding symbol is selected from the out-of-hold holding symbol selection table 222e and set in the corresponding holding symbol storage area 223e (S1669). The change of the effective line is set, and the display effective line setting command is set (S1670).

  As described above, even if the winning command is received, if the out-of-order indication is determined by lottery, the valid line is changed to either one as shown in FIG. 93 (a) or 93 (b). When the reach display mode of the holding symbol can be set, the setting is executed. Therefore, by changing the effective line, the player can determine early whether there is a hit or not judgment result in the holding ball, and has a sense of expectation for a larger jackpot. Can play a game.

  In addition, when the variation time of the third symbol is shortened (for example, 1 second) and the game time can be shortened, there is no advance notice to the jackpot, time to produce effects, and a monotonous game. Although it becomes a sex, by adopting the configuration as in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute an advance notice effect that makes a big hit expect with the reserved symbol, using the reserved time. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game until the jackpot.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the winning prize command is received, the change of the valid line is set, but not limited thereto, the valid line is changed by lottery also when the losing prize command is received. May be This makes it possible to change the effective line in various ways, and to change the effective line, thereby preventing the player from getting bored with the game.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1662, when the off winning symbol command is received (S1662: No), in the process of S1668, when it is determined that the reach display mode can not be obtained even if the effective line is changed. (S1668: No), based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired, the holding symbol is selected from the out-of-hold holding symbol selection table 222e (see FIG. 12 (b)) and is set in the corresponding holding symbol storage area 223e S1671).

  Returning to FIG. 96, the description will be continued. After the process of S1403 is executed, the pending display update process 4 is executed (S1480). The pending display update process 4 (S1480) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 98 (a). FIG. 98 (a) is a flowchart showing the pending display update process 4 (S1480). In the pending display update process 4 (FIG. 98 (a), S1480), the data of each pending symbol storage area is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the number of pending balls one by one (S1421). Thereafter, this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98 (b), pending number display update process 3 (one process in the main process (see FIG. 95) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment. S1750) will be described. FIG. 98 (b) is a flowchart showing the pending number display update process 3 (S1750).

  In the number-of-helds display update process 3 (FIG. 98 (b), S1750), first, it is determined whether there is a change in the held design (S1750). Although the illustration has been omitted, it is executed by determining the change flag set in the holding symbol storage area 223e whether or not the holding symbol has been changed. In addition, a change flag is set to ON, when a holding symbol is newly memorize | stored in holding symbol storage area 223e, or when it is shifted from another area (at the time of holding arrangement | positioning). On the other hand, after the change flag is determined in the process of S1751, it is set to OFF.

  In the process of S175, when it is determined that there is a change to the holding symbol (S1751: Yes), the holding symbol command for display is set based on the holding symbol data set in the holding symbol storage area 223e ( S1752).

  Next, a modified example of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the modification of the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99 (a), five holding symbols are displayed for one holding symbol. Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (a), the valid line range YL is set across the hold symbols of hold 1 to hold 3, and furthermore, the second to fourth hold symbols fall within the valid line range YL. It is set. In this case, among the valid lines H1 to H5 set in the valid line range YL, there is no combination as a hit design, a combination as a reach display mode, or the like. However, the octopus symbol displayed at the right end of the reserve display area Ds1, the octopus symbol displayed fourth from the left of the reserve display area Ds2, and the octopus symbol displayed third from the left of the reserve display area Ds3 And, the same octopus pattern is displayed side by side three diagonally. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), the effective line range YL is moved to the right by one reserved symbol and set, whereby the taco symbol hits on the effective line H4 and is a reserved symbol. It will be displayed. Therefore, the player can expect that the effective line range YL is not set to the right by one. Therefore, the player can have an interest other than the display mode of the third symbol, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored more with the game.

  In addition, when the effective line range YL is changed, as a precursor operation thereof, a display mode indicating the effective line range YL slightly displays a display mode moving and moving. In addition, there is also a case where only the precursor operation is performed and the change of the effective line range YL is not performed. With this configuration, the player can be entertained by the operation of the effective line range YL. In addition, by moving the effective line range YL, the player's attention can be directed not only to the reserved symbol on the effective line but also to the reserved symbol displayed on the other display position.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the third symbol is shortened and the efficiency of the game is improved, the time for displaying the notice effects etc. using the third symbol is shortened, resulting in a monotonous game. There is. However, with the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the advance notice effect of notifying the result of the determination of the success or failure of the third symbol to be displayed in a variable manner, using the time when the reserved symbol is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the trouble that the player is bored.

  In addition, although it was comprised so that effective line range YL might be changed in this embodiment, it determines not only it but some pending from the pending number, and the combination of the held design displayed with respect to the pending By means of this, it may be configured to notify the judgment of whether the change is in progress or the pending one. Further, before holding is established, some of the holdings that become valid may be selected and notified to the player. By configuring in this manner, the player can play the game looking forward to which hold is effectively selected. In addition, in the configuration in which effective suspension is determined after the suspension symbol is displayed, it is possible to play a game expecting that the suspension corresponding to the suspension symbol or reach display mode is not set as effective suspension.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Sixth Embodiment>
A pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 106. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the reserved symbol is displayed in a predetermined combination, and the player is notified of the advance notice by the combination of the symbols displayed on the predetermined effective lines H1 to H5. did. On the other hand, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment, the holding symbol is configured by a predetermined symbol row, and when the holding is established, the symbol row is displayed in a state of being stopped and displayed at the predetermined position. . Then, it is different from the first embodiment in that the symbol sequence of the retention symbol is moved in ascending order one frame at a time each time the retention is digested. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

<About the display mode of the reservation symbol in the sixth embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 100, the display mode of the holding symbol displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display control device 81 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 100 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a holding symbol displayed when four holdings are established. From this state, a new change of the third symbol is started, and when the number of reserved pieces is digested, as shown in FIG. 100 (b), displayed in reserved symbol display areas Ds2 to Ds4 of FIG. 100 (a) In a state where the symbol array of the reserved symbol being displayed has been moved to the left one frame at a time, it is displayed being shifted to the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds3.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the reserved symbol is regularly displayed (scrolled) one frame at a time, triggered by the digestion of the reserved symbol. Therefore, the player can predict in advance whether the holding symbol will hit the effective line and align with the holding symbol. Therefore, even if the fluctuation time of the third symbol is set short, the player can predict the result of the pass / fail judgment in advance in the display pattern of the holding symbol, and the game can be produced with the holding symbol. As a result, the player can be entertained without being bored even if the rendering time in the third symbol is shortened.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Sixth Embodiment
The electrical configuration according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. The RAM 231 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment compares the RAM 231 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the first embodiment with a winning information storage area 223i, a hold information storage area 223j, and a hold line flag. Each 223r has been added. The winning information storage area 223i and the hold information storage area 223j have the same configurations as those described in the fourth embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The holding line flag 223r is a flag indicating that it is determined that the holding symbol is set to be a hit holding symbol on the valid line H4 or H5. The hold line flag 223r is set to ON in the process of S1786 of the hold symbol selection process 2 (FIG. 105, S1780) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Note that the hold line flag 223r is automatically set to OFF when the hold (hold determined to be a hit in the process of S1782) serving as a trigger for setting the hold line flag to ON is digested.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 101 (b), the lost holding symbol selection table 222e set in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 101 (b) is a view schematically showing the contents of the lost holding symbol selection table 222e. The detachment retention symbol selection table 222e (see FIG. 101 (b)) in the sixth embodiment is displayed in the display area X1 with respect to the detachment retention symbol selection table 222e (see FIG. 12 (b)) in the first embodiment. The difference is that the holding symbol to be selected is changed to be selected based on the value of the effect counter 223f. As described above, the reserved symbol of the sixth embodiment has a predetermined order set as shown in FIG. 66 (a), so that the symbol row is displayed on the display position X1 of the sub display area Ds. By determining the symbols, the reserved symbols to be displayed at other display positions are also automatically determined.

Regarding Control Process in Sixth Embodiment
Control processing in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 106. FIG.

Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller 110 in Sixth Embodiment
The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. In the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 102) in the sixth embodiment, the start winning process (FIG. 20, S105) is different from the timer win process (see FIG. 17) in the first embodiment. (FIG. 60, S115) has been changed. The other processes are the same as those of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted. The start winning process 2 (FIG. 60, S115) is also the same as that described in the third embodiment, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<About Control Processing of Voice Lamp Controller 113 in Sixth Embodiment>
Control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. The main process (see FIG. 103) in the sixth embodiment is the same as the main process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment in the pending number display updating process (FIG. 34, S1306). In FIG. 98 (b) and S1750, the command determination process (FIG. 28, S1311) is changed to the command determination process 6 (FIG. 104, S1760). The other processes are the same as the processes in the first embodiment.

  The command determination processing 6 (S1760) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 6 (S1760). The command determination process 6 (FIG. 104, S1760) in the sixth embodiment is different from the command determination process (FIG. 28, S1311) in the first embodiment in the pending display update process (FIG. 29, S1404). In the update process 4 (FIG. 106, S1770), the reserved symbol selection process (FIG. 32, S1413) is changed to the reserved symbol selection process 2 (FIG. 105, S1780), and each process up to S1417 to S1418 is added It is done. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the reserved symbol selection process 2 (S1780) executed after the process of S1412 is executed will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the reserved symbol selection process 2 (S1780).

  In the reserved symbol selection process 2 (FIG. 105, S1780), first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1781). It is determined whether or not the winning data stored in the winning information storage area 223i is stored based on the winning information command. If it is determined that the winning information to be hit is stored in the winning information storage area 223i (S1782: Yes), it is determined whether the hold line flag 223r is set to OFF (S1783).

  If it is determined that the hold line flag 223r is set to off (S1783: Yes), the hold symbol lottery table 222b (see FIG. 11B) is held based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. A symbol lottery is executed (S1784). It is determined that the lottery result of S1784 is a hit display (S1785). If it is determined that the lottery result is a hit display (S1785: Yes), the hold line flag 223r is set to ON (S1786).

  Thereafter, based on the value of the effect counter 223f, the holding symbol is selected from the holding symbol selection table 222d (see FIG. 12A), and is set in the holding symbol storage area 223e as a hit holding symbol (S1787). Thereafter, the process of S1787 is performed. In addition, being set to the retention symbol storage area 223e as the hit retention symbol indicates that the retention symbol to be displayed on the effective line H4 is stored as the hit retention symbol. In addition, the set hit holding symbol is initialized based on the hold line flag 223r being set to off.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1783 that the hold line flag 223r is on (S1783: No), the process of S1788 is executed. In the process of S1788, the holding symbol to be displayed at the position corresponding to the holding number is determined, the holding symbol to be displayed at the other display position is determined, and is set in the corresponding holding symbol storage area 223e (S1788). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Here, the position corresponding to the pending number will be described. As shown in FIG. 100 (a), if it is the selection of the hold symbol corresponding to the hold 4 (hold display area Ds4), the symbol in front of the symbol set to the hit hold symbol (specifically, the turtle symbol is In the case of the hit and hold symbol, the hold symbol is set such that the symbol in front of the symbol is the third symbol (display position X3) from the left. In this case, a crab symbol is set at the display position X1.

  Moreover, if it is selection of the holding symbol corresponding to holding 3 (holding symbol display area Ds3), selection of a holding symbol will be performed so that a hit holding symbol may be located in the display position X3. In the case of selection of a hold symbol corresponding to hold 2 (hold symbol display area Ds2), the hold symbol is selected such that the hit hold symbol is at the display position X2.

  Thus, the holding symbol is displayed by each holding display area so that the hit holding symbol is at the predetermined position. In addition, about selection of the holding symbol with respect to holding 1, it is set so that a holding symbol may be displayed in display position X1. Therefore, the player can expect to be hit by the type indicated by the symbol displayed at the display position X1 when only the hold 1 is displayed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1782 that the hit storage for the winning information storage area 223i is not set (S1782: No), it is determined in the process of S1785 that the lottery result in S1784 is out of display. In the case (S1785: No), the process of S1789 is executed. In the process of S1789, based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, the outlying symbol is selected from the outright suspension symbol selection table 222e (see FIG. 101 (b)) and set in the suspension symbol storage area 223e (S1789).

  It is determined whether there is a valid symbol H1 to H4 to be displayed with a hit symbol (S1790). When it is determined that there is a valid line displayed in the hit holding symbol (S1790: Yes), among the symbols of the valid line displayed in the hit holding symbol, the number of holding balls (holding order) is largest. In contrast, it is set by moving the +1 frame symbol (S1791). Thereafter, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no valid line displayed with the hit and held symbol (S1790: No), this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the pending display update process 4 (S1770), which is one process in the command determination process 6 (FIG. 104, S1760), will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the pending display update process 4 (S1770). In the pending display updating process 4 (FIG. 106, S1770), the data of the pending symbol obtained by moving the data of each pending symbol storage area 223e in ascending order by +1 frame is set as the pending symbol data of the display position X1. The storage area corresponding to the hold is shifted and set (S1771). In this case, a change flag (not shown) is set to on. Here, specifically, when a turtle symbol is stored as the holding symbol of the display position X1, a shark symbol is set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the holding symbol regularly moves in response to the holding of the holding. Therefore, at the time when the holding symbol is displayed, even if it is not a hit holding symbol, the subsequent change in the holding symbol can be determined early, so that the player can be made to look at the holding symbol it can. Therefore, in addition to the third symbol, the player's attention can be drawn, and the interest of the game can be increased.

In addition, even if the variation time of the third symbol is shortened to improve the efficiency of the game, the time for which the reserved symbol is displayed can be used to give a notice regarding the judgment of success or failure, and the player can You can configure without getting bored until you get a jackpot.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Seventh Embodiment>
A pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 116. In the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment, the holding symbol is configured of a predetermined symbol row, and when the holding is established, the symbol row is displayed in the state of being stopped and displayed at the predetermined position, each time the holding is digested The description has been made of the configuration in which the symbol sequence of the reserved symbol is moved in ascending order by one frame and displayed. On the other hand, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the sixth embodiment, one of the holding symbols displayed is triggered by the fact that a specific variation pattern is displayed. The sixth embodiment differs from the sixth embodiment in that effects are displayed to display symbols in a variable manner. The same elements as those of the sixth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<About the display mode of the reserved symbol in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to Drawing 107-Drawing 109, a display mode of a reservation design in the 7th embodiment of the present is explained. In the display mode shown in FIG. 107 (a), in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, three pieces of suspension occur before the variation pattern of the third symbol is deviated and the normal reach is established. Is shown. In the sub display area Dm, selection notification display areas En (En1 to En4) are formed in each of the small display areas Ds1 to Ds4 for displaying the reserved symbols. As shown in FIG. 107 (a), the selection notification display area En is formed in a rectangular shape at the left end of each of the small display areas Ds1 to Ds4 and the holding symbol is not displayed in that area. There is.

  FIG. 107 (b) shows the variation pattern of the normal reach of the third symbol displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and when the re-variation effect is started when the reach display is established It shows a display mode. In the re-variation display mode, an arrow-shaped symbol is displayed in the selection notification display area En, and the arrow symbol is moved and displayed at high speed in the order of the selection notification display area En2 and the selection notification display area En3 from the selection notification display area En1. . Then, the character "re-variation when the cursor is stopped" is displayed in the small area Ds1, and the player is informed that the reserved symbol corresponding to the small area where the arrow symbol is stopped is re-varied.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern of out-of-normal reach is set at a fluctuation time of 15 seconds, and is set to be displayed in a reach display mode five seconds after the start of fluctuation. Then, the display mode of re-variation is executed up to 10 seconds after the reach display mode is displayed. First, an effect of moving and displaying an arrow symbol as shown in FIG. 107 (b) is displayed for 5 seconds. After that, when the arrow symbol is stopped and displayed in any of the selection notification display areas En, an effect of fluctuating and displaying a holding symbol to be described later is executed. If the effect of moving and displaying the arrow symbol is executed and the arrow symbol is not displayed in any selection notification display area En without the arrow being stopped and displayed, the re-variation of the holding symbol is not executed. It is shown that.

  As shown in FIG. 108 (a), after the arrow symbol is moved and displayed, when the arrow symbol is stopped and displayed in the selection notification display area En2, the hold 2 displayed in the small area Ds2 indicated by the arrow symbol The variable display of the first reserved symbol is started. In this variable symbol display, the displayed symbol row is scrolled in order from right to left, and after being scrolled at high speed for 2 seconds, it is scrolled at low speed for 3 seconds. Thus, the display is stopped as shown in FIG. 108 (b).

  In the display mode shown in FIG. 108 (b), the case is shown in which the second held holding symbol that is variably displayed is stopped and displayed, and three camera symbols are displayed side by side along the effective line H5. As described above, when the same types of reserved symbols are aligned in any of the valid lines H1 to H5, it indicates that among the retained items, there is included a retained item to be hit. Then, the character "chance !!" is displayed in the small area Ds4, and the player is informed that the holding symbol is aligned.

  In the display mode shown in FIG. 109 (a), after the arrow symbol shown in FIG. 107 (b) is moved and displayed, it is stopped and displayed in the selection notification display area Ds3, and the third reserved symbol is variably displayed. It shows the state where it was stopped and displayed. Hold The third hold symbol was stopped from being displayed with a octopus symbol, a blow symbol, or a turtle symbol from the left before it was variably displayed (refer to FIG. 107 (b)), but after the variation display, it is shown in FIG. As shown in (a), from the left, the stop symbols are displayed in the order of the angelfish symbol, the crab symbol, and the octopus symbol.

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the holding symbol is set according to the rule displayed by moving to the left one frame at a time, every time the holding is digested, from the stop display mode, the player can It is possible to predict the display pattern of the holding symbol when the holding is digested. Therefore, when one hold is digested when the display mode shown in FIG. 109 (a) is displayed, the player can display the reach on the effective line H4, as shown in FIG. 109 (b). Can be recognized in advance. As described above, when displayed in the reach display mode, when the third hold of the hold occurs, the game is performed in anticipation that the tach symbol in the reach display mode is not displayed at the left end of the small area Ds 3 b be able to.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the display mode of the normal reach is difficult to be selected when the lottery result of the third symbol is a big hit, it is configured to execute the re-variation effect of the reserved symbol, so the third Even when there is no expectation of winning in the effect of the symbol, the player can enjoy the re-change effect of the holding symbol, and can suppress being bored with the game. Therefore, the opportunity to enjoy the effect of the game increases more, and the effect that the jackpot of the third symbol can not be expected can also be expected as an opportunity of the re-variation of the holding symbol.

Control Process of Audio Lamp Controller 113 in Seventh Embodiment
Control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process (FIG. 110) in the seventh embodiment is the same as the main process (FIG. 103) in the sixth embodiment, the pending number display updating process 3 (FIG. 98, S1750) is the pending number display updating process 4 (FIG. The command determination process 6 (FIG. 104, S1760) is changed to the command determination process 7 (FIG. 111, S1820) at 115, S1810). The other processing is the same as that of the sixth embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the command determination process 7 (S1820) will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 7 (S1820). In the command determination process 7 (S1820) in the seventh embodiment, the pending display update process 4 (FIG. 106, S1770) is the pending display update process as compared with the command determination process 6 (FIG. 104, S1760) in the sixth embodiment. In 5 (FIG. 112, S1830), the reserved symbol selection processing 2 (FIG. 105, S1780) is changed to the reserved symbol selection processing 3 (FIG. 114, S1840). The other processing is the same as that of the sixth embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112, pending display update processing 5 (S1830) in command determination processing 7 (FIG. 111, S1820) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the pending display update process 5 (S1830).

  In the pending display update process 5 (FIG. 112, S1830), first, the pending symbol data stored in each pending chart storage area 223 is updated to a pending symbol moved to the left by one in the symbol row, and one is displayed. The next storage area is shifted (S1831).

  Is the reserved symbol being displayed in the display mode indicating a hit in any of the effective lines H1 to H5 of the reserved symbol displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 (during displaying of a pending reservation) It is determined (S1832). If it is determined that the hit-on-hold is being displayed (S 1832: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit is not displayed (S1832: No), it is determined whether the received fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of the out-of-normal reach (S1833).

  If it is determined that the received fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern other than the normal reach (S1833: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received fluctuation pattern is out of the normal reach fluctuation pattern (S1833: Yes), re-variation processing is executed (S1834).

  Next, referring to FIG. 113, re-variation processing (S1834) which is one of the pending display update processing 5 (FIG. 112, S1830) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment Will be explained. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing this re-variation process (S1834).

  In the re-variation process (FIG. 113, S1834), first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1861). The re-variation lottery is executed based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f (S1862). Here, if the information stored in the winning information storage area 223i stores the winning information, if the value of the effect counter 223f is any one of “0 to 100”, the re-variation Is determined to be performed. On the other hand, if the winning information storage area 223i does not store the winning information, if the value of the effect counter 223f is any of "0 to 49", it is determined that re-variation is to be performed.

  In the process of S1862, it is determined whether or not it has been determined that the re-variation lottery has been won (to execute re-variation) (S1863). If it is determined that the re-variation lottery has been won (S1863: Yes), it is determined whether the hold line flag 223r is set to ON. The holding line flag 223r is a flag indicating that it is determined that the holding symbol is to be hit and displayed on any of the valid lines H1 to H5.

  If it is determined in the process of S1864 that the hold line flag 223r is off (S1864: No), it is determined whether hold information to be a hit is stored in the winning information storage area 223i (S1865). If it is determined that the hit information storage area 223i stores the hit holding information (S1865: Yes), the hold symbol lottery table 222b (FIG. 11 (d)) based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Refer to) to execute a holding symbol lottery (S1866). In this holding symbol lottery, it is determined whether the holding symbol is to be hit and displayed on any of the valid lines H1 to H5.

  If it is determined that the lottery result of S1866 is drawn to display the holding symbol (S1867: Yes), the holding line flag 223r is set to ON (S1868). It is determined whether or not the hold symbol corresponding to the hit type can be changed to the hit display or the reach display (S1869). If it is determined that the held symbol corresponding to the hit type can be changed to the hit display or the reach display (S1869: Yes), re-variation of the corresponding held symbol is set (S1870). Here, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), the re-variation set is as shown in FIG. 109 (a), in the case where the reserved symbols are displayed side by side on the effective line by re-variation In this case, it is set in the case where it is possible to display the holding symbol on the activated line or in the display mode of the reach by digesting the holding. In the present embodiment, if it is possible to directly display the win, the display is prioritized, then the direct reach display, and the next, if it is a hit display when it is put on hold, then it is put on hold. It is set in the order of priority of becoming reach display when it is digested.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1869, when it is determined that the held symbol corresponding to the hit type can not be changed to the hit display or the reach display, the held symbol selection table 222d (FIG. 12 (a (a)). The re-variation is set so that the holding symbol is selected from the reference symbol) and the symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line H1 (S1871).

  Further, in the process of S1867, when it is determined not to display in the hit display (S1867: No), the value of the effect counter 223f acquired is divided by the value of the number of holding balls, corresponding to the value of the remainder The re-variation of the holding symbol is set (S1872). In this case, the same stop symbol as that before the change is set as the stop symbol. In addition, although it was set as the same stop symbol as change before in this embodiment, you may comprise not only it but selecting the symbol which a holding symbol does not become display and setting as a stop symbol.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1863 that the lottery for re-variation is out (S1863: No), and if it is determined that the holding line flag 223r is on (S1864: Yes), the display is removed. The re-variation command is set. Note that this display removal re-variation command instructs the display control device 114 to display an effect to be displayed without causing the selection notification display area En to be stopped and displayed after moving and displaying the arrow symbol. It is.

  In this way, when the normal reach out of position is displayed and the reach display is performed, since the re-change effect of the held symbol being displayed is executed, the player performs the effect that can not have much expectation for a hit with the third symbol. Even if you are, you can play the game without getting bored. In addition, if any one of the displayed holding symbols is re-varied, and if it is stopped and displayed in a combination that becomes a hit display or a reach display, it may be determined that the re-variation effect is not executed, the game The player can play the game with expectation. Therefore, even if it takes a long time until the hit is displayed with the special symbol, it is possible to enjoy the game more with the combination displayed with the holding symbol, and it is possible to suppress being bored.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the reserved symbol selection processing 3 (S1840) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the reserved symbol selection process 3 (S1840).

  In the reserved symbol selection process 3 (FIG. 114, S1840), first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1841). It is determined whether the hold line flag 223r is set to on (S1842). If it is determined that the hold line flag 223r is set to ON (S1842: Yes), it is determined whether or not the winning hold information is stored in the winning information storage area 223i (S1843).

  If it is determined that the winning information storage area 223i stores the winning hold information (S1843: Yes), based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired, refer to the holding symbol lottery table 222b (see FIG. 11 (b) ) A lottery is executed to determine whether or not the holding symbol is to be displayed in the display mode of the hit display (S1844). If it is determined that the lottery result of S1844 is a hit display and the holding symbol is displayed (S1845: Yes), the holding line flag 223r is set to ON (S1846). On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit symbol is not hit and displayed (S1845: No), the processing of S1850 is executed.

  Based on the value of the effect counter 223f, the holding symbol is selected from the holding symbol selection table 222d (see FIG. 12A), and is set (stored) in the holding symbol storage area 223e as a hit holding symbol (S1847). Based on the selected hit holding symbol, the holding symbol corresponding to the holding area is determined and set in the corresponding holding symbol storage area 223e (S1848).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1842 that the holding line flag 223r is on (S1842: No), it is determined whether the holding symbol has already been displayed (S1849). If it is determined that the held symbol has already been displayed (S1849: Yes), the process of S1850 is executed.

  In the process of S1850, based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired, the outlier retention symbol is selected from the outlier retention symbol selection table 2 (222e, see FIG. 101 (b)) and set in the corresponding suspension symbol storage area 223e Ru.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1849, when it is determined that the held symbol is not notified by the combination of hits (S1849: No), the held symbol corresponding to the held area is set based on the held held symbol. It decides and is set to reservation design storage area 223e (S1851).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 115, pending number display update processing 4 (S1810) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 115 is a flow chart showing the pending number display updating process 4 (S1810).

  In the number-of-helds display update processing 4 (FIG. 115, S1810), first, it is determined whether or not a change is set for the held symbol (S1811). If it is determined that no change is set for the held symbol (S1811: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1811 that the change of the holding symbol is set (S1811: Yes), the display holding command is set for each setting of the holding symbol (S1812) ). It is determined whether re-variation of the holding symbol is set (S 1813).

  If it is determined that the re-variation of the reserved symbol is not set (S1813: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the re-variation of the reserved symbol is set (S 1813: Yes), the display symbol re-variation command for display indicating the content of the set re-variation is set (S 1814).

Control Processing of Display Control Device 114 in Seventh Embodiment
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the seventh embodiment is a command determination process (FIG. 39, S2102) with respect to the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the sixth embodiment. Is changed to command determination processing 4 (FIG. 116, S2130). The other processing is the same as that of the sixth embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the command determination process 4 (FIG. 116, S2130) in the seventh embodiment, each process up to S2220 to S2221 is added to the command determination process (FIG. 39, S2102) in the sixth embodiment. The other processing is the same as that of the sixth embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When it is determined in the process of S2208 that the display reserved symbol command has not been received (S2208: No), it is determined whether the display reserved symbol re-variation command has been received (S2220). If it is determined that the display reserved symbol re-variation command is received (S2220: Yes), the corresponding re-variation data is set in the display data table buffer. Thereafter, this process ends. Here, it is set in the display data table such that stop display with a symbol instructed by the command is set for the held symbol indicated by the display symbol re-variation command for display. About the change display of a reservation symbol, the same setting as the change display of the 3rd symbol is performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a normal reach with a low expectation of the jackpot is established for the player (when a fluctuation pattern which is hard to be selected in the case of the jackpot is realized), one of the holding symbols is Because it is configured to fluctuate, it is possible for the player to enjoy and expect the fluctuation pattern of the holding symbol instead of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol that is not of interest and is not a special symbol fluctuation mode, and it is possible to suppress getting bored early in the game .

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it comprised so that the selection alerting | reporting production | presentation of a holding | holding symbol might be performed triggered by a loss normal reach, not only that but a super reach etc. of a hit may perform. In addition, to the big hit by configuring the selection notification effect (re-variation of the reserved symbol) is easier to execute when the fluctuation pattern to be deviated is selected than when the fluctuation pattern to be hit is selected. Even with the fluctuation pattern with a low degree of expectation of the player, the player can expect a re-variation of the holding symbol, and can enjoy the game in various ways.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that one holding symbol (holding symbol which shows one of the number of holdings) might be changed again among holding symbols, it is not restricted to it, but several holding symbols (a plurality of holding numbers May be configured to be re-varied, or the number of re-variations may be determined by lottery.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the selection of the specific variation pattern is used as a trigger to determine the execution of re-variation, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and a specific advance notice display mode and a specific number of reserved items are stored. The configuration may be changed again in response to a specific time, etc. Further, it may be configured to execute re-variation when a random lottery is performed and the player wins the lottery. By configuring this way. It is possible to provide the player with a surprising effect.

  In the present embodiment, as described in the sixth embodiment, the description is given for the one in which the reserved symbol is regularly moved and displayed, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and as shown in the above embodiments, it is randomly The combination of the holding symbols may be selected, or the holding symbols may be variably displayed, and at least one of the holding symbols may be changed again.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113, and when the command is received by the audio lamp control unit 113, it is transmitted to the display control unit 114 in the audio lamp control unit 113. The command to be determined is determined, and thereafter, the command is configured to be transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, when the command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114 and the command is received by the display control unit 114, the display control unit 114 determines the command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control unit 113. After that, the display control device 114 may transmit the command to the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether the resident video RAM 235 for transfer destination or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 for transfer destination or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, it is determined that the image controller 237 accesses the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (that is, using) the normal video RAM 236. ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, the MPU 231 monitors a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235, or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 by the MPU 231, It may be checked whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends the access, the MPU 231 notifies the MPU 231 of the information from the image controller 237 as needed. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the drive state of the image controller 237 or a notification from the image controller 237 whether the scan is in a blank period or not. If the scan state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each video RAM 235, 236 is not in use. Thus, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is not in use, so that the determination can be easily performed.

  Also, in this case, the MPU 231 transfers data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the process of reading out the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be started according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since a predetermined address is defined, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to a display data table or the like by transferring image data according to transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, drawing of the sprite is performed. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for the above can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  The process of reading out image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process or a loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, in the MPU 231, transfer processing of image data can be executed using time during which important processing in the display control apparatus 114 such as command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing is not performed. In addition, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are processes that are executed prior to the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt process or the V interrupt process. Transfer processing can be performed.

  In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage the video RAMs using the addresses held by the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236, but is commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly designate the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or regular video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, but merely designates the address, and The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the regular video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply designated. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction for performing the specification. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as an information indicating the storage destination of the data of the sprite, without using the storage RAM type, simply using the address set in the common address system. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the construction of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) connected to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. It may be connected directly to 237. Also, a bridge circuit is provided to convert the input / output specification of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specification of the mask ROM, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. It is also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the premise of using a general mask ROM as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to be able to directly access the character ROM 234.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and is configured by a large capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage unit, for example, a hard disk It may be done. Although such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 causes the image to be displayed without any problem at the time when it is desired to display by using the configuration described in the above embodiment. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the character ROM 234 is provided with the NOR type ROM 234d, and the MPU 231 stores a part of the boot program to be executed first after releasing the system reset in the first program storage area 234d1. The first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium that can perform read operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 first cancels the system reset in that area. A part of the boot program to be executed may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234 d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM) or the like is provided in the character ROM 234 and a first program storage area is provided thereon. It may store part of the boot program to be executed first.

  In the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program to be executed first in the area after releasing the system reset in the MPU 231 Is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium that can be read faster than the NAND flash memory 234a. The first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program to be executed first after the system reset release in the MPU 231 may be stored in the memory. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234 d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM) or the like may be provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area may be provided thereon. A part of the boot program to be executed first after system reset release may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when it is detected in the ROM controller 234b that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then, When it is detected that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated "0000H" in the ROM controller 234b, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line You may output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, when the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" to the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, whether the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is already set in the buffer RAM 234c, Since the character ROM 234 is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is designated by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the display main processing in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can.

  When ROM controller 234 b detects that the address designated by internal bus (bus line 240) designates a control program stored in first program storage area 234 d 1, first program storage area 234 d 1 is detected. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be directly read out from the memory and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can. In this case, the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may not be set in the buffer RAM 234c. Thus, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  Although the case where the resident video RAM 235 is provided by connecting to the image controller 237 has been described in the above embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and an internal bus (bus It may be provided directly connected to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. When the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video is not necessary even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  Although the above embodiment describes the case where the display control device 114 is provided with one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236, the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more may be provided A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images according to various modes may be made resident, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above embodiment, although the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by the DRAM of one port type (one input / output port) is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. A type of RAM may be used. Thus, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed simultaneously. For example, while the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn, it is read from the character ROM 234 The process of writing the processed image data into the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. One RAM may be a resident area and a normal area. The contents may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the respective areas. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by read or write processing by one of the resident area and the normal area. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, at least image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at least for residence in response to a received command received from the main control unit 110 or the audio lamp control unit 113 or other input from the outside. Preferably, it is resident in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is partially transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident is described, but all image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 You may In this case, since the image data stored in the nonresident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. May be

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The main controller 110 or the audio lamp controller 113 If the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is largely different based on the command received from the image, the image data to be made resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a predetermined timing. Good. In this case, while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Also, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is kept updated in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated even when the other resident images are updated. You may leave it. In addition, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out image data to be newly resident, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. It may be transferred while not in use (ie, during a period in which image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer). Image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 according to data information), and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use (ie, while image data corresponding to the transition image is not read) You may do it.

  When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident and transfer the read out image data through the buffer RAM 237a. It is also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237, which has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231, accesses the character ROM 234, reads image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the content of the resident video RAM 235 while the transition image is displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the above embodiment, after all image data to be resident is made resident in the resident video RAM 235, a RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored when power failure is eliminated. Before the transfer of the main image data at power on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is started in the display main process or the main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control unit 114 after turning on, the RAM judgment value is confirmed, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, this means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored, and thus the image data transfer to the resident video RAM 235 is not performed. It may be configured to In this case, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be made non-execution by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when the system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and execution of the display main process or main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is stored normally. In this case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for the power failure recovery. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, it is necessary to transfer the image data if the data of the resident video RAM 235 normally remains due to a momentary stop or the like. Since time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Alternatively, instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above embodiment, although the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured alone and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Furthermore, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) with many data signal exchanges. Transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by

  In the above embodiment, the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a has been described as one block of the NAND flash memory 234a. However, the storage capacity is not necessarily limited to this and may be appropriately set. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a buffer period (blank period) during scanning on the blank area which is a scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed A data capacity sufficient to complete the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 may be used as the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, transfer from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 generated in this blank period. .

  Although the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the stored image data is transferred from the other buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. It may be configured. In addition, while an area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another image data is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since processing can be performed, the time taken for the processing can be shortened.

  In the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thereby, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. Since image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after the power on of the power-on main image and the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image. Although the case of transferring to 235 b has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power on. Thus, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 displays the image at power-on, while using the character ROM 234. The image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. Since image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while transferring image data corresponding to the image data, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. It may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. In addition, image data corresponding to the main image at power on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power on, and power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the main image stored in the normal video RAM 236. When image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 while transferring image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the hour main image, etc., Image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Thus, transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without intervention of the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 through the buffer RAM 237a, the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power activation fluctuation. Although the case of transferring to the image area 235 b has been described, while image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. Directly transfer image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and power-on fluctuation image from character ROM 234 directly to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on fluctuation image area 235b of resident video RAM 235 without passing through buffer RAM 237a. It is also good. Also, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the power-on main image and power stored in the normal video RAM 236 While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuation image, the resident video RAM 235 If the image data is not read out from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Thus, transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without intervention of the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the player operates the frame button 22, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a back image change command and a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the back image change command and the frame button. Although the case where the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of the super reach are changed based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the contents of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, according to the change of the gaming state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, the display control device 114 can change the back image or the effect mode of the super reach according to the game state based on the back image change command or the game state command. In addition, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10, and change the back image or the effect mode of the super reach according to the gaming state. Then, image data corresponding to at least a partial range of the rear image after the change or the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the presentation mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 From the resident area, the back image can be displayed immediately using the image data resident in the back image area 235c.

  In addition, the display control device 114 may change the rear surface image in accordance with the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the back image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may Here, when the image data of the back image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in the sub area, or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined such that a new back image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the audio lamp control device 113, and when the vibration error is detected by the audio lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Although the case where the warning image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 The controller 110 may detect a vibration error, and the main controller 110 may transmit an error command notifying the error to either the voice lamp controller 113 or the display controller 114. Then, when an error command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, and sends an error command for further notifying the display control device 114 of the error. May be

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of the vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is on in the display setting process (see FIG. 38). The warning image setting process (see FIG. 39) may be performed when it is determined, to display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. In this case, since it becomes unnecessary to transmit and receive the error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  Moreover, although the case where the vibration sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13 was described in the said embodiment, it replaces with the vibration sensor or with the vibration sensor, a magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 It is also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to suppress that the flow of the ball is changed by the magnetic field such as a magnet and the ball is intentionally entered into the ball entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, if the main controller 110 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is An error command to be transmitted may be sent from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114 via the audio lamp control unit 113 or directly. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command that indicates an error may be transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, the image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident in the error message pictorial area 235 f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113 The display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 when receiving an error command from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113 to transmit the magnetic field error. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, the display control device 114 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113. The warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. Thereby, the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113, or recognizes the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235, an error message image for notifying a magnetic field error without delay is shown in FIG. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is not It can be suppressed.

  When the drawing content required to change the color tone of a part or all of one presentation is defined by the additional data table or the display data table, in the additional data table or the display data table, 1 in the third symbol display device 81 The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed at that time corresponding to the address in which the time for which the image for the frame is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) is represented as one unit, and the change in the sprite It may define color information specifying a color tone. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452 d and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If color information to be displayed is specified, color information of the corresponding sprite type specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed. The drawing list may be created in place of the color information specified by the additional drawing content of the data table. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  In addition, when the drawing data necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 In correspondence with the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for displaying is displayed as one unit, at that time, the type of sprite to be replaced, the type of sprite to be newly displayed, and the new It may define the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 displays the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d, various sprites specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233 f Among them, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the type of sprite to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table. It may include transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data which is required when drawing an image according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying effects that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines an effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates the drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. You may configure it.

  Thus, the image controller 237 can transfer image data of a sprite used in drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, effects to be additionally displayed can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 easily and reliably. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing drawing of the image based on the additional drawing content. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table. Although the case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the super reach selected by the above has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table May be This makes it possible to easily identify the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player. Further, since it is not necessary to define drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data size of the display data table.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. The additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table is defined not only for the additional drawing content but also including transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image performed according to the additional drawing content. Good. This makes it possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering, so from the additional data table and the transfer data table for addition The processing load required for the specification can be reduced as compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified.

  In the above embodiment, the display control device 114 has described the case of preparing the display data table for each fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "fluctuation start", "high speed fluctuation", "notice effect", "normal reach", "super reach", and the display data table is prepared according to the fluctuation pattern indicated in the display fluctuation pattern command. After identifying the elements necessary for the fluctuation production, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets necessary for the fluctuation production specified are put together into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is generated. You may do so. For "variation start", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", etc., a display common to each fluctuation pattern is often performed. Therefore, the data table can be efficiently provided by elementizing the fluctuation effect in this way and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

  In the above embodiment, in the display data table and the transfer data table, the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 233f using the common pointer 233f has been described. Alternatively, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every display interval of an image of one frame for ending the drawing processing (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interruption signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image of one frame. Since the driving of the third symbol display device 81 is always performed so that an image of one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), a V interrupt signal is generated for each display of an image of one frame. By sending, it is possible to keep accurate without having to time its time interval.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer to which the drawn image is to be expanded based on the drawing object buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded from the other frame buffer earlier. Has been described and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the image buffer 237 is a frame buffer to which the drawn image should be expanded each time the drawing list is received. May be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read out from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Also, each time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer to which the drawn image should be expanded. The frame buffer to be used may be switched.

  In the above embodiment, after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main display unit 110 is notified via the audio lamp control device 113 until the finalized display effect is finished. When neither the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the case of setting the demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect to the display data table buffer 233 d Although this has been described, the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233 d again. Also, in this case, until the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, the finalized display effect is Each time the process is ended, the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, the finalized display effect can be continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the variation pattern command or the demonstration command is received from the main control device 110.

  In the above embodiment, a case was described where the demonstration effect was to change the back image and to stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers from "0" to "9". The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol including the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semitransparent state. In addition, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. In addition, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third pattern or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, in the display control means 114, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image after power-on from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and power on. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b and displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on after the transfer is completed, transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control means 114 first transfers only image data corresponding to the main image at power on after power on from the character ROM 234 to the power on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 at power on after power transfer is completed. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier after the power is turned on, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be checked in the operation check in the player, the person in charge of the hall, or the factory at the time of manufacture. It is possible to immediately confirm that the operation has started without any problems by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b. Thereby, when the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b and the display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 after that, the display fluctuation pattern command is received. Based on the above, it is possible to display a simple variation display on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. It is desirable that the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b be performed immediately after displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on. As a result, it is possible to more quickly perform the fluctuation display by the power-on fluctuation image.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table should be transferred to the contents of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing contents) or to that time, corresponding to the time that represents 20 milliseconds as one unit. Although the case of defining the information (transfer data information) of the image data has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the display content is defined at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 seconds.

  Further, in the display data table, as a sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals, an address of the character ROM 234 where image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored instead of instructing the sprite type itself. May be defined. In the display control device 114, the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored I manage the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. There is no need to manage both the information specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and for each sprite, whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored. Although the case has been described, in place of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when instructing transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and the predetermined image data It may be determined whether or not it has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, an instruction to transfer image data of that predetermined sprite type may be set. When the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when transferring image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. In the normal video RAM 236, if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the case where the MPU 231 performs the process of disabling the transfer process has been described. The process may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and it is determined whether the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be stored. Also, the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in a work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in this case, the MPU 231 sends an image to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. Alternatively, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  Although the above embodiment has described the case where only the image data corresponding to “rear surface A” among the plurality of rear surface images is made to reside in the rear surface image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessarily limited thereto. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be made to reside in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the back image used in some super reach may be made to reside in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, transfer processing of image data from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed by making the back image of super reach expected to have a high or high frequency of occurrence resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. Can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the transfer instruction of the image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 transmits the transfer instruction at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. Although the case of controlling the image controller 237 to transfer the image data instructed in step from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The display data is displayed at the top of the display data table. The MPU 231 describes information on the type of sprite required in the table, and the MPU 231 transfers the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the type of sprite to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of that image type is The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer data to the video RAM 236.

  In the above embodiment, the case of displaying a high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player can not visually recognize is displayed when performing variation effects. Alternatively, all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so as not to be visually recognized, or all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image y in which a large number of white points are displayed randomly. .

  In the above embodiment, each time the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is updated in the main control unit 110 (that is, when each value increases or decreases), the holding ball number command is mainly controlled Although the case of transmitting from the device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is increased in the main control unit 110, the holding number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223 a by 1 when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. As a result, the number of times the main controller 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced. The control load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the winnings to the first entrance 64 and the passing of the second entrance 67 are configured to be respectively suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of holding balls is limited to four times. It may be set to three or less times, or five or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of balls in the variable display based on winning on the first entrance 64, the number of areas divided into four or a part of the third symbol display device 81 by the number of balls It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of holding balls is notified by the light emitting member You may configure it.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbols as identification information are scrolled in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a design along a predetermined path such as direction or L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, and, for example, one or more characters may be displayed in various ways along with the symbols or in addition to the symbols, or may be displayed in various ways. It also includes the effect display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In addition, the present invention may be implemented to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to slot machines and pachinko machines, various types of game machines may be implemented, such as arelapi and ball ball, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols and does not include a handle for ball launch. The thing is mentioned. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  In addition, some or all of the embodiments and modifications described above may be implemented in combination.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown.

<Feature A group>
Acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on establishment of the start condition, and propriety determination means for executing the determination of a lottery game based on establishment of the lottery condition for the first information acquired by the acquisition means; The first display means for displaying the first identification information indicating the result of the determination by the success or failure determination means, the display control means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the first information acquired by the acquisition means In a gaming machine having storage means for storing information, and second display means for displaying second identification information indicating the number of the first information stored in the storage means, the second identification information is By combining and displaying a plurality of symbols, it is shown that one piece of the first information is stored in the storage means, and among the symbols displayed by the plurality of second identification information, some symbols Combination of Gaming machine A1, wherein those having a symbol determination means for determining a notification display mode for notifying the advisability judgment information regarding the advisability judgment result by.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the first information is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of the start condition. Based on the establishment of the drawing condition of the first information acquired by the acquisition means, the judgment of the lottery game is executed by the judgment unit. First identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed on the first display unit. The identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means. The first information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means. Second identification information indicating the number of stored first information in the storage means is displayed by the second display means. Among the symbols displayed by the plurality of second identification information, a notification display mode in which the success or failure determination information related to the result of the determination on success or failure is notified by combination of some of the symbols is determined by the symbol determination means. As a result, the player can obtain the information on the pass / fail judgment even with the second identification information. Therefore, the player can determine the result of the success or failure judgment not only from the first identification information but also from the second identification information, and can enjoy the game more variously. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early in the game.

  The gaming machine A1 includes an operation means that can be operated by a player, and the second identification information is displayed on the second display means on condition that the first identification information is dynamically displayed. A game machine A2 comprising: second identification information redetermining means for redetermining a symbol constituting the second identification information when the operation means is operated in the state where the game is being performed.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, on the condition that the first identification information is displayed dynamically, the operation means operable by the player can be operated while the second identification information is displayed on the second display means. In this case, the symbols constituting the second identification information are redetermined by the second identification information redetermining means. Thus, the player can execute the process of redetermining the symbol of the second identification information at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, the player can enjoy the change of the second identification information, and can prevent the player from getting bored early in the game.

<Feature B group>
Acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on establishment of the start condition, and propriety determination means for executing the determination of a lottery game based on establishment of the lottery condition for the first information acquired by the acquisition means; The first display means for displaying the first identification information indicating the result of the determination by the success or failure determination means, the display control means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the first information acquired by the acquisition means In a gaming machine having storage means for storing information, and second display means for displaying second identification information indicating the number of the first information stored in the storage means, the second identification information is The second display means is configured with a number display area indicating the number of pieces of the first information stored in the storage means, and the second display means is set in the number display area. , Said second identification information And second display control means for dynamically displaying the second identification information sequentially in a predetermined direction on the second display means, and of the plurality of second identification information. And a symbol determining means for determining a combination of symbols for notifying a player of information on a game by combining several symbols and displaying them at a predetermined position. A game machine B1 characterized by: .

  According to the gaming machine B1, the first information is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of the start condition. Based on the establishment of the drawing condition of the first information acquired by the acquisition means, the judgment of the lottery game is executed by the judgment unit. The first display means displays first identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination means. The identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means. The first information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means. Second identification information indicating the number of stored first information in the storage means is displayed by the second display means. The second identification information is configured by a series of symbols configured by a plurality of symbols. In the second display means, the number of pieces of first information stored in the storage means is indicated in the number display area. The symbols of the second identification information set in the number display area are displayed by the symbol display area. The second identification information is dynamically displayed on the second display means in the predetermined direction sequentially from the second display control means. By combining several symbols of the plurality of second identification information and displaying them at a predetermined position, a combination of symbols for notifying the player of information on the game is determined by the symbol determination means. Thereby, since the second identification information is dynamically displayed in the symbol row, the player can easily determine the order in which the symbols are displayed. Therefore, it can be expected during the fluctuation of the second identification information whether or not the player is displayed in a desired combination for the combination of the symbols of the second identification information. Therefore, the player can enjoy not only the first identification information but also the dynamic display of the second identification information, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early in the game.

  The second identification information is displayed side by side on the second display means for each of the first information, and in combination of a plurality of symbols of the second identification information, notifies the information on the result of the pass / fail judgment as the game information. Yes, in the reach display mode before the symbol of one of the second identification information is displayed among the combinations indicating the hit of the result of the determination by the symbols displayed by the predetermined number of the second identification information (2) When the plurality of pieces of second identification information are displayed in the reach display mode by the reach symbol display means for displaying the identification information on the second display means and the reach symbol display means, the new second identification A game machine B characterized by having prohibiting means for prohibiting dynamic display of the second identification information displayed in the reach display mode while information is displayed dynamically. .

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the second identification information is displayed side by side on the second display means for each first information. Information on the result of the pass / fail determination is notified as gaming information by a combination of symbols of a plurality of second identification information. The second identification information is a reach symbol in the reach display mode before the symbol of one second identification information is displayed among the combinations indicating the hit determination result by the symbols displayed by the predetermined number of second identification information. Displayed on the second display means by the display means. When a plurality of second identification information is displayed in the reach display mode by the reach symbol display means, the second displayed in the reach display mode while the new second identification information is dynamically displayed Dynamic display of identification information is prohibited by the prohibiting means. Thus, by maintaining the state displayed in the reach display mode, it is possible to make the player expect the display mode indicating the win to be displayed by the second identification information. Therefore, by displaying the reach display mode, it is possible to further improve the taste of the game.

  It has a main control means for executing control of a game and a slave control means for executing control of a game based on a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means determines the success or failure of the success or failure judgment means. A success / failure determination signal generation unit that generates a success / failure determination signal for notifying the sub control unit of the result, and a first information signal to the sub control unit based on the fact that the first information is stored in the storage unit. First information signal generation means for generating the first information signal generation means, and prior success / failure determination signal generation means for generating the prior approval signal based on the first information and notifying the slave control means before the lottery condition is established. And the secondary control means displays, based on the yes / no determination signal output from the main control means, the first display means for displaying identification information indicating the yes / no determination result, and the prior yes / no determination Based on the signal, What has the prior information storage means which stores prior information for every establishment of conditions, and the said pattern determination means which determines the symbol displayed as said each 2nd identification information from the said symbol row based on the said prior information A game machine B3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exerted. That is, control of the game is executed by the main control means. Control of the game is executed by the slave control means based on the control signal from the main control means. In the main control means, the success / failure determination signal generation means generates a success / failure determination signal for notifying the sub-control means of the success / failure determination result of the success / failure determination means. Based on the fact that the first information is stored in the storage means, the first information signal is generated by the first information signal generation means in the slave control means. Before the lottery condition is established, a priori pass / fail judgment signal based on the first information is generated by the priori pass / fail judgment signal generating means and notified to the sub control means. In the secondary control means, identification information indicating the result of the yes / no determination is displayed on the first display means based on the yes / no determination signal output from the main control means. The second identification information is displayed by the second display means based on the reception of the first information signal. Prior information is stored by the prior information storage means each time the starting condition is established, based on the prior success / failure determination signal. Based on the prior information, a symbol to be displayed as each second identification information from the symbol row is determined by the symbol determination means. As a result, before the first identification information dynamically starts to be displayed, it is possible to notify of the result of the yes / no determination by the second identification information. Therefore, the success / failure determination result of the first information different from each other can be known from the dynamically displayed first identification information and the dynamically displayed second identification information, and the player can play more games. It can be done efficiently. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early in the game.

<Feature D group>
It has a main control means for executing game control, and a slave control means for executing game control based on a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the start condition. An acquisition means for acquiring the first information, a pass / fail judgment means for judging the success or failure of the lottery game based on the establishment of the lottery condition based on the acquisition of the first information obtained by the acquisition means, and a judgment result of the pass / fail judgment means The success / failure determination signal generation means for generating a success / failure determination signal for notifying the sub control means, the storage means for storing the first information until the lottery condition is satisfied, and the first information in the storage means First information signal generating means for generating a first information signal to the slave control means based on the stored information, and prior acceptance or rejection signal based on the first information before the lottery condition is established; To the slave control means Prior notification determination signal generating means for notifying the user, and the secondary control means displays identification information indicating the result of the determination on the basis of the determination result on the basis of the determination signal output from the main control means; Display means, display control means for causing the first display means to dynamically display the identification information, and storage in the storage means indicated by the first information signal based on reception of the first information signal A second display means for displaying second identification information indicating the number of the first information being stored; and a prior information storage means for storing prior information for each establishment of the start condition based on the prior yes or no determination signal; In the gaming machine, the second identification information is composed of a series of symbols displayed by a plurality of symbols having a predetermined order, and the display means is configured to display the number of pieces of the second identification information Display area and its The number display area has a symbol display area capable of displaying a plurality of symbols, and the slave control means displays the symbol as the second identification information based on the prior information from the symbol array. Symbol determining means for determining a combination of symbols for notifying the player of the content of the prior information by a combination of symbols determined by the plurality of second identification information, and the above-mentioned corresponding to the second identification information The display position of the second identification information is changed to the number of new first information based on the change in the number of the first information stored in the storage unit based on the satisfaction of the lottery condition of the first information. Of the second identification information based on the change of the display position of the second identification information by the display position changing means for changing to the display position corresponding to Move display to move and display the number A game machine D1 characterized by having a means.

  According to the gaming machine D1, control of the game is executed by the main control means. Control of the game is executed by the slave control means based on the control signal from the main control means. In the main control means, the first information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the start condition. Whether the lottery game is successful or not is executed based on the first information acquired by the acquiring means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. A yes / no decision signal generation means generates a yes / no decision signal for notifying the secondary control means of the yes / no decision result of the yes / no decision means. The first information is stored by the storage means until the lottery condition is established. Based on the fact that the first information is stored in the storage means, the first information signal is generated by the first information signal generation means in the slave control means. Before the lottery condition is established, a priori pass / fail judgment signal based on the first information is generated by the priori pass / fail judgment signal generating means and notified to the sub control means. In the secondary control means, based on the yes / no decision signal output from the main control means, identification information indicating the yes / no decision result is displayed by the first display means. The identification information is dynamically displayed by the display control means on the first display means. Based on the reception of the first information signal, second identification information indicating the number of pieces of first information stored in the storage means indicated by the first information signal is displayed by the second display means. Prior information is stored by the prior information storage means each time the starting condition is established, based on the prior success / failure determination signal. The second identification information is configured by symbol rows displayed with a plurality of symbols having a predetermined order. In the display means, the respective second identification information is displayed by the number display area. A plurality of symbols are displayed in the symbol display area in the number display area. In the subordinate control means, the symbol to be displayed as the second identification information is determined by the symbol determination means based on the prior information from the symbol row, and the combination of the symbols formed of a plurality of second identification information sets the prior information A combination of symbols for notifying the player of the content is determined. The display position of the second identification information is new based on the change in the number of the first information stored in the storage unit based on the satisfaction of the lottery condition of the first information corresponding to the second identification information. It is changed by the display position changing means to the display position corresponding to the number of information. Based on the change of the display position of the second identification information by the display position changing means, the symbol row of the second identification information is moved and displayed by the movement display means with a predetermined number of symbols. As a result, when the first identification information is displayed based on the first information stored in the storage unit, the symbol of the second identification information is moved and displayed in accordance with the determined rule. It is possible to predict in advance the change in the display mode of the symbol. Therefore, the player can determine in advance that the predetermined combination will be made, and can determine early about the result of the pass / fail determination. Therefore, since the effects of the game are diversified, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

  In the symbol display area, symbols in a predetermined range of the symbol row are displayed, and the second identification information is displayed on the second display unit, arranged for each of the first identification information stored in the storage unit. The symbol determination means determines a predetermined position among symbol display positions of the symbol display area of the plurality of second identification information as an effective position for displaying information related to the prior information in combination of the symbols. A game machine D2 characterized by being a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the second identification information is displayed on the second display means, arranged for each of the first identification information stored in the storage means. Among the symbol display positions of the symbol display areas of the plurality of second identification information, the symbol determining means is determined by the symbol determining means as an effective position for displaying information regarding the prior information in combination of the symbols. As a result, the player can determine the information related to the advance information by confirming the symbol displayed at the determined effective position, so that the player can easily play the game.

  Acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on establishment of the start condition, and propriety determination means for executing the determination of a lottery game based on establishment of the lottery condition for the first information acquired by the acquisition means; The first display means for displaying the first identification information indicating the result of the determination by the success or failure determination means, the display control means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the first information acquired by the acquisition means In a gaming machine having storage means for storing information, and second display means for displaying second identification information indicating the number of the first information stored in the storage means, the second identification information is By combining and displaying a plurality of symbols, it is shown that one piece of the first information is stored in the storage means, and an arbitrary display area is selected from the display areas for displaying the plurality of second identification information. Second identification It is characterized by having an information selection means and a pattern determination means for determining a symbol to be displayed in the display area selected by the second identification information selection means so as to notify predetermined information related to a game. A gaming machine E1.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the first information is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of the start condition. Based on the establishment of the drawing condition of the first information acquired by the acquisition means, the judgment of the lottery game is executed by the judgment unit. The first display means displays first identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination means. The identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means. The first information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means. Second identification information indicating the number of stored first information in the storage means is displayed by the second display means. The second identification information is displayed by combining a plurality of symbols, which indicates that one first information is stored in the storage means. An arbitrary display area is selected by the second identification information selection means from the display areas for displaying a plurality of second identification information. The symbols to be displayed in the display area selected by the second identification information selection means are determined by the symbol determination means so as to notify predetermined information concerning the game. As a result, since the display area selected from among the display areas for displaying the plurality of pieces of second identification information changes, the player can enjoy the combination of symbols in different display areas as appropriate. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the problem that the game becomes monotonous and the player gets bored with the game early.

  A game machine E2 characterized in that the second identification information selection means selects a display area in which the second identification information is displayed in the display area.

  According to the gaming machine E2, the second identification information selection means selects the display area in which the second identification information is displayed in the display area in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 There is an effect that the player can be expected to select the display area displayed by the combination of advantageous symbols.

  A game machine E3 characterized in that the second identification information selection means selects a display area before the second identification information is displayed in the display area.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1, the second identification information selecting means selects the display area before the second identification information is displayed in the display area, so that the player There is an effect that it is possible to increase interest in the design of the second identification information displayed in the display area selected in.

  The said symbol determination means determines the symbol displayed on the display area selected by the said 2nd identification information selection means based on the yes-no decision result by which the 1st identification information currently displayed dynamically was determined. A game machine E4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine E4, the second identification information selecting means selects the second identification information selection means based on the result of determination of the dynamically displayed first identification information in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3. Since the symbols to be displayed in the displayed display area are determined by the symbol determination means, the player is able to determine in advance the result of the pass / fail judgment before the first identification information is stopped and displayed. is there.

<Feature F group>
It has a main control means for executing game control, and a slave control means for executing game control based on a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the start condition. An acquisition means for acquiring the first information, a pass / fail judgment means for judging the success or failure of the lottery game based on the establishment of the lottery condition based on the acquisition of the first information obtained by the acquisition means, and a judgment result of the pass / fail judgment means The success / failure determination signal generation means for generating a success / failure determination signal for notifying the sub control means, the storage means for storing the first information until the lottery condition is satisfied, and the first information in the storage means First information signal generating means for generating a first information signal to the slave control means based on the stored information, and prior acceptance or rejection signal based on the first information before the lottery condition is established; To the slave control means Prior notification determination signal generating means for notifying the user, and the secondary control means displays identification information indicating the result of the determination on the basis of the determination result on the basis of the determination signal output from the main control means; Display means, display control means for causing the first display means to dynamically display the identification information, and storage in the storage means indicated by the first information signal based on reception of the first information signal A second display means for displaying second identification information indicating the number of the first information being stored; and a prior information storage means for storing prior information for each establishment of the start condition based on the prior yes or no determination signal; In the gaming machine, the display means has a number display area for displaying each of the second identification information, and a symbol display area capable of displaying a plurality of symbols in each of the number display areas. , Said slave control means The symbol storage means storing a plurality of symbol data to be displayed in the symbol display area and the symbol storage means for determining the combination of the symbols to be displayed as the second identification information based on the prior information An effective combination range in which the information on the prior information is notified to the player by the combination of the determination means and the symbols displayed in each of the symbol display areas in the number display area displayed on the second display means A game machine F1 characterized by comprising range determination means for determining.

  According to the gaming machine F1, control of the game is executed by the main control means. Control of the game is executed by the slave control means based on the control signal from the main control means. In the main control means, the first information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the start condition. Whether the lottery game is successful or not is executed based on the first information acquired by the acquiring means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. A yes / no decision signal generation means generates a yes / no decision signal for notifying the secondary control means of the yes / no decision result of the yes / no decision means. The first information is stored by the storage means until the lottery condition is established. Based on the fact that the first information is stored in the storage means, the first information signal is generated by the first information signal generation means in the slave control means. Before the lottery condition is established, a priori pass / fail judgment signal based on the first information is generated by the priori pass / fail judgment signal generating means and notified to the sub control means. In the secondary control means, based on the yes / no decision signal output from the main control means, identification information indicating the yes / no decision result is displayed by the first display means. The identification information is dynamically displayed by the display control means on the first display means. Based on the reception of the first information signal, second identification information indicating the number of pieces of first information stored in the storage means indicated by the first information signal is displayed by the second display means. Prior information is stored by the prior information storage means each time the starting condition is established, based on the prior success / failure determination signal. In the display means, each of the second identification information is displayed in the number display area. In each number display area, a plurality of symbols are displayed by the symbol display area. In the slave control means, a plurality of symbol data to be displayed in the symbol display area is stored by the symbol storage means. From the symbol storage means, the combination of the symbols to be displayed as the second identification information is determined by the symbol determination means based on the prior information. An effective combination range in which information on prior information is notified to the player is determined by the range determining means by the combination of the symbols displayed in each of the symbol display areas in the number display area displayed on the second display means. As a result, by changing the effective combination range, it is possible to make various combinations of symbols, and it is possible to provide the player with an effect having a change. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

<Feature G group>
The acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the start condition, the propriety determination means for determining the first information acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the acquisition means The storage means for storing the first information, the first identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination means, and the first identification information stored in the storage means until the lottery condition corresponding to the first information is satisfied. In a gaming machine having display means for displaying second identification information indicating the number of first information, a predetermined number of symbols are selected as the second identification information from a plurality of preset symbols. A second identification information selection display means for arranging the symbols selected by the symbol selection means in a predetermined direction and displaying them on the display means for each of the first information stored in the storage means; A display area setting unit configured to respectively set a first display area of the display unit shown and a second display area of the display unit on which the second identification information is displayed; A game machine G1, characterized in that the size of each of the first display area and the second display area is varied based on the number of the first information stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the first information is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of the start condition. Pass / fail determination is performed by the pass / fail determination means based on the establishment of the lottery condition for the first information obtained by the obtaining means. The first information is stored by the storage means until the lottery condition corresponding to the first information is satisfied by the acquisition means. The display means displays the first identification information indicating the result of determination by the yes-no determination means and the second identification information indicating the number of pieces of first information stored in the storage means. A predetermined number of symbols are selected as the second identification information from a plurality of preset symbols, and the symbols selected by the symbol selection means are arranged in a predetermined direction for each first information stored in the storage means and displayed Is displayed by the second identification information selection display means. The first display area of the display means for displaying the first identification information and the second display area of the display means for displaying the second identification information are respectively set by the display area setting means. In the display area setting means, the sizes of the first display area and the second display area are respectively changed by the display area setting means based on the number of pieces of first information stored in the storage means. Thereby, the size of the display area can be appropriately changed according to the number of pieces of second identification information to be displayed, and the display area can be effectively used. Therefore, the player can comfortably play the game, and can be prevented from being bored with the game.

<Feature H group>
It has a main control means for executing game control and a slave control means for executing game control based on a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the start condition. And acquisition means for acquiring the first information, and a pass / fail judgment means for judging the success or failure of the lottery game based on the establishment of the drawing conditions for the first information acquired by the acquisition means, and the result of And an effect signal for determining an effect based on the result of the determination on the basis of the determination result of the determination based on the determination result of the determination on the basis of the determination result of the determination unit. The slave control means generates the effect signal generating means to generate, the memory means for storing the first information until the lottery condition is satisfied, and the slave control means based on the fact that the first information is stored in the memory means. 1 information signal First information signal generation means for generating the first information signal generation means, and prior success or failure judgment signal generation means for generating the preliminary success or failure judgment signal based on the first information and notifying the , And the secondary control means displays, on the first display means, first display means for displaying identification information indicating a yes / no determination result based on the yes / no determination signal output from the main control means. Display control means for dynamically displaying identification information, dynamic display mode storage means for storing a plurality of different dynamic display modes for dynamically displaying the identification information, and main control means from the dynamic display mode storage means Dynamic display mode determination means for determining one dynamic display mode based on the above-mentioned effect signal, and the storage means indicated by the first information signal based on the reception of the first information signal The above is stored A second display means for displaying second identification information indicating the number of pieces of information, and a prior information storage means for storing prior information for each establishment of the start condition based on the prior yes or no determination signal In the gaming machine, the second identification information is constituted by a symbol array displayed by a plurality of symbols having a predetermined order, and the display means is provided with a number display area for displaying the respective second identification information and The symbol display area has a symbol display area capable of displaying a plurality of symbols, and the slave control means displays the second identification information based on the prior information from the symbol array. A symbol determining means for determining symbols and determining a combination of symbols for notifying the player of the content of the prior information by a combination of symbols composed of the plurality of second identification information, and corresponding to the second identification information Before the first information to be The display position of the second identification information is displayed corresponding to the number of new first information based on the change in the number of the first information stored in the storage unit based on the establishment of the lottery condition. At least one of the number display area is determined and displayed in the number display area when the display position changing means changes the position and the identification information is dynamically displayed in a specific dynamic display mode. A game machine H1 comprising: re-symbol determination means for determining again a combination of symbols to be displayed and displaying the symbol combination in the symbol display area.

  According to the gaming machine H1, in the main control means that executes control of the game, the first information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the start condition. Based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the first game acquired by the acquiring means is subjected to the lottery judgment of the lottery game. A yes / no decision signal generation means generates a yes / no decision signal for notifying the secondary control means of the yes / no decision result of the yes / no decision means. Based on the determination result of the success or failure determination means, the effect signal generation means generates an effect signal for determining an effect based on the determination result. The first information is stored by the storage means until the lottery condition is established. Based on the fact that the first information is stored in the storage means, the first information signal is generated by the first information signal generation means in the slave control means. Before the lottery condition is established, a priori pass / fail judgment signal based on the first information is generated by the priori pass / fail judgment signal generating means and notified to the sub control means. In the secondary control means, based on the yes / no decision signal output from the main control means, identification information indicating the yes / no decision result is displayed by the first display means. The identification information is dynamically displayed by the display control means on the first display means. A plurality of different dynamic display modes for dynamically displaying identification information are stored by the dynamic display mode storage means. One dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the effect signal from the dynamic display mode storage means from the main control means. Based on the reception of the first information signal, second identification information indicating the number of pieces of first information stored in the storage means indicated by the first information signal is displayed by the second display means. Prior information is stored by the prior information storage means each time the starting condition is established, based on the prior success / failure determination signal. The second identification information is configured by symbol rows displayed with a plurality of symbols having a predetermined order. In the display means, the respective second identification information is displayed in the number display area, and a symbol display area capable of displaying a plurality of symbols is provided in the number display area. In the slave control means, the symbol to be displayed as the second identification information is determined by the symbol determination means based on the prior information from the symbol row, and the content of the prior information is a combination of symbols composed of a plurality of second identification information. A combination of symbols to be notified to the player is determined. The display position of the second identification information is new based on the change in the number of the first information stored in the storage unit based on the satisfaction of the lottery condition of the first information corresponding to the second identification information. It is changed by the display position changing means to the display position corresponding to the number of information. When the identification information is dynamically displayed in a specific dynamic display mode, at least one of the number display areas is determined, and the combination of the symbols displayed in the number display area is again determined by the re-pattern determination means It is determined and displayed in the symbol display area. Thus, the player can expect the symbol displayed in the number display area to be re-varied by displaying the specific dynamic display mode. Thus, the player can enjoy the advance information notified by the second identification information as well as the display mode displayed in the specific dynamic display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early in the game.

  In the gaming machine H1, the slave control means moves a predetermined number of symbols of the second identification information based on the change in the display position of the second identification information by the display position changing means. A game machine H2 characterized by having movement display means for displaying.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the slave control means, the symbol row of the second identification information is moved and displayed by the movement display means with the number of predetermined symbols based on the display position changing means changing the display position of the second identification information. Therefore, the player can determine in advance the display mode of the symbol row of the second identification information due to the change of the display position, and enjoy the player to predict the display manner of the symbol row of the second identification information Has the effect of being able to

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the specific dynamic display mode is set so as to be easily selected by the effect signal generated when the determination result by the success or failure determination means is out of the case of a hit. A game machine H3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, a specific dynamic display mode is more likely to be selected by the effect signal generated when the determination result by the propriety determination means is out than in the winning case Since the setting is made, the player can enjoy the display mode of the second identification information when the dynamic display mode in which it is difficult to have the expectation to the jackpot is displayed, and the player is bored with the game. It has the effect of being able to prevent

  Each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed on a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the winning opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

Each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
Conventionally, a lottery is performed along with a winning of the game ball to the starting opening, and after a predetermined symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the display device, a lottery game is performed to stop and display the symbol indicating the lottery result Ru. If the game ball is further prized at the starting opening while the predetermined symbol is fluctuating, the right to execute the lottery game is held for a predetermined number of times, and the symbol indicating the number of held pieces is displayed on the display device (for example, Patent document 1: Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-239732).
In this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem that the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit, and the game gets bored before the big hit game is started.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from getting bored with a game early by executing various effects. The purpose is to
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 comprises: main control means for executing control of a game; and slave control means for executing control of a game based on a control signal from the main control means; Acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the start condition, the main control means having:
Pass / fail judgment means for judging the success or failure of the lottery game based on the establishment of the lottery condition based on the establishment of the lottery conditions by the acquisition means, and pass / fail judgment for notifying the sub-control means of the judgment result of the pass / fail judgment means The production condition generation means for generating a signal, generation signal generation means for generating a production signal for determining an effect based on the determination result of the determination based on the determination result of the determination of the determination means, and the lottery condition Storage means for storing the first information until the establishment, and first information signal generation means for generating a first information signal to the slave control means based on the fact that the first information is stored in the storage means And prior success / failure determination signal generation means for generating an advance success / failure determination signal based on said first information before said lottery condition is satisfied, and notifying said sub-control means. Means First display means for displaying identification information indicating the result of the determination on the basis of the determination result from the main control means; display control means for causing the first display means to dynamically display the identification information; Dynamic display mode storage means for storing a plurality of different dynamic display modes for dynamically displaying the identification information, and one of the dynamic display mode storage means based on the effect signal from the main control means from the dynamic display mode storage means Dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode, and the number of pieces of the first information stored in the storage means indicated by the first information signal based on the reception of the first information signal A second display means for displaying second identification information to be shown; and a prior information storage means for storing prior information for each establishment of the start condition based on the prior yes or no determination signal; Information is predetermined The display unit is configured by a symbol row displayed by a plurality of symbols having an order, and the display means is capable of displaying a plurality of symbols in the number display region displaying the second identification information and the number display region A display area, and the slave control means determines a symbol to be displayed as the second identification information based on the prior information from the symbol array, and is configured by the plurality of second identification information Based on the fact that symbol determination means for determining the combination of symbols to notify the player of the content of the prior information in combination of the selected symbols, and the lottery condition of the first information corresponding to the second identification information being established A display position changing unit that changes the display position of the second identification information to a display position corresponding to the number of new first information based on a change in the number of the first information stored in the storage unit; , Said identification information is specified When dynamically displayed in the dynamic display mode, at least one of the number display areas is determined, and the combination of symbols displayed in the number display area is determined again, and the symbol display area is displayed. And re-symbol determination means to be displayed on the display.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, in the main control means that executes control of the game, the first information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the start condition. Based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the first game acquired by the acquiring means is subjected to the lottery judgment of the lottery game. A yes / no decision signal generation means generates a yes / no decision signal for notifying the secondary control means of the yes / no decision result of the yes / no decision means. Based on the determination result of the success or failure determination means, the effect signal generation means generates an effect signal for determining an effect based on the determination result. The first information is stored by the storage means until the lottery condition is established. Based on the fact that the first information is stored in the storage means, the first information signal is generated by the first information signal generation means in the slave control means. Before the lottery condition is established, a priori pass / fail judgment signal based on the first information is generated by the priori pass / fail judgment signal generating means and notified to the sub control means.
In the secondary control means, based on the yes / no decision signal output from the main control means, identification information indicating the yes / no decision result is displayed by the first display means. The identification information is dynamically displayed by the display control means on the first display means. A plurality of different dynamic display modes for dynamically displaying identification information are stored by the dynamic display mode storage means. One dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the effect signal from the dynamic display mode storage means from the main control means. Based on the reception of the first information signal, second identification information indicating the number of pieces of first information stored in the storage means indicated by the first information signal is displayed by the second display means. Prior information is stored by the prior information storage means each time the starting condition is established, based on the prior success / failure determination signal.
The second identification information is configured by symbol rows displayed with a plurality of symbols having a predetermined order. In the display means, the respective second identification information is displayed in the number display area, and a symbol display area capable of displaying a plurality of symbols is provided in the number display area.
In the slave control means, the symbol to be displayed as the second identification information is determined by the symbol determination means based on the prior information from the symbol row, and the content of the prior information is a combination of symbols composed of a plurality of second identification information. A combination of symbols to be notified to the player is determined. The display position of the second identification information is new based on the change in the number of the first information stored in the storage unit based on the satisfaction of the lottery condition of the first information corresponding to the second identification information. It is changed by the display position changing means to the display position corresponding to the number of information. When the identification information is dynamically displayed in a specific dynamic display mode, at least one of the number display areas is determined, and the combination of the symbols displayed in the number display area is again determined by the re-pattern determination means It is determined and displayed in the symbol display area.
Thus, the player can expect the symbol displayed in the number display area to be re-varied by displaying the specific dynamic display mode. Thus, the player can enjoy the advance information notified by the second identification information as well as the display mode displayed in the specific dynamic display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early in the game.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (1st display means, 2nd display means )
113 display control unit (display control hand stage)
203 RAM (storage means )
S305-size Teite stage S402 acquisition means
S1413 Part of display mode determination means

Claims (1)

Main control means for executing game control;
And secondary control means for executing control of the game based on a control signal from the main control means,
The main control means
Acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on establishment of the start condition;
Eligibility determining means for determining whether the lottery game is successful or not on the basis of the establishment of the lottery condition, the first information acquired by the acquiring means;
Compliance determination signal generation means for generating a compliance determination signal for notifying the sub control means of the compliance determination result of the compliance determination means;
Effect signal generating means for generating an effect signal for determining an effect based on the result of the determination of the success or failure based on the result of the determination of the success or failure of the means for judging the success or failure;
Storage means for storing the first information until the lottery condition is satisfied;
First information signal generation means for generating a first information signal to the slave control means based on the storage of the first information in the storage means;
Prior success / failure determination signal generation means for generating an advance success / failure determination signal based on the first information and notifying the slave control means before the lottery condition is satisfied;
The slave control means
First display means for displaying identification information indicating a result of the determination on the basis of the result of determination on the basis of the result of determination on the basis of the result of the main control means;
Display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the first display means;
Dynamic display mode storage means in which a plurality of different dynamic display modes for dynamically displaying the identification information are stored;
Dynamic display mode determination means for determining one dynamic display mode based on the effect signal from the dynamic display mode storage means and the main control means;
A second display means for displaying second identification information indicating the number of the first information stored in the storage means indicated by the first information signal based on the reception of the first information signal;
A gaming machine having prior information storage means for storing prior information for each establishment of the start condition based on the prior success / failure determination signal;
The second identification information is composed of a series of symbols displayed by a plurality of symbols having a predetermined order,
The display means is
A number display area for displaying each of the second identification information;
The number display area has a symbol display area capable of displaying a plurality of symbols,
The slave control means
The symbol to be displayed as the second identification information is determined based on the prior information from the symbol array, and the player is notified of the content of the prior information by a combination of the symbols formed of the plurality of second identification information Symbol determining means for determining a combination of symbols to be notified to the
Display of the second identification information based on a change in the number of the first information stored in the storage unit based on the satisfaction of the lottery condition of the first information corresponding to the second identification information Display position changing means for changing the position to a display position corresponding to the number of new first information;
When the identification information is dynamically displayed in a specific dynamic display mode, at least one of the number display areas is determined, and a combination of symbols displayed in the number display area is determined again. A gaming machine characterized by comprising re-symbol determination means for displaying in the symbol display area.

Images